12 .uno%3ASaveGraphic fe Отвора дијалог за зачувување на избраната битмапирана слика како датотека. Стандардниот формат на датотека е интерниот формат на сликата.
16 .uno%3ACustomAnimation 6d Отвара сопствен прозорец за анимација на панелот за задачи.
10 .uno%3APageSetup 8b Подесува ориентација на страница, маргини, позадина и други опции за изглед.
17 SD_HID_SD_NAVIGATOR_TLB 8a Излистува достапни слајдови. Кликнете двапати на слајд за да го активирате.
10 .uno%3ANavigator 99 Го отвара Навигаторот, каде што може брзо да преминете помеѓу отворените документи.
20 SD_HID_SD_NAVIGATOR_TBI_DRAGTYPE 7a Повлечи и испушти слајдови и именувани објекти на активниот слајд.
1c SD_HID_SD_NAVIGATOR_TBI_PREV 45 Еден слајд наназад во презентацијата.
1c SD_HID_SD_NAVIGATOR_TBI_LAST 58 Премини кон последниот слајд во презентацијата.
24 SD_HID_SD_NAVIGATOR_TBI_SHAPE_FILTER f6 In the submenu you can choose to display a list of all shapes or only the named shapes. Use drag-and-drop in the list to reorder the shapes. When you set the focus to a slide and press the Tab key, the next shape in the defined order is selected.
16 SD_HID_SD_NAVIGATOR_LB 45 Излистува достапни $[officename] документи.
1c SD_HID_SD_NAVIGATOR_TBI_NEXT 56 Премини еден слајд нанапред во презентацијата.
1b SD_HID_SD_NAVIGATOR_TBI_PEN ed Го променува покажувачот на глувчето во молив за да може да го користите за пишување по слајдовите за време на приказ на слајдови.
1d SD_HID_SD_NAVIGATOR_TBI_FIRST 58 Премин кон првиот слајд во приказот на слајдови.
13 SD_HID_SD_NAVIGATOR 99 Го отвара Навигаторот, каде што може брзо да преминете помеѓу отворените документи.
2c sd%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COPY%3AMTR_FLD_MOVE_Y 128 Внесете го вертикалното растојание помеѓу центрите на селектираниот објект и дуплираниот објект. Позитивни вредности поместуваат нагоре, а негативни во надолу.
2c sd%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COPY%3AMTR_FLD_MOVE_X 12b Внесете го хоризонталното растојание помеѓу центрите на селектираниот објект и дуплираниот објект. Позитивни вредности поместуваат во десно, а негативни во лево.
2e sd%3AImageButton%3ADLG_COPY%3ABTN_SET_VIEWDATA fe Внесува широчина и висина од селектираниот објект во полињата на X оската и на Y оската  соодветно како и бојата на објектот во Старт полето.
12 .uno%3ACopyObjects 5c Креира една или повеќе копии од селектиран објект.
2c sd%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COPY%3AMTR_FLD_HEIGHT 9b Внесете ја вредността за која сакате да ја промените висината на дуплираниот објект.
2d sd%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COPY%3ANUM_FLD_COPIES 60 Внесете го бројот на копии што сакате да се креираат.
28 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_COPY%3ALB_START_COLOR 47 Изберете боја за селектираниот објект.
26 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_COPY%3ALB_END_COLOR d9 Изберете боја за дуплираниот објект. Ако креирате повеќе од една копија, оваа боја ке се аплицира на последната копија.
2b sd%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COPY%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE ce Enter the angle (0 to 359 degrees) by which you want to rotate the duplicate object. Positive values rotate the duplicate object in a clockwise direction and negative values in a counterclockwise direction.
2b sd%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COPY%3AMTR_FLD_WIDTH 9b Внесете ја вредността за која сакате да ја промените ширината на дуплираниот објект.
11 .uno%3ADeletePage 22 Deletes the current slide or page.
11 .uno%3ARenamePage 1a Renames the selected page.
12 .uno%3ADeleteLayer 2c Го брише активниот слој.
28 sd%3AMetricField%3ADLG_MORPH%3AMTF_STEPS 95 Внесете број на облици кои треба да се креираат помеѓу двата селектирани објекти.
2a sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MORPH%3ACBX_ATTRIBUTES a5 Применува преод со избледување на својствата за линии и полнења за селектираните објекти.
2b sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MORPH%3ACBX_ORIENTATION 62 Применува мазен премин помеѓу селектираните објекти.
f .uno%3AMorphing 9a Креира облици и ги распоредува униформно со инкременти помеѓу два графички објекти.
2d sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_FIELD_MODIFY%3ALB_LANGUAGE 22 Select the language for the field.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_FIELD_MODIFY%3ARBT_VAR 28 Displays the current value of the field.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_FIELD_MODIFY%3ARBT_FIX 3e Displays the content of the field when the field was inserted.
12 .uno%3AModifyField 2a Edits the properties of an inserted field.
23 sd%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_FIELD_MODIFY 2a Edits the properties of an inserted field.
2b sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_FIELD_MODIFY%3ALB_FORMAT 26 Select a display format for the field.
10 .uno%3AShowRuler 8c Прикажува или скрива ленијари во горниот и левиот дел од работната површина.
1b .uno%3ACommonTaskBarVisible 1b Common commands for slides.
19 .uno%3ANormalMultiPaneGUI 78 Префрла во нормален поглед, за да може да ги уредувате слајдовите.
12 SD_HID_SD_BTN_DRAW 78 Префрла во нормален поглед, за да може да ги уредувате слајдовите.
f .uno%3APageMenu 34 Opens a submenu with commands for the current slide.
12 .uno%3ADrawingMode 78 Префрла во нормален поглед, за да може да ги уредувате слајдовите.
1b .uno%3ADisplayMasterObjects 46 When enabled, the current slide shows the objects of the slide master.
1e .uno%3ADisplayMasterBackground 51 When enabled, the current slide shows the background picture of the slide master.
17 .uno%3ASelectBackground bb Opens a file dialog to select a picture. The picture will be scaled and inserted on the background of the current slide master. Use Format - Slide/Page - Background to remove the picture.
12 .uno%3AOutlineMode 59 Switches to outline view where you can reorder slides and edit slide titles and headings.
15 SD_HID_SD_BTN_OUTLINE 59 Switches to outline view where you can reorder slides and edit slide titles and headings.
13 SD_HID_SD_BTN_SLIDE 51 Прикажува минијатурни верзии на слајдовите.
e .uno%3ADiaMode 51 Прикажува минијатурни верзии на слајдовите.
13 SD_HID_SD_BTN_NOTES 90 Префрла во преглед на белешки, каде што може да додавате белешки на слајдовите.
10 .uno%3ANotesMode 90 Префрла во преглед на белешки, каде што може да додавате белешки на слајдовите.
12 .uno%3AHandoutMode 58 Switches to handout page, where you can scale several slides to fit on one printed page.
15 SD_HID_SD_BTN_HANDOUT 58 Switches to handout page, where you can scale several slides to fit on one printed page.
13 .uno%3APresentation 36 Започнува приказ на слајдови.
1a SD_HID_SD_BTN_PRESENTATION 36 Започнува приказ на слајдови.
18 SD_HID_SD_BTN_MASTERPAGE 7e Switches to one of several master views, where you can add elements that you want to appear on all of the slides in your show.
11 .uno%3AMasterPage 7e Switches to one of several master views, where you can add elements that you want to appear on all of the slides in your show.
17 .uno%3ADeleteMasterPage 57 Select a slide master and click this icon to remove the slide master from the document.
17 .uno%3ARenameMasterPage 45 Select a slide master and click this icon to rename the slide master.
16 .uno%3ACloseMasterPage 1d Closes the slide master view.
16 .uno%3ASlideMasterPage 93 Switches to slide master view, where you can add elements that you want to appear on all of the slides in your show that use the same slide master.
17 .uno%3AInsertMasterPage 7d Inserts a new slide master into the document. Double-click the new slide master on the Slides pane to apply it to all slides.
16 .uno%3ANotesMasterPage 4e Displays the notes master, where you can set the default formatting for notes.
14 .uno%3AMasterLayouts 4c Add header, footer, date, and slide number placeholders to the master slide.
32 sd%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SD_DLG_MASTER_LAYOUT%3ACB_DATE 31 Adds a date/time placeholder to the master slide.
34 sd%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SD_DLG_MASTER_LAYOUT%3ACB_HEADER 46 Adds a header placeholder to the master slides for notes and handouts.
34 sd%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SD_DLG_MASTER_LAYOUT%3ACB_FOOTER 2e Adds a footer placeholder to the master slide.
39 sd%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SD_DLG_MASTER_LAYOUT%3ACB_PAGE_NUMBER 77 Додава резервирано место за број на слајдот на шаблонот за слајд.
3b sd%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SD_TABPAGE_HEADERFOOTER%3ACB_NOTONTITLE 98 Не ја прикажува информацијата што ја дефинирате на првиот слајд од презентацијата.
3f sd%3AListBox%3ARID_SD_TABPAGE_HEADERFOOTER%3ACB_DATETIME_FORMAT 9c Го прикажува датумот и времето кога слајдот бил креиран. Изберете формат од списокот.
16 .uno%3AHeaderAndFooter 5b Adds or changes text in placeholders at the top and the bottom of slides and master slides.
39 sd%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SD_TABPAGE_HEADERFOOTER%3ACB_DATETIME 3a Додава датум и време на слајдот.
3d sd%3APushButton%3ARID_SD_TABPAGE_HEADERFOOTER%3ABT_APPLYTOALL ce Ги применува подесувањата на сите слајдови од презентацијата, вклучително и на соодветните шаблони за слајдови.
39 sd%3AEdit%3ARID_SD_TABPAGE_HEADERFOOTER%3ATB_HEADER_FIXED 35 Adds the text that you enter to the top of the slide.
37 sd%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SD_TABPAGE_HEADERFOOTER%3ACB_FOOTER 4f Adds the text that you enter in the Footer text box to the bottom of the slide.
41 sd%3AListBox%3ARID_SD_TABPAGE_HEADERFOOTER%3ACB_DATETIME_LANGUAGE 58 Изберете јазик за форматот на датумот и времето.
37 sd%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SD_TABPAGE_HEADERFOOTER%3ACB_HEADER 4c Adds the text that you enter in the Header text box to the top of the slide.
3b sd%3AEdit%3ARID_SD_TABPAGE_HEADERFOOTER%3ATB_DATETIME_FIXED 75 Го прикажува датумот и времето што го внесувате во текст полето.
38 sd%3APushButton%3ARID_SD_TABPAGE_HEADERFOOTER%3ABT_APPLY 6b Ги применува тековните поставувања на избраните слајдови.
39 sd%3AEdit%3ARID_SD_TABPAGE_HEADERFOOTER%3ATB_FOOTER_FIXED 38 Adds the text that you enter to the bottom of the slide.
42 sd%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SD_TABPAGE_HEADERFOOTER%3ARB_DATETIME_FIXED 75 Го прикажува датумот и времето што го внесувате во текст полето.
46 sd%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SD_TABPAGE_HEADERFOOTER%3ARB_DATETIME_AUTOMATIC 9c Го прикажува датумот и времето кога слајдот бил креиран. Изберете формат од списокот.
3c sd%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SD_TABPAGE_HEADERFOOTER%3ACB_SLIDENUMBER 48 Додава број на слајд или број на страна.
17 .uno%3AInsertPageNumber 48 Додава број на слајд или број на страна.
18 .uno%3AInsertDateAndTime 3a Додава датум и време на слајдот.
1d .uno%3AOutputQualityGrayscale 52 Прикажува слајдови во нијанси од црна и бела.
1e .uno%3AOutputQualityBlackWhite 6d Прикажува слајдови во основна црна и бела боја, без сенчање.
19 .uno%3AOutputQualityColor 32 Прикажува слајдови во боја.
11 .uno%3AInsertPage 31 Inserts a page after the currently selected page.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INSERT_LAYER%3ACBX_VISIBLE 17 Show or hide the layer.
12 .uno%3AInsertLayer 57 Inserts a new layer in the document. Layers are only available in Draw, not in Impress.
27 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_INSERT_LAYER%3AEDT_NAME 31 Внесете име за новиот слој.
2d sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INSERT_LAYER%3ACBX_LOCKED 5d Го спречува едитирањето на елементите од шаблонот.
30 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INSERT_LAYER%3ACBX_PRINTABLE 5a Да се прикаже или да се прикрие слој при печатење.
2f sd%3AImageRadioButton%3ADLG_SNAPLINE%3ARB_POINT 24 Inserts a snap point (dashed cross).
2b sd%3AMetricField%3ADLG_SNAPLINE%3AMTR_FLD_X 60 Enter the amount of space you want between the snap point or line and the left edge of the page.
34 sd%3AImageRadioButton%3ADLG_SNAPLINE%3ARB_HORIZONTAL 55 Вметнува хоризонтална линија за приклучување.
32 sd%3AImageRadioButton%3ADLG_SNAPLINE%3ARB_VERTICAL 1d Inserts a vertical snap line.
13 .uno%3ACapturePoint 62 Inserts a snap point or snap line (also known as guide) that you can use to quickly align objects.
2b sd%3AMetricField%3ADLG_SNAPLINE%3AMTR_FLD_Y 5f Enter the amount of space you want between the snap point or line and the top edge of the page.
11 .uno%3AInsertRows 95 Inserts a new row above the active cell. The number of rows inserted correspond to the number of rows selected. The existing rows are moved downward.
2b sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_SNAPLINE%3ABTN_DELETE 2d Deletes the selected snap point or snap line.
12 .uno%3ASetSnapItem 66 Sets the position of the selected snap point or snap line relative to the top left corner of the page.
15 .uno%3ADeleteSnapItem 2d Deletes the selected snap point or snap line.
14 .uno%3AInsertColumns ae Inserts a new column to the left of the active cell. The number of columns inserted correspond to the number of columns selected. The existing columns are moved to the right.
18 .uno%3AInsertSpreadsheet 44 Inserts a new $[officename] Calc spreadsheet into the current slide.
12 .uno%3AInsertTable 44 Inserts a new $[officename] Calc spreadsheet into the current slide.
15 .uno%3AImportFromFile 87 Inserts a file into the active slide. You can insert $[officename] Draw or Impress files, or text from an HTML document or a text file.
39 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INSERT_PAGES_OBJS%3ACBX_CHECK_MASTERS 63 Неискористените шаблони за страници не се вметнуваат.
30 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INSERT_PAGES_OBJS%3ACBX_LINK 67 Inserts file or file elements as a link that is automatically updated when the source file is modified.
14 .uno%3ADuplicatePage 3c Inserts a copy of the current slide after the current slide.
11 .uno%3AExpandPage c1 Creates a new slide from every top-level outline point (text one level below the title text in the outline hierarchy) in the selected slide. The outline text becomes the title of the new slide.
12 .uno%3ASummaryPage a4 Creates a new slide that contains a bulleted list from the titles of the slides that follow the selected slide. The summary slide is inserted behind the last slide.
19 .uno%3AInsertDateFieldFix 61 Inserts the current date into your slide as a fixed field. The date is not automatically updated.
19 .uno%3AInsertDateFieldVar 79 Inserts the current date into your slide as a variable field. The date is automatically updated when you reload the file.
19 .uno%3AInsertTimeFieldFix 61 Inserts the current time into your slide as a fixed field. The time is not automatically updated.
19 .uno%3AInsertTimeFieldVar 79 Inserts the current time into your slide as a variable field. The time is automatically updated when you reload the file.
16 .uno%3AInsertPageField 37 Inserts the page number into the current slide or page.
18 .uno%3AInsertAuthorField 5d Inserts the first and last names listed in the $[officename] user data into the active slide.
16 .uno%3AInsertFileField 53 Inserts the name of the active file. The name only appears after you save the file.
12 .uno%3ATableDialog 6a Specifies the properties of the selected table, for example, fonts, font effects, borders, and background.
15 SFX2_HID_TEMPLATE_FMT 26 Create, edit, apply and manage styles.
1a SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_WATERCAN c2 Applies the selected style to an object on your slide. Click the paint bucket icon and then click an object in your slide to apply the style. Click the paint bucket icon again to exit this mode.
21 SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_UPDATEBYEXAMPLE 72 Updates the Style selected in the Styles and Formatting window with the current formatting of the selected object.
10 .uno%3AListStyle 30 Styles used in %PRODUCTNAME Impress AutoLayouts.
10 .uno%3AParaStyle 41 Styles for formatting graphical elements, including text objects.
1e SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_NEWBYEXAMPLE 45 Creates a new style using the format attributes of a selected object.
11 .uno%3ADeleteRows 2b Deletes the selected row(s) from the table.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PRESLT%3ACBX_CHECK_MASTERS 53 Deletes unreferenced background slides and presentation layouts from your document.
19 .uno%3APresentationLayout af Displays the Slide Design dialog, where you can select a layout scheme for the current slide. Any objects in the slide design are inserted behind objects in the current slide.
2c sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PRESLT%3ACBX_MASTER_PAGE 5a Applies the background of the selected slide design to all of the slides in your document.
27 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PRESLT%3ABTN_LOAD 26 Displays the Load Slide Design dialog,
2d sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3AED_DESC 27 Brief summary of the selected template.
2a sfx2%3AMoreButton%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ABT_MORE 43 Shows or hides a preview and the properties of a selected template.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ALB_TEMPLATE 38 Displays the templates for the selected design category.
25 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3AED_THEMA 55 Displays the subject of the template. Some templates are grouped together by subject.
2c sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ABTN_PREVIEW 23 Turns on a preview of the template.
28 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3AED_KEYWORDS 24 Displays the keywords for searching.
29 sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ALB_REGION 2f Displays the available slide design categories.
25 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3AED_TITLE 23 Displays the title of the template.
14 .uno%3ADeleteColumns 2e Deletes the selected column(s) from the table.
11 .uno%3AModifyPage 2e Opens the Slide Layout panel on the Task pane.
12 .uno%3ARenameLayer 19 Renames the active layer.
12 .uno%3AModifyLayer 2d Changes the properties of the selected layer.
36 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MEASURE%3ATSB_AUTOPOSH 42 Determines the optimal horizontal position for the dimension text.
3f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MEASURE%3AMTR_FLD_HELPLINE_DIST cc Specifies the length of the right and left guides starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guides above the dimension line and negative values extend the guides below the dimension line.
36 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MEASURE%3ATSB_AUTOPOSV 40 Determines the optimal vertical position for the dimension text.
3f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MEASURE%3AMTR_FLD_HELPLINE2_LEN c0 Specifies the length of the right guide starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guide below the dimension line and negative values extend the guide above the dimension line.
43 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MEASURE%3AMTR_FLD_HELPLINE_OVERHANG ce Specifies the length of the left and right guides starting at the baseline (line distance = 0). Positive values extend the guides above the baseline and negative values extend the guides below the baseline.
37 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MEASURE%3ATSB_SHOW_UNIT 79 Shows or hides the dimension measurement units. You can also select a measurement unit you want to display from the list.
18 .uno%3AMeasureAttributes 54 Changes the length, measurement and guide properties of the selected dimension line.
2d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MEASURE%3ALB_UNIT 79 Shows or hides the dimension measurement units. You can also select a measurement unit you want to display from the list.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MEASURE%3AMTR_LINE_DIST 57 Specifies the distance between the dimension line and the baseline (line distance = 0).
3f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MEASURE%3AMTR_FLD_DECIMALPLACES 4f Specifies the number of decimal places used for the display of line properties.
36 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MEASURE%3ATSB_PARALLEL 45 Displays the text parallel to or at 90 degrees to the dimension line.
1c CUI_HID_MEASURE_CTL_POSITION 60 Determines the position of the dimension text with respect to the dimension line and the guides.
3f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MEASURE%3AMTR_FLD_HELPLINE1_LEN bf Specifies the length of the left guide starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guide below the dimension line and negative values extend the guide above the dimension line.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MEASURE%3ATSB_BELOW_REF_EDGE 2d Reverses the properties set in the Line area.
11 .uno%3ANewRouting 2b Resets the line skew values to the default.
1a .uno%3AConnectorAttributes 23 Sets the properties of a connector.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CONNECTION%3AMTR_FLD_LINE_3 1e Enter a skew value for Line 3.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CONNECTION%3AMTR_FLD_LINE_2 1e Enter a skew value for Line 2.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CONNECTION%3AMTR_FLD_LINE_1 1e Enter a skew value for Line 1.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CONNECTION%3ALB_TYPE 31 Lists the types of connectors that are available.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CONNECTION%3AMTR_FLD_VERT_2 48 Enter the amount of vertical space you want at the end of the connector.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CONNECTION%3AMTR_FLD_HORZ_2 4a Enter the amount of horizontal space you want at the end of the connector.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CONNECTION%3AMTR_FLD_VERT_1 4e Enter the amount of vertical space you want at the beginning of the connector.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CONNECTION%3AMTR_FLD_HORZ_1 50 Enter the amount of horizontal space you want at the beginning of the connector.
13 .uno%3ABeforeObject 9c Changes the stacking order by moving the selected object in front of an object that you specify. The screen location of the selected object does not change.
13 .uno%3ABehindObject 97 Changes the stacking order by moving the selected object behind an object that you specify. The screen location of the selected object does not change.
13 .uno%3AReverseOrder 34 Reverses the stacking order of the selected objects.
12 .uno%3AHyphenation 34 Turns hyphenation option for text objects on or off.
2b SD_HID_SD_SLIDETRANSITIONPANE_PB_SLIDE_SHOW 2d Starts the slide show from the current slide.
32 SD_HID_SD_SLIDETRANSITIONPANE_LB_SLIDE_TRANSITIONS 44 Select the slide transition you want to use for the selected slides.
25 SD_HID_SD_SLIDETRANSITIONPANE_PB_PLAY 30 Shows the current slide transition as a preview.
2b SD_HID_SD_SLIDETRANSITIONPANE_CB_LOOP_SOUND 3f Select to play the sound repeatedly until another sound starts.
2d SD_HID_SD_SLIDETRANSITIONPANE_PB_APPLY_TO_ALL 59 Applies the selected slide transition to all slides in the current presentation document.
33 SD_HID_SD_SLIDETRANSITIONPANE_MF_ADVANCE_AUTO_AFTER 60 Select to advance to the next slide after a number of seconds. Type the seconds in the spin box.
a .uno%3ADia 53 Defines the special effect that plays when you display a slide during a slide show.
26 SD_HID_SD_SLIDETRANSITIONPANE_LB_SPEED 27 Sets the speed of the slide transition.
2d SD_HID_SD_SLIDETRANSITIONPANE_CB_AUTO_PREVIEW 42 Select to see the slide transitions automatically in the document.
f .uno%3ADiaSpeed 27 Sets the speed of the slide transition.
18 .uno%3ASlideChangeWindow 53 Defines the special effect that plays when you display a slide during a slide show.
2d SD_HID_SD_SLIDETRANSITIONPANE_RB_ADVANCE_AUTO 60 Select to advance to the next slide after a number of seconds. Type the seconds in the spin box.
26 SD_HID_SD_SLIDETRANSITIONPANE_LB_SOUND 39 Lists sounds that can played during the slide transition.
31 SD_HID_SD_SLIDETRANSITIONPANE_RB_ADVANCE_ON_MOUSE 35 Select to advance to the next slide on a mouse click.
30 sd%3ARadioButton%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ARBT_GROUP 9c Assembles images into a single object so that they can be moved as a group. You can still edit individual objects by double-clicking the group in the slide.
32 sd%3AImageButton%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ABTN_REVERSE 2f Moves back one image in the animation sequence.
35 sd%3AImageButton%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ABTN_REMOVE_ALL 2b Deletes all of the images in the animation.
17 .uno%3AAnimationObjects 30 Creates a custom animation on the current slide.
38 sd%3AImageButton%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ABTN_REMOVE_BITMAP 32 Deletes current image from the animation sequence.
2f sd%3AImageButton%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ABTN_PLAY 14 Plays the animation.
39 sd%3AImageButton%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ABTN_GET_ONE_OBJECT 2a Adds selected object(s) as a single image.
36 sd%3APushButton%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ABTN_CREATE_GROUP 2d Inserts the animation into the current slide.
2f sd%3AImageButton%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ABTN_STOP 1c Stops playing the animation.
30 sd%3AListBox%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ALB_ADJUSTMENT 24 Aligns the images in your animation.
36 sd%3ANumericField%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ANUM_FLD_BITMAP 46 Indicates the position of the current image in the animation sequence.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ARBT_BITMAP 24 Combines images into a single image.
30 sd%3AListBox%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ALB_LOOP_COUNT 36 Sets the number of times that the animation is played.
30 sd%3AImageButton%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ABTN_FIRST 33 Jumps to the first image in the animation sequence.
3a sd%3AImageButton%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ABTN_GET_ALL_OBJECTS 27 Adds an image for each selected object.
2f sd%3ATimeField%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ATIME_FIELD 9c Enter the number of seconds to display the current image. This option is only available if you select the Bitmap object option in the Animation group field.
2f sd%3AImageButton%3AFLT_WIN_ANIMATION%3ABTN_LAST 32 Jumps to the last image in the animation sequence.
2a SD_HID_SD_CUSTOMANIMATIONPANE_PB_MOVE_DOWN 56 Click one of the buttons to move the selected animation effect up or down in the list.
28 SD_HID_SD_CUSTOMANIMATIONPANE_PB_MOVE_UP 56 Click one of the buttons to move the selected animation effect up or down in the list.
2c SD_HID_SD_CUSTOMANIMATIONPANE_CB_AUTOPREVIEW 4b Select to preview new or edited effects on the slide while you assign them.
2b SD_HID_SD_CUSTOMANIMATIONPANE_PB_SLIDE_SHOW 2d Starts the slide show from the current slide.
13 .uno%3AEffectWindow 24 Assigns effects to selected objects.
16 .uno%3ACustomAnimation 24 Assigns effects to selected objects.
2e SD_HID_SD_CUSTOMANIMATIONPANE_PB_REMOVE_EFFECT 3f Removes the selected animation effects from the animation list.
2b SD_HID_SD_CUSTOMANIMATIONPANE_PB_ADD_EFFECT 67 Opens the Custom Animation dialog to add another animation effect for the selected object on the slide.
2e SD_HID_SD_CUSTOMANIMATIONPANE_PB_CHANGE_EFFECT 6e Opens the Custom Animation dialog to change the animation effect for the selected entry on the animation list.
25 SD_HID_SD_CUSTOMANIMATIONPANE_PB_PLAY 33 Plays the selected animation effect in the preview.
26 SD_HID_SD_CUSTOMANIMATIONPANE_CB_SPEED 41 Specifies the speed or duration of the selected animation effect.
26 SD_HID_SD_CUSTOMANIMATIONPANE_LB_START 3d Displays the start property of the selected animation effect.
29 SD_HID_SD_CUSTOMANIMATIONPANE_LB_PROPERTY 96 Selects the additional properties of the animation. Click the ... button to open the Effect Options dialog, where you can select and apply properties.
27 sd%3AEdit%3ATP_ANIMATION%3AEDT_BOOKMARK 44 Enter the name of the slide or the object that you want to look for.
17 .uno%3AAnimationEffects 51 Defines how the selected object behaves when you click on it during a slide show.
27 sd%3AListBox%3ATP_ANIMATION%3ALB_ACTION 5a Specifies the action that will run when you click the selected object during a slide show.
29 sd%3APushButton%3ATP_ANIMATION%3ABTN_SEEK 2b Searches for the specified slide or object.
17 SD_HID_CTL_ACTION_DLG_1 35 Lists the slides and the objects that you can target.
27 sd%3AEdit%3ATP_ANIMATION%3AEDT_DOCUMENT 4e Enter a path to the file you want to open, or click Browse to locate the file.
26 sd%3AEdit%3ATP_ANIMATION%3AEDT_PROGRAM 55 Enter a path to the program you want to start, or click Browse to locate the program.
17 SD_HID_CTL_ACTION_DLG_2 97 Opens and displays a file during a slide show. If you select a $[officename] file as the target document, you can also specify the page that will open.
24 sd%3AEdit%3ATP_ANIMATION%3AEDT_MACRO 4f Enter a path to the macro you want to run, or click Browse to locate the macro.
24 sd%3AEdit%3ATP_ANIMATION%3AEDT_SOUND 54 Enter a path to the sound file you want to open, or click Browse to locate the file.
2b sd%3APushButton%3ATP_ANIMATION%3ABTN_SEARCH 21 Locate the file you want to open.
35 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ACBX_AUTOLOGO 33 Displays the $[officename] logo on the pause slide.
39 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ACBX_MOUSEPOINTER 2c Shows the mouse pointer during a slide show.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ARBT_AUTO a9 Restarts the slide show after the pause interval you specify. A pause slide is displayed between the final slide and the start slide. Press the Esc key to stop the show.
35 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ALB_CUSTOMSHOW 59 Runs a custom slide show in the order that you defined in Slide Show - Custom Slide Show.
3e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ACBX_ANIMATION_ALLOWED 40 Displays all frames of animated GIF files during the slide show.
3a sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ACBX_ALWAYS_ON_TOP 85 The $[officename] window remains on top during the presentation. No other program will show its window in front of your presentation.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ARBT_AT_DIA 24 Enter the number of the start slide.
33 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ACBX_MANUEL 3c Slides never change automatically when this box is selected.
33 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ARBT_ALL 2e Includes all of the slides in your slide show.
2f sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ALB_DIAS 24 Enter the number of the start slide.
1b SD_HID_SD_SLIDESHOW_DISPLAY 82 Изберете монитор за користење во презентации со слајд шоу на цел екран.
38 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ACBX_CHANGE_PAGE 47 Advances to the next slide when you click on the background of a slide.
30 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ACBX_PEN 5f Changes the mouse pointer to a pen which you can use to draw on slides during the presentation.
38 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ARBT_STANDARD 1d A full screen slide is shown.
3a sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ARBT_CUSTOMSHOW 59 Runs a custom slide show in the order that you defined in Slide Show - Custom Slide Show.
33 sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ATMF_PAUSE 92 Enter the duration of the pause before the slide show is repeated. If you enter zero, the show restarts immediately without showing a pause slide.
36 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ACBX_NAVIGATOR 2d Displays the Navigator during the slide show.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_START_PRESENTATION%3ARBT_WINDOW 34 Slide show runs in the $[officename] program window.
19 .uno%3APresentationDialog 99 Defines settings for your slide show, including which slide to start from, the way you advance the slides, the type of presentation, and pointer options.
30 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_CUSTOMSHOW%3ABTN_STARTSHOW 6c Runs the slide show. Ensure that Use Custom Slide Show is selected if you want to run a custom presentation.
2e sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_CUSTOMSHOW%3ALB_CUSTOMSHOWS 30 Lists the custom slide shows that are available.
17 .uno%3ACustomShowDialog bd Defines a custom slide show using slides within the current presentation. You can then pick slides to meet the needs of your audience. You can create as many custom slide shows as you want.
33 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_CUSTOMSHOW%3ACBX_USE_CUSTOMSHOW 6a Runs the custom slide show you selected when you click Start. Otherwise, the entire presentation is shown.
2b sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_CUSTOMSHOW%3ABTN_EDIT 5b Add, remove or reorder slides as well as change the name of the selected custom slide show.
2b sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_CUSTOMSHOW%3ABTN_COPY 67 Creates a copy of the selected custom slide show. You can modify the name of the show by clicking Edit.
2a sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_CUSTOMSHOW%3ABTN_NEW 5b Add, remove or reorder slides as well as change the name of the selected custom slide show.
2c sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_DEFINE_CUSTOMSHOW%3AEDT_NAME 52 Displays the name of the custom slide show. If you want, you can enter a new name.
34 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_DEFINE_CUSTOMSHOW%3ABTN_REMOVE 85 Removes a slide from the Selected slides list. You need to choose a slide in the Selected slides list before you can use this button.
20 SD_HID_DLG_DEFINE_CUSTOMSHOW_CTL 86 Lists all of the slides in the custom slide show. If you want, you can change the order of the list by dragging the slides up or down.
34 sd%3AMultiListBox%3ADLG_DEFINE_CUSTOMSHOW%3ALB_PAGES 52 Lists all of the slides in the order in which they appear in the current document.
31 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_DEFINE_CUSTOMSHOW%3ABTN_ADD 98 Adds an existing slide to the bottom of the Selected slides list. You need to select a slide in the Existing slides list before you can use this button.
13 .uno%3AChangeBezier 30 Converts the selected object to a Bézier curve.
2f sd%3AMetricField%3ADLG_VECTORIZE%3AMT_FILLHOLES 38 Enter the size of the rectangle for the background fill.
2c sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_VECTORIZE%3ACB_FILLHOLES 3a Fills the color gaps caused by applying a point reduction.
2d sd%3ANumericField%3ADLG_VECTORIZE%3ANM_LAYERS 91 Enter the number of colors to be displayed in the converted image. $[officename] generates a polygon for each occurrence of a color in the image.
2c sd%3AMetricField%3ADLG_VECTORIZE%3AMT_REDUCE 47 Removes color polygons that are smaller than the pixel value you enter.
14 .uno%3AChangePolygon 56 Converts the selected object to a polygon (a closed object bounded by straight lines).
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_VECTORIZE%3ABTN_PREVIEW 3a Previews the converted image without applying the changes.
14 .uno%3AConvertInto3D 40 Converts the selected object to a three-dimensional (3D) object.
1d .uno%3AConvertInto3DLatheFast 5b Creates a three-dimensional shape by rotating the selected object around its vertical axis.
18 .uno%3AConvertIntoBitmap 55 Converts the selected object to a bitmap (a grid of pixels that represents an image).
1a .uno%3AConvertIntoMetaFile 6e Converts the selected object to Windows Metafile Format (WMF), containing both bitmap and vector graphic data.
19 .uno%3Aconvert_to_contour 42 Converts the selected object to a polygon, or a group of polygons.
e .uno%3ACombine 3a Combines two or more selected objects into a single shape.
10 .uno%3ADismantle 31 Splits a combined object into individual objects.
e .uno%3AConnect 6e Creates a line or Bézier curve by connecting two or more lines, Bézier curves, or other objects with a line.
c .uno%3ABreak 33 Breaks apart lines joined with the Connect command.
c .uno%3AMerge 8f Adds the area of the selected objects to the area of the lowermost object in the selection. This command is best used with overlapping objects.
10 .uno%3ASubstract 51 Subtracts the area of the selected objects from the area of the lowermost object.
10 .uno%3AIntersect 42 Creates a shape from the overlapping area of the selected objects.
35 SD_LISTBOX_RID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_ENTRANCE_LB_EFFECTS 2b Select an effect and click OK to assign it.
3a sd%3AComboBox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_ENTRANCE%3ACB_SPEED 41 Specifies the speed or duration of the selected animation effect.
3d sd%3ACheckBox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_ENTRANCE%3ACBX_PREVIEW 35 Select to preview new or edited effects on the slide.
2e SD_HID_SD_CUSTOMANIMATIONPANE_PB_PROPERTY_MORE 57 Specifies additional properties for the selected element in the Custom Animations pane.
42 sd%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_EFFECT%3APB_SOUND_PREVIEW 1e Plays the selected sound file.
40 sd%3AMetricField%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_EFFECT%3AMF_TEXT_DELAY 49 Specifies the percentage of delay between animations of words or letters.
3b sd%3AListBox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_EFFECT%3ACLB_DIMCOLOR 15 Select the dim color.
3e sd%3AListBox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_EFFECT%3ALB_AFTER_EFFECT 61 Select a color to be shown after the animation ends, or select another after-effect from the list
3b sd%3AListBox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_EFFECT%3ALB_TEXT_ANIM 3b Select the animation mode for the text of the current shape
37 sd%3AListBox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_EFFECT%3ALB_SOUND 45 Select a sound from the Gallery or select one of the special entries.
3d sd%3ACheckBox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_EFFECT%3ACB_SMOOTH_END 47 Enable to assign a gradually decreasing speed to the end of the effect.
3f sd%3ACheckBox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_EFFECT%3ACB_SMOOTH_START 49 Enable to assign a gradually increasing speed to the start of the effect.
2f SD_HID_SD_CUSTOMANIMATIONPANE_PRESETPROPERTYBOX 3b Ја одредува насоката на ефектот.
39 sd%3ACheckbox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_TEXT%3ACBX_REVERSE 29 Animates the paragraphs in reverse order.
3e sd%3ACheckbox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_TEXT%3ACBX_ANIMATE_FORM 3a Deselect this box to animate only the text, not the shape.
3c sd%3ACheckbox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_TEXT%3ACBX_GROUP_AUTO 67 If "Group text - By 1st level paragraphs" is selected, the paragraphs are animated one after the other.
3e sd%3AMetricField%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_TEXT%3AMF_GROUP_AUTO 46 Enter an additional delay in seconds to animate subsequent paragraphs.
3a sd%3AListBox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_TEXT%3ALB_GROUP_TEXT 2e Specifies how multiple paragraphs are animated
3b sd%3AComboBox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_DURATION%3ACB_REPEAT 37 Specifies whether and how to repeat the current effect.
3b sd%3AListBox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_DURATION%3ALB_TRIGGER 2f Select the shape by its name from the list box.
43 sd%3ARadioButton%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_DURATION%3ARB_INTERACTIVE 4f Specifies whether to let the animation start when a specified shape is clicked.
45 sd%3ARadioButton%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_DURATION%3ARB_CLICKSEQUENCE 4a Specifies whether to let the animation start in the normal click sequence.
3c sd%3ACheckBox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_DURATION%3ACBX_REWIND 62 Specifies whether to let the animated shape return to its starting state after the animation ends.
39 sd%3AListBox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_DURATION%3ALB_START 3d Displays the start property of the selected animation effect.
43 sd%3AMetricField%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_DURATION%3AMF_START_DELAY 43 Specifies an additional delay of n seconds until the effect starts.
3d sd%3AComboBox%3ARID_TP_CUSTOMANIMATION_DURATION%3ACB_DURATION 25 Specifies the duration of the effect.
16 .uno%3ALeftPaneImpress 23 Switches the Slide Pane on and off.
13 .uno%3ALeftPaneDraw 23 Switches the Slide Pane on and off.
1f SD_HID_SD_TASK_PANE_PREVIEW_ALL 4d Left-click to apply the master page to all slides. Right-click for a submenu.
23 SD_HID_SD_TASK_PANE_PREVIEW_CURRENT 4d Left-click to apply the master page to all slides. Right-click for a submenu.
23 SD_HID_SD_TASK_PANE_PREVIEW_LAYOUTS 50 Click to apply a slide design to all selected slides. Right-click for a submenu.
14 SC_HID_SC_DPLAY_DATA 8f Opens the Master Pages tab page, where you apply a master page (background) to all slides (left-click) or to the selected slides (right-click).
16 SD_HID_SD_TABLE_DESIGN 45 Opens the Table Design. Double-click a preview to insert a new table.
1f .uno%3ATaskPaneShowLargePreview 26 Sizes the preview of the master pages.
24 .uno%3ATaskPaneApplyToSelectedSlides 43 Applies the master page or the slide design to the selected slides.
10 .uno%3ARightPane 37 Switches the %PRODUCTNAME Impress task pane on and off.
19 SD_HID_SD_CURRENT_MASTERS 26 Lists the currently used master pages.
1b SD_HID_SD_SLIDE_TRANSITIONS 5f Opens the Slide Transition tab page, where you apply transition effects to the selected slides.
22 SD_HID_SD_TASK_PANE_PREVIEW_RECENT 4d Left-click to apply the master page to all slides. Right-click for a submenu.
12 .uno%3ATableDesign 45 Opens the Table Design. Double-click a preview to insert a new table.
1f .uno%3ATaskPaneShowSmallPreview 26 Sizes the preview of the master pages.
1b SD_HID_SD_CUSTOM_ANIMATIONS 60 Opens the Custom Animation tab page, where you apply effects to the selected objects on a slide.
18 SD_HID_SD_RECENT_MASTERS 25 Lists the recently used master pages.
1f .uno%3ATaskPaneApplyToAllSlides 26 Applies the master page to all slides.
17 SD_HID_SD_SLIDE_DESIGNS 5b Opens the Layouts tab page, where you apply a slide design to the selected slide or slides.
15 SD_HID_SD_ALL_MASTERS 21 Lists all available master pages.
10 .uno%3AHideSlide 9f Го крие избраниот слајд така што не се прикажува за време на проекцијата на слајдовите.
12 .uno%3APagesPerRow a2 Внесете го бројот на слајдови кои ќе се прикажат во еден ред во Подредувачот на слајдови.
10 .uno%3ADiaEffect 98 Изберете го ефектот на преод кој се појавува пред тековниот слајд кој се прикажува.
e .uno%3ADiaTime a2 Внесете го времето пред Проекцијата на слајдови автоматски напредне кон следниот слајд.
16 .uno%3ARehearseTimings 6a Пушта проекција на слајдови со тајмер во долниот лев агол.
f .uno%3APosition 85 Ги прикажува X и Y позициите на курсорот и големината на избраниот објект.
11 .uno%3APageStatus 98 Го прикажува моменталниот број на слајдот проследено од вкупниот број на слајдови.
12 .uno%3AZoomPanning 6a Го преместува слајдот во рамките на прозорецот од $[officename].
12 .uno%3AZoomObjects 80 Ја менува големината на екранот да ги собира објектите кои се избрани.
f .uno%3AZoomNext 2f Undoes the action of the Previous Zoom command.
14 .uno%3AZoomPageWidth 9f Ја прикажува целата ширината на слајдот. Врвот и дното на слајдот може да не се гледаат.
d .uno%3AZoomIn 2c Displays the slide at half its current size.
f .uno%3AZoomPlus 74 Го прикажува слајдот два пати поголем од моменталната големина
12 .uno%3AZoomToolBox ee Го намалува или зголемува екранот на моменталниот документ. Кликнете ја стрелката веднаш до иконата за го отворите Зум алатникот.
13 .uno%3AZoomPrevious 49 Returns the display of the slide to the previous zoom factor you applied.
f .uno%3AZoomPage 4d Го прикажува целиот слајд на вашиот екран.
15 .uno%3AZoom100Percent 5b Прикажи го слајдот во својата вистинска големина.
12 .uno%3AZoomOptimal 82 Ја менува големината на екранот да ги вклучува сите објекти на слајдот.
d .uno%3AMirror 16b Го превртува избраниот објект околу линија за превртување, која можете да ја ставите било каде на слајдот. Извлечете ја рачката на објектот преку линијата за превртување за да го превртите објектот.
12 .uno%3ACrookRotate 117 Го изобличува избраниот објект со пренесување околу замислени кругови и потоа додавање перспектива. Влечете рачка на избраниот објект за изобличување.
19 .uno%3AConvertInto3DLathe 96 Го претвара избранио 2Д објект во 3Д објект, ротирајќи го објектот околу симетрала.
13 .uno%3AAdvancedMode 87 Ги менува формата, ориентацијата или  пополнувањето на избраните објекти.
c .uno%3AShear 84 Ви дозволува да влечете рачки на избраниот објект за промена на обликот.
1a .uno%3AInteractiveGradient 11b Го менува пополнувањето на градиентот на избраниот објект. Оваа команда е достапна само ако примените градиент на избраниот објект во Форматирај - Област.
11 .uno%3ACrookSlant e1 Го изобличува избраниот објект со пренесување околу замислени кругови. Влечете рачка на избраниот објект за изобличување.
1e .uno%3AInteractiveTransparence 5a Применува проѕирен градиент на избраниот објект.
1a .uno%3AGlueVertAlignBottom ce Кога е сменета големината на објект, тековната точка на слепување останува фиксирана на долниот раб на објектот.
1a .uno%3AGlueVertAlignCenter de Кога е сменета големината на објект, тековната точка на слепување останува фиксирана на вертикалниот центар на објектот.
16 .uno%3AGlueInsertPoint 7b Вметнува точка на слепување онаму каде што ќе кликнете на објектот.
12 .uno%3AGluePercent b6 Ја задржува релативната позиција на избраната точка на слепување кога менувате големина на објект.
1d .uno%3AGlueEscapeDirectionTop 83 Се прикачува поврзувач на горниот крај на избраната точка на слепување.
18 .uno%3AGlueHorzAlignLeft cc Кога е сменета големината на објект, тековната точка на слепување останува фиксирана на левиот раб на објектот.
20 .uno%3AGlueEscapeDirectionBottom 81 Се прикачува поврзувач на долниот раб на избраната точка на слепување.
1f .uno%3AGlueEscapeDirectionRight 81 Се прикачува поврзувач на десниот раб на избраната точка на слепување.
1e .uno%3AGlueEscapeDirectionLeft 7f Се прикачува поврзувач на левиот раб на избраната точка на слепување.
17 .uno%3AGlueVertAlignTop d2 Кога е сменета големината на објектот, тековната точка на слепување останува фиксирана на горниот раб на објектот.
19 .uno%3AGlueHorzAlignRight ce Кога е сменета големината на објект, тековната точка на слепување останува фиксирана на десниот раб на објектот.
1a .uno%3AGlueHorzAlignCenter c9 Кога е сменета големината на објект, тековната точка на слепување останува фиксирана на центарот на објектот.
20 .uno%3AVerticalTextFitToSizeTool 1ca Црта текстуална рамка со вертикална насока на текстот каде што кликате или влечете во тековниот документ. Текстот кој го внесувате автоматски е прилагоден на димензиите на рамката. (Овозможете подршка за азијски текст за да ја овозможите оваа икона).
12 .uno%3ATextToolbox af Алатникот за текст кој содржи некои икони за внесување на различни типови на текстуални полиња.
b .uno%3AText 102 Црта текстуално поле каде што кликате или влечете во тековниот документ. Кликнете било каде во документот и потоа внесете или вметнете текст
18 .uno%3ATextFitToSizeTool 126 Црта текстуално поле каде што кликате или влечете во тековниот документ. Текстот кој го внесувате автоматски се прилагодува на димензиите на текстуалното поле.
14 .uno%3ARect_Unfilled 17e Црта празен правоаголник каде што влечете во тековниот документ. Кликнете каде што сакате да се постави агол на правоаголникот и влечете до саканата големина. За цртање на квадрат, задржете Shift додека влечете.
15 .uno%3ASquare_Rounded 184 Црта квадрат со пополнување каде што влечете во тековниот документ. Кликнете каде што сакате да се постави агол на квадратот и влечете до саканата големина. За цртање на правоаголник, задржете  Shift додека влечете.
1e .uno%3ASquare_Rounded_Unfilled 174 Црта празен квадрат каде што влечете во тековниот документ. Кликнете каде што сакате да се постави агол на квадратот и влечете до саканата големина. За цртање на правоаголник, задржете Shift додека влечете.
16 .uno%3ASquare_Unfilled 175 Црта празен квадрат каде што влечете во тековниот документ. Кликнете каде што сакате да се постави агол на квадратот и влечете до саканата големина. За цртање на правоаголник, задржете  Shift додека влечете.
d .uno%3ASquare 179 Црта пополнет квадрат каде што влечете во тековниот документ. Кликнете каде што сакате да се постави агол на квадратот и влечете до саканата големина. За цртање на правоаголник, задржете  Shift додека влечете.
17 .uno%3ARectangleToolbox 98 Со употреба на Прилагоди алатникот, можете да го додадете Правоаголници алатникот.
13 .uno%3ARect_Rounded 18d Црта правоаголник со пополнување каде што влечете во тековниот документ. Кликнете каде што сакате да се постави агол на правоаголникот и влечете до саканата големина. За цртање на квадрат, задржете Shift додека влечете.
1c .uno%3ARect_Rounded_Unfilled 16a Црта празен квадрат каде што влечете во тековниот документ. Кликнете каде пто сакате да се постави агол на квадратот и влечете до саканата големина. За цртање на квадрат, задржете Shift додека влечете.
10 .uno%3ACirclePie 2be Црта пополнет облик кој е одреден со лакот на кругот и две линии на радиус во тековниот документ. За цртање на кружна пита, влечете го кругот до саканата големина и кликнете за одредување на првата линија на радиус. Преместете го курсорот каде што сакате да биде втората линија на радиус и кликнете. Не треба да кликате на кругот. За цртање на елиптчина пита, задржете Shift додека влечете.
1a .uno%3AEllipseCut_Unfilled 311 Црта празен облик кој е дефиниран од лакот на овалниот објект и линијата на дијаметар во тековниот документ. За цртање на елиптичен сегмент, влечете ја елипсата до саканата големина и потоа кликнете за одредување на почетокот на линијата на дијаметар. Преместете го курсорот каде што сакате да биде крајот на линијата на дијаметар и кликнете. Не треба да кликате на кругот. За цртање на кружен сегмент, задржете Shift додека влечете.
11 .uno%3AEllipseCut 31b Црта пополнет облик кој е дефиниран од лакот на овалниот објект и линијата на дијаметар во тековниот документ. За цртање на елиптичен сегмент, влечете ја елипсата до саканата големина и потоа кликнете за одредување на почетокот на линијата на дијаметар. Преместете го курсорот каде што сакате да биде крајот на линијата на дијаметар и кликнете. Не треба да кликате на кругот. За цртање на елиптичен сегмент, задржете Shift додека влечете.
19 .uno%3ACirclePie_Unfilled 2ca Црта празен облик кој е одреден со лакот на кругот и две линии на радиус во тековниот документ. За цртање на кружна пита, влечете го кругот до саканата големина и потоа кликнете за одредување на првата линија на радиус. Преместете го курсорот до каде што сакате да биде втората линија на радиус и кликнете. Не треба да кликате на кругот. За цртање на елиптична пита, задржете Shift додека влечете.
10 .uno%3ACircleArc 24d Црта лак кој е базиран на круг во тековниот документ. За цртање на лак, влечете круг до саканата големина и потоа кликнете за одредување на почетокот на лакот. Преместете го курсорот каде што сакате да биде крајот и кликнете. Не треба да кликате на кругот. За цртање на лак кој е базиран на елипса, задржете Shift додека влечете.
16 .uno%3ACircle_Unfilled 150 Црта празен круг каде што влечете во тековниот документ. Кликнете каде што сакате да го нацртате кругот и влечете до саканата големина. За цртање на елипса, задржете Shift додека влечете.
19 .uno%3ACircleCut_Unfilled 302 Црта празен облик кој е дефиниран од лакот на кругот и линија на дијаметар во тековниот документ. За цртање на кружен сегмент, влечете круг до саканата големина и потоа кликнете за одредување на почетокот на линијата на дијаметар. Преместете го курсорот каде што сакате да биде крајот на линијата на дијаметар и кликнете. Не треба да кликате на кругот. За цртање сегмент кој е базиран на елипса, задржете Shift додека влечете.
13 .uno%3APie_Unfilled 2f9 Црта празен облик кој е одреден со лак на овалниот објект и две линии на радиус во тековниот документ. За цртање на елиптична пита, влечете го овалниот објект до саканата големина и потоа кликнете за одредување на првата линија на радиус. Преместете го курсорот до каде што сакате да биде втората линија на радиус и кликнете. Не треба да кликате на овалниот објект. За цртање на кружна пита, задржете Shift додека влечете.
15 .uno%3AEllipseToolbox d2 Со користење на Прилагоди алатник, можете да додадете елипсовидна икона која го отвара алатникот Кругови и елипси.
17 .uno%3AEllipse_Unfilled 16e Црта празен овален објект каде што влечете во тековниот документ. Кликнете каде што сакате да го нацртате овалниот објект и влечете до саканата големина. За цртање на круг, задржете Shift додека влечете.
d .uno%3ACircle 150 Црта пополнет круг каде што влечете во тековниот документ. Кликнете каде што сакате да се нацрта кругот и влечете до саканата големина. За цртање на елипса, задржете Shift додека влечете.
f .uno%3AFreeline 1c5 Црта линија со слободен облик каде што влечете во слајдот. Кога ќе отпуштите, $[officename] креира затворен облик со цртање на праволиниски сегмент од крајот кон почетокот на линијата. Обликот помеѓу линиите ќе биде пополнет со тековната боја на областа.
e .uno%3APolygon 2f1 Црта затворен облик составен од праволиниски сегменти. Кликнете каде што сакате да почне полигонот и влечете за цртање на линиски сегмент. Кликнете повторно за одредување на крајот на линискиот сегмент и продолжете со кликање за одредување на останатите линиски сегменти на полигонот. Двоен клик за завршување со цртање на полигонот. За ограничување на полигонот со агли од 45 степени, задржете Shift кога кликате.
17 .uno%3APolygon_Diagonal 2c3 Црта затворен облик составен од праволиниски сегменти кои се ограничени со агли од 45 степени. Кликнете каде сакате да почне полигонот и влечете за цртање на линиски сегмент. Кликнете повторно за одредување на останатите линиски сегменти на полигонот. Двоен клик за завршување со цртање на полигонот. За цртање на полигон кој не е ограничен со агол од 45 степени, задржете Shift кога кликате.
11 .uno%3ABezierFill 242 Црта пополнет затворен облик кој е базиран на Bézier крива. Кликнете каде сакате да почне кривата, влечете, пуштете и потоа преместете го курсорот каде што сакате да заврши кривата и кликнете. Преместете го курсорот и повторно кликнете за додавање на праволиниски сегмент на кривата. Двоен клик за затворање на обликот.
1e .uno%3APolygon_Diagonal_Unfill 270 Црта линија составена од серија праволиниски сегменти, кои се ограничени со агли од 45 степени. Влечете за цртање линиски сегмент, кликнете за одредување на крајот на линискиот сегмент и потоа влечете за цртање на нов линиски сегмент. Двоен клик за завршување со цртање на линијата. За креирање на затворен облик, задржете Alt и двојно кликнете.
12 .uno%3ALineToolbox dd Крива иконата на Цртање лентата го отвора Линии алатникот, каде што можете да додадете линии и облици на тековниот слајд.
e .uno%3AShell3D 125 Црта објект во облик на кугла кој е базиран на круг каде што влечете во слајдот. За цртање на школка која е базирана на овален објект, задржете Shift додека влечете.
c .uno%3ATorus 121 Црта објект со облик на прстен кој е базиран на круг каде што влечете во слајдот. За цртање на торус кој е базиран на овален објект, задржете Shift додека влечете.
b .uno%3ACone fd Црта конус кој е базиран на круг каде што влечете во слајдот. За цртање на конус кој е базиран на овален објект, задржете Shift додека влечете.
f .uno%3ACylinder 109 Црта цилиндер кој е базиран на круг каде што влечете во слајдот. За цртање на цилиндер кој е базиран на овален објект, задржете Shift додека влечете.
17 .uno%3AObjects3DToolbox 97 Отворете го 3D објекти алатник, каде можете да додадете 3D облици на тековниот слајд.
e .uno%3ACyramid 2bf Црта пирамида со квадратна основа каде што влечете во слајдот. За цртање на пирамида со правоаголна основа, задржете Shift додека влечете. За одредување друг полигон за основата на пирамидата, отворете го 3D ефекти дијалогот и кликнете Геометрија табот. Во Сегменти областа, внесете го бројот на страните за полигонот во поле означено Хоризонтално и потоа кликнете го зелениот означувач.
11 .uno%3AHalfSphere bd Црта половина топка кога влечете во слајдот. За цртање на половина сфероид, задржете Shift додека влечете.
d .uno%3ASphere b5 Црта пополнета топка каде што влечете во слајдот. За цртање на сфероид, задржете Shift додека влечете.
b .uno%3ACube c2 Црта пополнета коцка каде што влечете во слајдот. За цртање на 3D правоаголник, задржете Shift додека влечете.
1f .uno%3AConnectorCurveArrowStart 12d Црта поврзувач на крива линија со стрелка на почетокот. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
1e .uno%3AConnectorLineArrowStart 12d Црта поврзувач на права линија со стрелка на почетокот. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
1b .uno%3AConnectorLineCircles 130 Црта поврзувач на права линија со кругови на двата краја. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
1e .uno%3AConnectorLinesCircleEnd 270 Црта поврзувач која завршува со круг и се свива близу до точка на поврзување. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете. За прилагодување на должината на линискиот сегмент помеѓу точка на свивање и точка на поврзување, кликнете го поврзувачот и влечете ја точката на свивање.
14 .uno%3AConnectorLine 101 Црта поврзувач на права линија. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
1c .uno%3AConnectorCurveCircles 12b Црта поврзувач на крива линија со кругови на двата краја. Кликнете точка на поврзување на објект, влечете до точката на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
1d .uno%3AConnectorCurveArrowEnd 127 Црта поврзувач на крива линија со стрелка на крајот. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
18 .uno%3AConnectorArrowEnd 155 Црта поврзувач со едно или повеќе 90 степени свивања на агол и стрелка на крајот. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објект, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
20 .uno%3AConnectorCurveCircleStart 123 Црта поврзувач на крива линија со круг на почетокот. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објект, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
15 .uno%3AConnectorCurve 101 Црта поврзувач на крива линија. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
1a .uno%3AConnectorLineArrows 130 Црта поврзувач на права линија со стрелки на двата краја. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
1e .uno%3AConnectorCurveCircleEnd 11d Црта поврзувач на крива линија со круг на крајот. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објект, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
1f .uno%3AConnectorLinesArrowStart 271 Црта поврзувач кој почнува со стрелка и се свива близу до точка на поврзување.Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете. За прилагодување на должината на линискиот сегмент помеѓу точка на свивање и точка на поврзување, кликнете го поврзувачот и влечете ја точката на свивање.
1c .uno%3AConnectorLinesCircles 27b Црта поврзувач кој се свива близу точка на поврзување и има кругови на двата краја. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете. За прилагодување на должината на линискиот сегмент помеѓу точка на свивање и точка на поврзување, кликнете го поврзувачот и влечете ја точката на свивање.
15 .uno%3AConnectorLines 24c Црта поврзувач кој се свива близу до точка на поврзување. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете. За прилагодување на должината на линискиот сегмент помеѓу точка на свивање и точка на поврзување, кликнете го поврзувачот и влечете ја точката на свивање.
20 .uno%3AConnectorLinesCircleStart 26c Црта поврзувач кој почнува со круг и се свива близу до точка на поврзување. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете. За прилагодување на должината на линискиот сегмент помеѓу точка на свивање и точка на поврзување, кликнете го поврзувачот и влечете ја точката на свивање.
1b .uno%3AConnectorCurveArrows 12c Црта поврзувач на крива линија со стрелки на двата краја. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објект, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
1d .uno%3AConnectorLinesArrowEnd 274 Црта поврзувач кој завршува со стрелка и се свива близу до точка на поврзување. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете. За прилагодување на должината на линискиот сегмент помеѓу точка на свивање и точка на поврзување, кликнете го поврзувачот и влечете ја точката на свивање.
17 .uno%3AConnectorToolbox 1d9 Отворете гоПоврзувачи алатникот, каде што можете да додадете поврзувачи на објекти во тековниот слајд. Поврзувач е линија која соединува објекти, и останува прикачена кога се преместуваат објектите. Ако копирате објект со поврзувач, се копира и поврзувачот.
16 .uno%3AConnectorArrows 15e Црта поврзувач со едно или повеќе 90 степени свивања на агол и стрелки на двата краја. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објект, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
1f .uno%3AConnectorLineCircleStart 127 Црта поврзувач на права линија со круг на почетокот. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
17 .uno%3AConnectorCircles 15e Црта поврзувач со едно или повеќе 90 степени свивања на агол и кругови на двата краја. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објект, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
1d .uno%3AConnectorLineCircleEnd 123 Цртва поврзувач на права линија со круг на крајот. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
1b .uno%3AConnectorLinesArrows 280 Црта поврзувач кој се свива близу до точка на поврзување и има стрелки на двата краја. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете. За прилагодување на должината на линискиот сегмент помеѓу точка на свивање и точка на поврзување, кликнете го поврзувачот и влечете ја точката на свивање.
1a .uno%3AConnectorArrowStart 15b Црта поврзувач со едно или повеќе 90 степени свивања на агол и стрелка на почетокот. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објект, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
1b .uno%3AConnectorCircleStart 155 Црта поврзувач со едно или повеќе 90 степени свивања на агол и круг на почетокот. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објект, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
1c .uno%3AConnectorLineArrowEnd 127 Црта поврзувач на права линија со стрелка на крајот. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објектот, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
10 .uno%3AConnector 131 Црта поврзувач со едно или повеќе 90 степени свивања на агол. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објект, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
19 .uno%3AConnectorCircleEnd 14f Црта поврзувач со едно или повеќе 90 степени свивања на агол и круг на крајот. Кликнете на точка на поврзување на објект, влечете до точка на поврзување на друг објект и потоа отпуштете.
14 .uno%3AInsertToolbox e7 Отворете го Вметни алатникот, каде што можете да додадете објекти, вклучувајќи табели, раб. листови и слики на вашиот документ.
14 .uno%3AArrowsToolbox 103 Отворете го Стрелки алатникот, каде што можете да додадете прави линии, линии со стрелки и линии за димензија на тековниот слајд или страница.
15 .uno%3ALineArrowStart 115 Црта права линија која почнува со стрелка каде што влечете во тековниот документ. За ограничување на линијата на 45 степени, задржете Shift додека влечете.
16 .uno%3ALineArrowSquare 13b Црта прва линија која почнува со стрелка и завршува со квадрат каде што влечете во тековниот документ, За ограничување на линијата на 45 степени, задржете Shift додека влечете.
13 .uno%3ALineArrowEnd 117 Црта права линија која завршува со стрелка каде што влечете во тековниот документ. За ограничување на линијата на 45 степени, задржете Shift додека влечете.
14 .uno%3ALine_Diagonal 67 Црта права линија која е ограничена со агли од 45 степени.
16 .uno%3ALineArrowCircle 137 Црта права линија која почнува со стрелка и завршува со круг каде што влечете во тековниот документ. За ограничување на линијата на 45 степени, задржете Shift додека влечете.
16 .uno%3ALineCircleArrow 137 Црта права линија која почнува со круг и завршува со стрелка каде што влечете во тековниот документ. За ограничување на линијата на 45 степени, задржете Shift додека влечете.
16 .uno%3ALineSquareArrow 13d Црта права линија која почнува со квадрат и завршува со стрелка каде што влечете во тековниот документ. За ограничување на линијата на 45 степени, задржете Shift додека влечете.
11 .uno%3ALineArrows 132 Црта права линија која почнува со стрелки на двата краеви каде што влечете во тековниот документ. За ограничување на линијата на 45 степени, задржете Shift додека влечете.
12 .uno%3AMeasureLine 89 Црта линија која ја прикажува должината на димензијата сврзана со водилки.
19 .uno%3AOutlineCollapseAll 196 Ги крие сите заглавја на слајдовите во тековното слајд шоу освен за насловите на слајдот. Скриените заглавја се означени со црно линија пред насловот на слајдот. За покажување на заглавјата, кликнете ја Сите нивоа иконата.
17 .uno%3AOutlineExpandAll 14d Ги прикажува скриените заглавја на слајдовите во тековното слајд шоу. За криење на сите заглавја во тековното слајд шпу, освен за насловите на слајдот, кликнете ја Прво нивоl иконата.
16 .uno%3AOutlineCollapse 162 Ги крие подзаглавјата на избраното заглавје. Скриените подзаглавја се означени со црна линија пред заглавјето. За покажување на заглавјата од пониско ниво, кликнете ја Покажи потточки иконата.
14 .uno%3AOutlineExpand 109 Ги прикажува скриените подзаглавја на избраното заглавје. За криење на подзаглавјата на избраното заглавје, кликнете ја Скриј потточки иконата.
14 .uno%3AOutlineFormat 185 Го покажува или крие форматирањето на знаци на заглавјето на слајдот/ За менување на форматирањето на знаци на заглавјето, отворете го Стилови и форматирање прозорецот, десен клик на стил, и потоа изберете Измени.
10 .uno%3AColorView 5a Ги прикажува вашите слајдови само во црно и бело..
13 .uno%3AGlueEditMode 11d Вметнете или изменете ги својствата на точка на слепување. Точка на слепување е сопствена точка на поврзување каде што можете да додадете поврзувач линија.
1a .uno%3AClickChangeRotation 108 Го менува однесување на кликот на глувчето, така да рачките за ротирање се појавуваат откако ќе кликнете на објект, и потоа повторно го кликнете.
14 .uno%3AAnimationMode 12e Пушта преглед на ефектот на анимација кој е доделен на објект, кога кликате на објект во слајдот. За избирање објект за уредување, задржете го Alt копчето кога кликате.
11 .uno%3AActionMode 12b Стартува преглед на интеракцијата која е доделена на објект, кога кликате на објект во слајдот. За избор на објект за уредување, задржете го Alt копчето кога кликате.
17 .uno%3AHelplinesVisible 12e Прикажува или сокрива линии на прикачување така да можете да ги уредите објектите на вашиот слајд. За отстранување на линија на прикачување, одвлечете ја од слајдот.
1a .uno%3ADoubleClickTextEdit df Го менуца однесувањето на кликот на глувчето, така да можете двојно да кликнете на објект за додавање или уредување текст.
12 .uno%3ASolidCreate c2 Ако оваа икона на Опции лентата е активирана, објектите се прикажани со нивните атрибути додека ги цртате.
15 .uno%3ALeaveAllGroups 62 Излегува од сите групи и се враќа на нормален преглед.
e .uno%3ARowMenu 2d Choose commands for the selected or all rows.
11 .uno%3AInsertRows c5 If currently no cell is selected, a new row will be inserted at the bottom of the table. If currently cells are selected, as many new rows as the selection has will be inserted below the selection.
10 .uno%3ASplitCell 52 The selected cell is split into several cells. You see the Split Cells dialog box.
15 .uno%3ADistributeRows 6c Distributes the height of the selected or all rows to the same size. The height of the table is not changed.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVX_NEWTABLE_DLG%3ANF_ROWS 2b Enter the number of rows for the new table.
11 .uno%3ADeleteRows 32 All rows of the current selection will be deleted.
15 .uno%3ACellVertCenter 3f The cell contents are aligned vertically centered in the cells.
14 .uno%3ADeleteColumns 35 All columns of the current selection will be deleted.
36 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVX_NEWTABLE_DLG%3ANF_COLUMNS 2e Enter the number of columns for the new table.
12 .uno%3ASelectTable 1a Selects the current table.
11 .uno%3AColumnMenu 30 Choose commands for the selected or all columns.
18 .uno%3ADistributeColumns 6d Distributes the width of the selected or all columns to the same size. The width of the table is not changed.
13 .uno%3AEntireColumn 9c If currently no cell is selected, all columns will be selected. If currently cells are selected, all columns containing the selected cells will be selected.
15 .uno%3ACellVertBottom 39 The cell contents are aligned at the bottom of the cells.
12 .uno%3ACellVertTop 34 The cell contents are align at the top of the cells.
10 .uno%3AEntireRow 96 If currently no cell is selected, all rows will be selected. If currently cells are selected, all rows containing the selected cells will be selected.
11 .uno%3AMergeCells 2c All selected cells are merged into one cell.
f .uno%3ACellMenu 55 Define the vertical alignment of selected or all cell contents. Split or merge cells.
15 .uno%3AAlignObjetMenu 29 Align the table within the page or slide.
14 .uno%3AInsertColumns d4 If currently no cell is selected, a new column will be inserted at the right border of the table. If currently cells are selected, as many new columns as the selection has will be inserted right of the selection.
f .uno%3AFileMenu bf Овие команди се применуваат на тековниот документ, отворете нов документ или затворете ја апликацијата.
f .uno%3AEditMenu 87 Ова мени содржи команди за уредување на содржината на тековниот документ.
f .uno%3AViewMenu 8b Ова мени содржи команди за контролирање на екранскиот приказ на документот.
11 .uno%3AInsertMenu 10f Ова мени содржи команди кои се користат за вметнување на нови елементи во документот, на пример, графика, објекти, специјални знаци и други датотеки.
11 .uno%3AFormatMenu 8d Содржи команди за форматирање на распоредот и содржината на Вашиот документ.
10 .uno%3AToolsMenu 15c Содржи aлатки за проверка на правописот, галерија од објекти кои можете да ги додадете на вашиот документ како и алатки за конфигурација на менија и поставување на преференции на програмата.
11 .uno%3AWindowList 88 Содржи команди за манипулирање и прикажување на прозорците на документот.
11 .uno%3AModifyMenu 6b Содржи команди за промена на објектите во Вашиот документ.
14 .uno%3ASlideShowMenu 6b Содржи команди и опции за презентацијата која се извршува.
d .uno%3AShrink 2b Reduces the font size of the selected text.
b .uno%3AGrow 2d Increases the font size of the selected text.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
2c starmath%3APushButton%3ARID_SYMBOLDIALOG%3A2 8c Ги применува изменетите или избраните вредности без затворање на дијалогот.
1c SFX2_HID_TABDLG_STANDARD_BTN aa Вредностите кои се видливи во дијалогот ги ресетира во стандардните инсталациони вредности.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ARB_COPY_AREA 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
2f sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_ROWCELL 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ARB_COPY_AREA 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_CUSTOMSHOW%3ABTN_REMOVE 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
2c sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_COPY%3ABTN_SET_DEFAULT aa Вредностите кои се видливи во дијалогот ги ресетира во стандардните инсталациони вредности.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ARB_REPEATCOL 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFADLG_OPTIONS_TREE%3APB_BACK 95 Променетите вредности повторно ги ресетира во вредностите стандардни за $[officename].
1b DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_PREVIOUS ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDPREV ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
39 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ABTN_REMOVE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ABTN_REMOVE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_NEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
17 DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_NEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ARB_PRINTAREA 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
2e sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ARB_ASSIGN 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CREATE 5e Ги применува сите промени и го затвора волшебникот.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_DELABBREV 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_NEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
1b CUI_HID_MEASURE_CTL_PREVIEW 45 Прикажува преглед на тековниот избор.
2e sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ABTN_REMOVE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ARB_REPEATROW 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND3_2 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_DELETE 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_STD_FONT%3APB_STANDARD aa Вредностите кои се видливи во дијалогот ги ресетира во стандардните инсталациони вредности.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_NEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDNEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND2_1 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVER%3ARB_FORMULACELL 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDCANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPREV ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_NEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
33 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ABTN_REMOVE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
3b sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ARB_CRITERIA_AREA 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDPREV ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
19 SFX2_HID_TABDLG_RESET_BTN 135 Промените направени во тековното ливче ги ресетира во вредностите применети кога дијалогот беше отворен. Не се појавува прашање за потврда кога го затворате дијалогот.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND1_2 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
43 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3APB_DELETE_REPLACE 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ARB_DEST_AREA 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_DELDOUBLECAPS 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
2f sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_COLCELL 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_PREVIOUS ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_CANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_PREVIOUS ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_DEL 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
13 WIZARDS_HID0_CANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_CANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
34 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ABTN_REMOVE 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
17 SVX_HID_GALLERY_PREVIEW 45 Прикажува преглед на тековниот избор.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_FORMULARANGE 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BACK ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
30 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVER%3ARB_VARCELL 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
30 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ARB_DBAREA 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDCANCEL 8c Со кликање Откажи се затвора дијалог без да се зачуваат направените промени.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ARB_DATA 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
33 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_REMOVE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND1_1 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ARB_DATA_AREA 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ARB_AREA 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDFINISH 5e Ги применува сите промени и го затвора волшебникот.
36 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ARB_OUTAREA 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND2_2 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND3_1 1fd Кликнете на иконата Собери за да се намали дијалогот во големина на полето за внесување. Тогаш е полесно да се означи потребната референца во листот. Иконите автоматски ќе се претворат во иконата Максимизирај. Кликнете на неа за да се поврати дијалогот во оригиналната големина.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 83 Го брише избраниот елемент или елементи по дадената потврда за бришење.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_PREV ce Го прикажува изборот од дијалогот направен во претходниот чекор. Тековните поставувања остануваат непроменети.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ABTN_DEL_MULTIPATH 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNEXT 185 Кликнете на копчето  Следно , и Волшебникот ќе ги користи тековните поставувања за дијалогот и ќе продолжи кон следниот чекор. Доколку се наоѓате на последниот чекор од Волшебникот, ова копче преминува во Креирај.
1d SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_BACKGROUND 64 Ја вметнува избраната слика како графика на подлогата.
19 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_PASTE 8d Го вметнува елементот што сте го пренеле во таблата со исечоци во документот.
1a SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_RENAME 54 Овозможува да се преименува избраниот објект.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_OBJECT 99 Користете ја наредбата Отвори за да го отворите избраниот објект во нова операција.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_FOLDER 99 Користете ја наредбата Отвори за да го отворите избраниот објект во нова операција.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_COPY 5c Го копира избраниот елемент во таблата за исечоци.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ACTUALIZE 6d Го ажурира прегледот во прозорецот или во избраниот објект.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN 99 Користете ја наредбата Отвори за да го отворите избраниот објект во нова операција.
1b SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_DESTROY 11e Го брише тековниот избор. Ако се избрани повеќе објекти, сите ќе бидат избришани. Најчесто, прашање за потврда се појавува пред да бидат избришани објектите.
1c SFX2_HID_DID_SAVE_PACKED_XML 9a Стандардно, $[officename] ги вчитува и зачувува датотеките во форматот на датотека OpenDocument.
11 .uno%3AActiveHelp 9e Ви овозможува приказ на краток опис на менијата и иконите под покажувачот на глушецот.
e .uno%3AHelpTip b4 Ви овозможува приказ на имињата на икони и други содржини на Помошта на позицијата на покажувачот.
13 .uno%3AHelperDialog 11b Ви овозможува да го активирате автоматскиот Агент за помош. Можете да го активирате Агентот за помош и преку Алатки - Опции - $[officename] - Општо - Агент за помош.
28 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Ftiffpreviewcb 6a Specifies whether a preview image is exported in the TIFF format together with the actual PostScript file.
2b svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressionjpgnf 79 Sets the quality for the export. Choose from a low quality with minimal file size, up to a high quality and big file size
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressnone 32 Specifies that you do not wish to use compression.
2b svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressionpngnf 62 Sets the compression for the export. A high compression means a smaller, but slower to load image.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fbinarycb 52 Exports the file in binary format. The resulting file is smaller than a text file.
2a svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fheightmf-nospin 15 Specifies the height.
26 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompresslzw 66 LZW compression is the compression of a file into a smaller file using a table-based lookup algorithm.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Flevel1rb 8c Compression is not available at this level. Select the Level 1 option if your PostScript printer does not offer the capabilities of Level 2.
2e svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fresolutionmf-nospin 4b Enter the image resolution. Select the measurement units from the list box.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolor2rb 24 Exports the file in grayscale tones.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Flevel2rb 73 Select the Level 2 option if your output device supports colored bitmaps, palette graphics and compressed graphics.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fresolutionlb 4b Enter the image resolution. Select the measurement units from the list box.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Finterlacedcb 40 Specifies whether the graphic is to be saved in interlaced mode.
28 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fepsipreviewcb b6 Specifies whether a monochrome preview graphic in EPSI format is exported together with the PostScript file. This format only contains printable characters from the 7-bit ASCII code.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolordepthlb 41 Select the color depth from 8 bit grayscale or 24 bit true color.
20 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Frlecb 36 Applies RLE (Run Length Encoding) to the BMP graphics.
29 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fwidthmf-nospin 20 Specifies the measurement units.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolor1rb 1a Exports the file in color.
2d svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fsavetransparencycb ba Specifies whether to save the background of the picture as transparent. Only objects will be visible in the GIF image. Use the Color Replacer to set the transparent color in the picture.
21 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Ftextcb 57 Exports the file in ASCII text format. The resulting file is larger than a binary file.
22 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fwidthlb 14 Specifies the width.
2c sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ALB_FONT 96 Изберете го множеството знаци од опциите кои се користат за внесување/изнесување.
31 sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3AED_FIELDSEP 9a Изберете или внесете го разделувачот на поле, кој ги разделува полињата со податоци.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_FIXEDWIDTH 61 Ги изнесува сите полиња со податоци со фиксна ширина.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_SAVESHOWN bc Enabled by default, data will be saved as displayed, including applied number formats. If this checkbox is not marked, raw data content will be saved, as in older versions of the software.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_QUOTEALL c0 Exports all text cells with leading and trailing quote characters as set in the Text delimiter box. If not checked, only those text cells get quoted that contain the Field delimiter character.
30 sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3AED_TEXTSEP 90 Изберете или внесете разделувач на текст, кој го опфаќа секое поле за податоци.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ADDLB_FONT 67 Го одредува множеството на знаци за изнесување на текст.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ALB_CHARSET 81 Го одредува множеството знаци кое ќе се користи во внесената датотека.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_ASONCE 98 Комбинира последователни разделувачи и ги отстранува празните полиња со податоци.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_QUOTED_AS_TEXT b2 When this option is enabled, fields or cells whose values are quoted in their entirety (the first and last characters of the value equal the text delimiter) are imported as text.
29 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ALB_TYPE1 cf Изберете колона во прозорецот за преглед и изберете го типот на податоци кој ќе се примени на внесените податоци.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_COMMA 64 Ги одделува податоците разделени со запирка во колони.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ALB_CUSTOMLANG 2f Determines how the number strings are imported.
2c sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_TEXTSEP 61 Изберете знак за разделување на текстуални податоци.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_SPACE 6d Ги одделува податоците разделени со празни места во колони.
2d sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ARB_FIXED 7e Ги одделува податоците со фиксна ширина (ист број на знаци) во колони.
2f sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ANF_AT_ROW 72 Го одредува редот каде што сакате да започнете со внесувањето.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_OTHER 127 Ги одделува податоците во колони со користење на сопствен разделувач кој вие го одредувате. Забелешка: Сопствениот разделувач мора да постои во вашите податоци.
3a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_DETECT_SPECIAL_NUMBER 9e When this option is enabled, Calc will automatically detect all number formats, including special number formats such as dates, time, and scientific notation.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ARB_SEPARATED 6d Изберете го разделувачот што се користи во вашите податоци.
29 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_TAB 6a Ги одделува податоците разделени со табулатори во колони.
22 sc%3AModalDialog%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII 6a Ги поставува опциите за внесување на ограничени податоци.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_SEMICOLON 72 Ги одделува податоците разделени со точка и запирка во колони.
26 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3AED_OTHER 127 Ги одделува податоците во колони со користење на сопствен разделувач кој вие го одредувате. Забелешка: Сопствениот разделувач мора да постои во вашите податоци.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_SCALE 73 Одредува дали да се распредели отпечатокот на повеќе страници.
25 sd%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS 102 Дијалогот Предупредување за опции за печатење се појавува кога поставувањата на страница не се совпаѓаат со дефинираниот опсег за печатење.
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_CUT e2 Одредува дека сѐ што се протега надвор од максималниот опсег за печатење ќе биде скратено и нема да се вклучи во печатењето.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_POSTER 73 Одредува дали да се распредели отпечатокот на повеќе страници.
2b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ARB_LF 8f Вметнува знак со кој се обележува крај на ред, „Linefeed - LF“, како прелом на пасус.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ALB_LANGUAGE c8 Го одредува јазикот на текстот, ако тоа досега не е дефинирано. Ова поставување е достапно само при внесување.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ALB_FONT 123 Со поставување на стандарден фонт, вие одредувате дека текстот треба да е прикажен во одреден фонт. Стандардните фонтови може да се изберат само при внесување.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ARB_CRLF 11b Вметнува знак со кој се обележува крај на пасус и почеток на нов, „Carriage Return - CR“, и знак со кој се обележува крај на ред, „Linefeed - LF“. Оваа опција е стандардна.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ALB_CHARSET 86 Го одредува множеството знаци на датотеката за изнесување или внесување.
2b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ARB_CR b8 Вметнува знак со кој се обележува крај на пасус и почеток на нов, „Carriage Return - CR“, како прелом на пасус.
1b SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD_LINK 4c Ја вметнува избраната графика како врска.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD 68 Вметнува копија од графички објект директно во документ.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_DELETE 4a Ја брише избраната графика по потврдата.
1a SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADDMENU 6d Одредува како избран графички објект е вметнат во документ.
15 SVX_HID_GALLERY_TITLE 57 Доделува наслов на избран објект од Галеријата.
1a SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_PREVIEW 5c Наредбата Преглед ја прикажува избраната графика.
1d SW_HID_MN_READONLY_GRAPHICOFF 6a Поставува целата графика во документот да биде невидлива.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_LOADGRAPHIC cc Ако сте го исклучиле прикажувањето на графика, изберете ја наредбата Вчитај графика за да ја направите видлива.
1b SW_HID_MN_READONLY_COPYLINK 89 Ја копира врската над која е покажувачот на глушецот во таблата со исечоци.
21 SW_HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEBACKGROUND 65 Ви овозможува да ја зачувате подлогата на веб-страница.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEGRAPHIC 76 Отвора дијалог каде што можете да ја зачувата избраната графика.
1c SW_HID_MN_READONLY_PLUGINOFF 48 Ги оневозможува вметнатите приклучоци.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_COPYGRAPHIC 5c Ја копира избраната графика во таблата со исечоци.
22 CUI_HID_GALLERY_PROPERTIES_GENERAL 35 Го прикажува името на темата.
10 .uno%3AAddDirect 34 Креира нов  $[officename] документ.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fscalc 65 Креира нов документ за табеларни пресметки ($[officename] Calc).
28 private%3Afactory%2Fsimpress%3Fslot=6686 b9 Креира нов документ за презентација ($[officename] Impress). Се појавува дијалог за волшебникот за презентации.
21 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2Fweb 2a Креира нов HTML-документ.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21052 f4 Го отвора дијалогот за визит карти каде можете да ги поставите опциите за вашите визит карти и потоа креира нов документ ($[officename] Writer).
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21051 116 Го отвора дијалогот за налепници каде можете да ги поставите опциите за вашите налепници, и потоа креира нов текст документ за налепниците ($[officename] Writer).
2c private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2FGlobalDocument 32 Креира нов главен документ.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21053 2c Креира нов XForms документ.
1b private%3Afactory%2Fswriter 51 Креира нов текстуален документ ($[officename] Writer).
2b private%3Afactory%2Fsdatabase%3FInteractive 87 Го отвора волшебникот за бази на податоци за креирање на база на податоци.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsdraw 4c Креира нов документ за цртање ($[officename] Draw).
1b SFX2_HID_TBXCONTROL_FILENEW 91 Креирај нов $[officename] документ. Кликни ја стрелката за избор на типот на документ.
2f service%3Acom.sun.star.sdb.DatabaseWizardDialog 87 Го отвора волшебникот за бази на податоци за креирање на база на податоци.
d .uno%3ANewDoc 57 If you want to create a document from a template, choose New - Templates and Documents.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsmath 4e Креира нов документ со формули ($[officename] Math).
b slot%3A5500 99 Креира нов документ користејќи или постоечки шаблон  или отвора документ за пример.
1e SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_DOCINFO 6a Ги прикажува својствата за одбраниот шаблон или документ.
1e SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREVIEW 66 Ви овозможува преглед на одбраниот шаблон или документ.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PRINT 4a Го печати одбраниот шаблон или документ.
1b SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREV 5d Ве придвижува едно ниво погоре, ако постои папката.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_FILEVIEW 172 Листање на расположливите шаблони или документи за одбраната категорија. Одберете шаблон или документ и потоа кликнете, Отвори. За преглед на документот кликнете го Преглед копчето над полето на десно.
3d svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCTEMPLATE%3ABTN_DOCTEMPLATE_EDIT 4a Го отвора одбраниот шаблон за уредување.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_ICONCTRL 163 Категориите се прикажани во полето на левата страна од дијалогот за Шаблони и документи . Кликнете на категорија за да ги прикажете датотеките кои се поврзани со таа категорија во полетоНаслов .
3f svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCTEMPLATE%3ABTN_DOCTEMPLATE_MANAGE 7b Додава, отстранува, или преуредува шаблони или документи за пример.
1b SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_BACK 59 Ве префрла на претходниот прозорец во дијалогот.
13 .uno%3AInsertLabels 92 Ви овозможува креирање на налепници. Налепниците се креираат во текст документ.
13 SW_HID_LABEL_INSERT 63 Креира нов документ за уредување насловен:"Налепница1"
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABOX_TYPE 22e Одберете ја големината на форматот која што сакате да ја користите. Форматите кои што се на располагање зависат од марката која што ја одбравте од листата Марка. Ако сакате да користите сопствен формат на налепница, одберете [Корисник], и потоа кликнете на јазичето Форматирај за да го дефинирате форматот.
2d sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3AEDT_WRITING d7 Внесете го текстот кој што сакате да се појави на налепницата. Исто така можете да вметнете и поле од бази на податоци.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABOX_ADDR d1 Креира налепница со вашата повратна адреса. Текстот кој што тековно се наоѓа воТекст на налепницатасе пребришува.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ALB_DATABASE c2 Одберете ја базата на податоци која што сакате да ја користите како извор на податоци за вашата налепница.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABOX_MAKE 73 Одберете ја марката на хартија која што сакате да ја користите.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ALB_DBFIELD 48 Одберете ја базата на податоци Label text box.
29 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABTN_SHEET 49 Печати налепници на поединечни листови.
28 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABTN_CONT 44 Печати налепници на хартија во ролна.
2a sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABTN_INSERT 48 Одберете ја базата на податоци Label text box.
e SW_HID_LAB_LAB b3 Специфицирајте ја големината на текстот на налепницата и големината на хартијат.а за налепницата
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ALB_TABLE d1 Одберете ја табелата од базата на податоци која ги содржи полињата кои сакате да ги користите во вашата налепница.
28 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_LEFT 124 Приказ на растојанието од левиот раб на страницата до левиот раб на првата налепница или визит карта.Ако дефинирате сопствен формат, внесете ја вредноста тука.
28 sw%3AComboBox%3ADLG_SAVE_LABEL%3ACB_MAKE 50 Внесете или изберете ја посакуваната марка.
26 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3APB_SAVE 6f Го зачувува тековниот формат на налепницата или визит карта.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_WIDTH bc Приказ на ширината за налепницата или визит картата. Ако дефинирате сопствен формат, внесете вредност.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_SAVE_LABEL%3AED_TYPE 46 Внесете или изберете тип на налепница.
e SW_HID_LAB_FMT 57 Постави ги опциите за форматирање на хартијата.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_UPPER 150 Приказ на растојанието од горниот раб на страницата до горниот врв на првата налепница или бизнис карта. Ако користите сопствен формат, внесете сопствен формат, внесете вредност тука.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_VDIST 175 Приказ на растојанието помеѓу горните рабови на налепниците или на визит карти и на горниот раб на налепницата или на визит картата директно подолу. Ако дефинирате сопствен формат, внесете вредност тука.
2a sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_HEIGHT c9 Приказ на големината за налепницата или визит картата. Ако дефинирате сопствен формат, внесете вредност тука.
2c sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_COLUMNS b9 Внесете го бројот на налепници или визит карти кои сакате да се распоредат до ширината на страницата.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_HDIST ff Приказ на растојанието помеѓу левите рабови на соседните налепници или визит карти. Ако дефинирате сопствен формат, внесете вредност овде.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_ROWS c9 Внесете го бројот на налепници или визит карти кои што сакате да се распоредат до целата висина на страницата.
28 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3AFLD_COL b7 Внесете го бројот на налепници или визит карти што сакате да ги имате во еден ред на вашата страница.
28 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3AFLD_ROW b4 Внесете го бројот на редови со налепници или визит карти што сакате да ги имате на вашата страница.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ABTN_SINGLE 65 Печати една налепница или визит карта на една страница.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ACB_SYNCHRON 14b Ви овозможува уредување на една налепница или визит карта и ажурирање на содржината на преостанатите налепници или визит карти кога ќе кликнете на копчето Синхронизирај налепници
29 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_SYNC_BTN%3ABTN_SYNC c8 Копирање на содржината на горната лева налепница или визит карта во преостанатите налепници или визит карти.
28 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ABTN_PAGE 5c Креира цела страница со налепници или визит карти.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ABTN_PRTSETUP 40 Opens the Поставување на печатачот dialog.
e SW_HID_LAB_PRT fd Поставување на дополнителни опции за вашите налепници или визит карти, вклучувајќи поставувања за текстот, синхронизацијата и печатачот.
19 .uno%3AInsertBusinessCard 57 Дизајнирајте и креирајте сопствени визит-карти
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_CONT 4b Печатење визит карти на хартија во ролна.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_SHEET 55 Печатење на визит-карти на поединечни листови.
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_TYPE 20b Одберетe ја големината на форматот што сакате да ја користите. Форматите кои што се на располагање зависат на вашиот избор од листата Марка. Ако сакате да користите сопствена големина за форматот, одберете [Корисник], и потоа кликнете го јазичето Форматирај за да го дефинирате форматот.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_BRAND 6a Одберете ја марката на хартија што сакате да ја користите.
1c SW_HID_BUSINESS_CARD_CONTENT 67 Select a business card category in AutoText - Section box, and then click a layout in the Content list.
35 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_VISITING_CARDS%3ALB_AUTO_TEXT_GROUP 4d Select a business card category, and then click a layout in the Content list.
2b sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_PROFESSION 23 Enter the title of your profession.
2b sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_SHORTCUT_2 4b Enter the initials of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_MOBILE 23 Enter your mobile telephone number.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_NAME_2 4c Enter the last name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_PHONE 21 Enter your home telephone number.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_STATE 30 Enter the name of the country in which you live.
2c sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_FIRSTNAME_2 4d Enter the first name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_WWW 2c Enter the address of your internet homepage.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_WWW 36 Enter the address of your company's internet homepage.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_MOBILE 23 Enter your mobile telephone number.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_SLOGAN 21 Enter the slogan of your company.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_COMP_EXT 21 Enter additional company details.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_PHONE 25 Enter your business telephone number.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_STATE 3d Enter the name of the country where your business is located.
49 fpicker%3AImageButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_NEWFOLDER 18 Creates a new directory.
34 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_ALL 23 Click to delete all selected files.
1b SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_INSERT_BTN 4b Inserts the selected file into the current document at the cursor position.
18 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_VERSION 5e If there are multiple versions of the selected file, select the version that you want to open.
19 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_READONLY 21 Opens the file in read-only mode.
47 fpicker%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_STANDARD 31 Displays the files in the default user directory.
1c SVT_HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_RENAME 3f To rename a file, right-click the file, and then choose Rename.
41 fpicker%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_UP 61 Move up one directory in the directory hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level directories.
20 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_FOLDER_FILENAME 43 Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL.
43 fpicker%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ALB_EXPLORERFILE_FILETYPE 7b Select the file type that you want to open, or select All Files (*) to display a list of all of the files in the directory.
34 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_YES 3c Click to delete the file with the name shown in this dialog.
23 FPICKER_HID_FILEDLG_AUTOCOMPLETEBOX 43 Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL.
b .uno%3AOpen 18 Opens or imports a file.
1c SVT_HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_DELETE 3f To delete a file, right-click the file, and then choose Delete.
19 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_STANDARD 44 Displays the files and directories in the directory that you are in.
33 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_NO 48 Click to cancel deletion of the file with the name shown in this dialog.
18 SVT_HID_EXPLORERDLG_FILE 18 Opens or imports a file.
19 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_PATH_BTN 1b Selects the indicated path.
1e SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_PATH_FILENAME 27 Enter or select the path from the list.
2e uui%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTER_SELECT%3ALB_FILTERS 3c Select the import filter for the file that you want to open.
f .uno%3ACloseDoc 38 Closes the current document without exiting the program.
b .uno%3ASave 1b Saves the current document.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILETYPE 3c Select the file format for the document that you are saving.
21 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DEFAULTDIRECTORY 31 Displays the files in the default user directory.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DOSAVE f Saves the file.
18 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILEURL 42 Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL
1a SVT_HID_FILESAVE_SELECTION 9a Exports only the selected graphic objects in %PRODUCTNAME Draw and Impress to another format. If this box is not checked, the entire document is exported.
18 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_LEVELUP 61 Move up one directory in the directory hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level directories.
20 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_CUSTOMIZEFILTER 4e Allows you to set the spreadsheet saving options for some types of data files.
21 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_SAVEWITHPASSWORD 57 Protects the file with a password that must be entered before a user can open the file.
d .uno%3ASaveAs 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
d SID_SAVEASDOC 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DIALOG 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
20 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_CREATEDIRECTORY 18 Creates a new directory.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILEVIEW 44 Displays the files and directories in the directory that you are in.
f .uno%3AExportTo 5b Saves the current document with a different name and format to a location that you specify.
1c .uno%3ASetDocumentProperties 78 Displays the properties for the current file, including statistics such as word count and the date the file was created.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_THEMA 61 Enter a subject for the document. You can use a subject to group documents with similar contents.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_TITLE 1f Enter a title for the document.
2a sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_KEYWORDS 4b Enter the words that you want to use to index the content of your document.
32 sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_COMMENT 2d Enter comments to help identify the document.
14 SFX2_HID_DOCINFODESC 34 Contains descriptive information about the document.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ABTN_DELETE a3 Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted.
2a sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3AED_FILE_NAME 17 Displays the file name.
31 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ACB_USE_USERDATA 78 Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data.
13 SFX2_HID_DOCINFODOC 32 Contains basic information about the current file.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_CUSTOMPROPERTIES%3ABTN_ADD 2e Click to add a new row to the Properties list.
1e SFX2_HID_CTRL_CUSTOMPROPERTIES 74 Enter your custom content. If you want, you can change the label for the content by clicking the Info Fields button.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO1 74 Enter your custom content. If you want, you can change the label for the content by clicking the Info Fields button.
14 SFX2_HID_DOCINFOUSER 40 Allows you to assign custom information fields to your document.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO4 74 Enter your custom content. If you want, you can change the label for the content by clicking the Info Fields button.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO3 74 Enter your custom content. If you want, you can change the label for the content by clicking the Info Fields button.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO2 74 Enter your custom content. If you want, you can change the label for the content by clicking the Info Fields button.
f SW_HID_DOC_STAT 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
1e sc%3ATabPage%3ARID_SCPAGE_STAT 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
16 SFX2_HID_DOCINFORELOAD 37 Sets the refresh and redirect options for an HTML page.
32 sfx2%3ANumericField%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3AED_RELOAD 40 Enter the number of seconds to wait before the page is reloaded.
33 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3APB_BROWSEURL 3b Locate the file that you want to open, and then click Open.
37 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ARB_NOAUTOUPDATE 24 User must refresh the page manually.
38 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ARB_FORWARDUPDATE 5c Loads a page that you specify after the number of seconds that you enter in the seconds box.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3AED_URL 38 Enter the URL address of the file that you want to open.
33 sfx2%3ANumericField%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3AED_FORWARD 57 Enter the number of seconds to wait before redirecting the browser to a different file.
2d sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ACB_FRAME 6f If the current HTML page uses frames, select the name of the target frame where you want the file to be loaded.
37 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ARB_RELOADUPDATE 87 Reloads the HTML page after the number of seconds that you enter in the seconds box. To observe the result, open the page in a browser.
28 HID_SECURITYTAB_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 16 Re-enter the password.
2a HID_SECURITYTAB_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 16 Re-enter the password.
1f SFX2_HID_SECURITYTAB_PROTECTION d7 Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection.
22 HID_SECURITYTAB_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
30 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
3a HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 16 Re-enter the password.
23 SFX2_HID_SECURITYTAB_RECORD_CHANGES 50 Select to enable recording changes. This is the same as Edit - Changes - Record.
38 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 16 Re-enter the password.
2d HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_FILE_READONLY 42 Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only.
20 HID_SECURITYTAB_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
32 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
27 SFX2_HID_SECURITYTAB_OPEN_FILE_READONLY 42 Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only.
13 .uno%3ATemplateMenu 5a Lets you organize and edit your templates, as well as save the current file as a template.
17 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_PRINT 47 Prints the name and properties of the styles that are used in the file.
1f SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_PRINTER_SETUP 3f Changes the printer and its settings for the selected document.
2b sfx2%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ABTN_EDIT 48 Contains commands for managing and editing your templates and documents.
18 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_DELETE 1e Deletes the current selection.
1b SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_COPY_FROM 96 Imports an additional template. To import a template, select a template folder in the list, click the Command button, and then select Import template.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ABTN_FILES 4d Locate a file that you want to add to the document list, and then click Open.
19 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_COPY_TO 1e Exports the selected template.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ALB_LEFT_TYP 5a Select Templates or Documents to change the contents that are displayed in the list above.
1b SFX2_HID_CTL_ORGANIZER_LEFT 9d Displays the available template categories or opened $[officename] files. To change the contents of the list, select Templates or Documents in the box below.
15 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_NEW 20 Creates a new template category.
2c sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ALB_RIGHT_TYP 5a Select Templates or Documents to change the contents that are displayed in the list above.
21 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_STDTEMPLATE_DEL 5c Select a $[officename] document type to reset the default template to the original template.
16 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_EDIT 28 Opens the selected template for editing.
1c SFX2_HID_CTL_ORGANIZER_RIGHT 9d Displays the available template categories or opened $[officename] files. To change the contents of the list, select Templates or Documents in the box below.
10 .uno%3AOrganizer 63 Opens the Template Management dialog where you can organize templates and define default templates.
36 sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ABTN_ADDRESSTEMPLATE 4d Locate a file that you want to add to the document list, and then click Open.
18 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_RESCAN 22 Updates the contents of the lists.
21 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_STDTEMPLATE_ADD 71 Uses the selected template as the default template when you create a new $[officename] document of the same type.
22 SVT_HID_ADDRTEMPL_FIELD_ASSIGNMENT 4e Select the field in the data table that corresponds to the address book entry.
35 svtools%3AComboBox%3ADLG_ADDRESSBOOKSOURCE%3ACB_TABLE 2c Select the data table for your address book.
49 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_ADDRESSBOOKSOURCE%3APB_ADMINISTATE_DATASOURCES 36 Add a new data source to the Address Book Source list.
3a svtools%3AComboBox%3ADLG_ADDRESSBOOKSOURCE%3ACB_DATASOURCE 2d Select the data source for your address book.
18 .uno%3AAddressBookSource 45 Edit the field assignments and the data source for your address book.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_EDIT 28 Opens the selected template for editing.
28 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3AED_NAME 1e Enter a name for the template.
15 .uno%3ASaveAsTemplate 29 Saves the current document as a template.
2e sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_SECTION 34 Select a category in which to save the new template.
32 sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_ORGANIZE 54 Opens the Template Management dialog where you can organize or create new templates.
32 sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_STYLESHEETS 28 Lists the available template categories.
13 .uno%3AOpenTemplate 3b Opens a dialog where you can select a template for editing.
35 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPage%3AListBox 29 Select how many slides to print per page.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintDateTime%3ACheckBox 35 Specifies whether to print the current date and time.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fexpander 37 Show/Hide detailed information of the selected printer.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fbordercb 28 Check to draw a border around each page.
20 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fcollate 32 Preserves the page order of the original document.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintHidden%3ACheckBox 3f Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A2 46 Prints only the selected area(s) or object(s) in the current document.
27 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsingleprintjob 68 Check to not rely on the printer to create collated copies but create a print job for each copy instead.
3a .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPageOrder%3AListBox 32 Specify how to arrange slides on the printed page.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A1 42 Prints only the pages or slides that you specify in the Pages box.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A1 44 Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing.
29 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpaperspersheetlb 32 Select how many pages to print per sheet of paper.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectInclude%3AListBox 2a Select which pages of a brochure to print.
24 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fprinttofile 29 Prints to a file instead of to a printer.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fprinters f9 The list box shows the installed printers. Click the printer to use for the current print job. Click the Printer details button to see some information about the selected printer. Click the Properties button to change some of the printer properties.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A2 2d Specifies to print colors as black and white.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A0 3b Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size.
2f .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ABorder%3ACheckBox 3a Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagerows 16 Select number of rows.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox 7b Specifies whether to print colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background).
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPaperFromSetup%3ACheckBox 86 For printers with multiple trays this option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
20 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Forderlb 2e Select order in which pages are to be printed.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspect%3ACheckBox 44 Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format.
22 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fcopycount 32 Enter the number of copies that you want to print.
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintName%3ACheckBox 37 Specifies whether to print the page name of a document.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A3 a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 182 If this option is enabled automatically inserted blank pages are printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsIncludeEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 52 If checked empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed.
40 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPicturesAndObjects%3ACheckBox 5d Specifies whether the graphics and drawings or OLE objects of your text document are printed.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A0 2c Specify how to scale slides in the printout.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintControls%3ACheckBox 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagecols 19 Select number of columns.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A1 27 Specifies to print colors as grayscale.
26 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Forientationlb 24 Select the orientation of the paper.
2e .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageRange%3AEdit c3 To print a range of pages, use a format like 3-6. To print single pages, use a format like 7;9;11. You can print a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A1 3c Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout.
31 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ATitleRow%3ACheckBox 53 Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout.
26 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsheetmarginsb 37 Select margin between the printed pages and paper edge.
c .uno%3APrint 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A0 26 Specifies to print in original colors.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A2 83 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer so they fit on the paper in the printer.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 29 Specify where to print comments (if any).
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A0 1b Prints the entire document.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintScale%3ANumericField 4a Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AFixedText 29 Specify where to print comments (if any).
24 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2FPrintDialog 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AFormulaText%3ACheckBox 5f Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagemarginsb 3e Select margin between individual pages on each sheet of paper.
29 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagespersheetbtn 28 Print multiple pages per sheet of paper.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A2 4a Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectRTL%3AListBox 5e For brochure printing, you can select a left-to-right order of pages or a right-to-left order.
1e vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsetup 24 Opens the printer properties dialog.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintLeftRightPages%3AListBox 2d Specify which pages to include in the output.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageContentType%3AListBox 35 Select which parts of the document should be printed.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Freverseorder 26 Check to print pages in reverse order.
32 svtools%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
13 .uno%3APrinterSetup 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
39 svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG%3ALB_NAMES 7a Lists the installed printers on your operating system. To change the default printer, select a printer name from the list.
16 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsMS e6 Отвара нов прозорец во вашиот преддефиниран клиент за е-пошта со тековниот документ како прилог. Се користи форматот на Microsoft.
11 .uno%3ASendToMenu 3f Sends a copy of the current document to different applications.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsOOo e4 Отвара нов прозорец во вашиот преддефиниран клиент за е-пошта со тековниот документ како прилог. Се користи OpenDocument форматот.
f .uno%3ASendMail e9 Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The current file format is used. If the document is new and unsaved, the format specified in Tools - Options - Load/Save - General is used.
28 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_CONTROL_FILEVIEW 63 Select the paragraph style that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
13 .uno%3ANewGlobalDoc a7 Creates a master document from the current Writer document. A new sub-document is created at each occurrence of the 'Heading 1' paragraph style in the source document.
28 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_LISTBOX_TEMPLATE 63 Select the paragraph style that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_TEMPLATE 63 Select the paragraph style that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
24 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_EDIT_FILEURL 63 Select the paragraph style that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
b .uno%3AQuit 47 Closes all $[officename] programs and prompts you to save your changes.
e .uno%3ASaveAll 27 Saves all open $[officename] documents.
14 .uno%3AVersionDialog 89 Saves and organizes multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete, and compare previous versions.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_DELETE 1d Deletes the selected version.
21 sfx2%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_VERSIONS 85 Lists the existing versions of the current document, the date and the time they were created, the author and the associated comments.
2a sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_OPEN 31 Opens the selected version in a read-only window.
2d sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_COMPARE 33 Compare the changes that were made in each version.
31 sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_COMMENTS%3AME_VERSIONS 7d Enter a comment here when you are saving a new version. If you clicked Show to open this dialog, you cannot edit the comment.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3ACB_SAVEONCLOSE 77 If you have made changes to your document, $[officename] automatically saves a new version when you close the document.
2a sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_SAVE a8 Saves the current state of the document as a new version. If you want, you can also enter comments in the Insert Version Comment dialog before you save the new version.
2a sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_VIEW 35 Displays the entire comment for the selected version.
15 .uno%3ARecentFileList 51 Lists the most recently opened files. To open a file in the list, click its name.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_UNDO a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3AUndo a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3ARedo 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_REDO 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
d .uno%3ARepeat 19 Repeats the last command.
13 .uno%3ARepeatAction 19 Repeats the last command.
a .uno%3ACut 32 Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard.
b .uno%3ACopy 26 Copies the selection to the clipboard.
c .uno%3APaste a6 Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects. Click the arrow next to the icon to select the format.
17 SC_HID_SC_REPLCELLSWARN a6 Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects. Click the arrow next to the icon to select the format.
15 .uno%3AInsertContents 0 
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSNOTES 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSOBJECTS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_DOWN 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_DIV 0 
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSATTRS 0 
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSDATETIME 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSSTRINGS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_NONE 0 
13 .uno%3APasteSpecial 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_SKIP_EMPTY 0 
11 CUI_HID_PASTE_DLG 2e Displays the source of the clipboard contents.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_ADD 0 
15 .uno%3APasteClipboard 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
30 cui%3AListBox%3AMD_PASTE_OBJECT%3ALB_INSERT_LIST 42 Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste.
33 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_RIGHT 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_MUL 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSNUMBERS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_NOOP 0 
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_TRANSPOSE 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_SUB 0 
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_LINK 0 
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSFORMULAS 0 
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSALL 0 
10 .uno%3ASelectAll 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
d .uno%3ASelect 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
2e svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
34 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ALB_CALC_SEARCHIN 9b Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'.
2e svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_REGEXP 2b Allows you to use wildcards in your search.
34 svx%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ARB_CALC_ROWS 2c Searches from left to right across the rows.
2f svx%3AMoreButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_MORE 5f Shows more or less search options. Click this button again to hide the extended search options.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ACB_HALFFULLFORMS 40 Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_ALL_SHEETS 43 Searches through all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet file.
31 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_SEARCH 63 Finds and selects the next occurrence of the text or format that you searching for in the document.
35 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_SEARCH_ALL 89 Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents).
f .uno%3AFindText 50 Type the text to search in the current document. Press Enter to search the text.
17 .uno%3ASearchProperties 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
11 .uno%3ADownSearch 3a Click to search the next occurrence in downward direction.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ACB_SOUNDSLIKECJK a2 Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to specify the search options.
36 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_REPLACE_ALL 4f Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace.
41 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_JAP_MATCH_FULL_HALF_WIDTH 40 Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms.
2d SVX%3ALISTBOX%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ALB_SEARCH 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3APB_SOUNDSLIKESETTINGS 43 Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_SELECTIONS 20 Searches only the selected text.
31 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_BACKWARDS 5d Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file.
13 .uno%3ASearchDialog 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_LAYOUTS cf Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Search for list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace with list.
2f svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3AED_REPLACE 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
30 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_COMMENTS 48 In Writer, you can select to include the comment texts in your searches.
37 svx%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ARB_CALC_COLUMNS 30 Searches from top to bottom through the columns.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WHOLE_WORDS 48 Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_REPLACE 66 Replaces the selected text or format that you searched for, and then searches for the next occurrence.
33 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_NOFORMAT 7b Click in the Search for or the Replace with box, and then click this button to remove the search criteria based on formats.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_JAP_SOUNDS_LIKE a2 Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to specify the search options.
28 svx_ComboBox_RID_SVXDLG_SEARCH_ED_SEARCH 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
f .uno%3AUpSearch 38 Click to search the next occurrence in upward direction.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ALB_REPLACE 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_MATCH_CASE 39 Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters.
35 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3APB_JAP_OPTIONS 43 Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ANF_OTHER 48 Enter the number of characters in the search term that can be exchanged.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ANF_SHORTER 53 Enter the number of characters by which a word can be shorter than the search term.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ACB_RELAX 53 Searches for a term that matches any combination of the similarity search settings.
34 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3APB_SIMILARITY 2a Set the options for the similarity search.
1d CUI_HID_SEARCH_APPROXSETTINGS 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
3c cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ANF_LONGER 6e Enter the maximum number of characters by which a word can exceed the number of characters in the search term.
15 CUI_HID_SEARCH_APPROX 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_SIMILARITY 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
1b CUI_HID_SEARCHATTR_CTL_ATTR 32 Select the attributes that you want to search for.
12 CUI_HID_SEARCHATTR 32 Select the attributes that you want to search for.
34 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_ATTRIBUTE 122 Choose the text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found.
31 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_FORMAT 69 Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX18 b8 Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialog is opened.
1c SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_NEW_FILE 27 Creates and inserts a new sub-document.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPDATE 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREEUPD_ALL 15 Updates all contents.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX19 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_TEXT 48 Inserts a new paragraph in the master document where you can enter text.
19 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT_LINK 32 Changes the link properties for the selected file.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_IDX 41 Inserts an index or a table of contents into the master document.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_LINK 12 Updates all links.
13 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_DEL 2e Deletes the selection from the Navigator list.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX20 45 Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX21 a7 Saves a copy of the contents of the linked files in the master document. This ensures that the current contents are available when the linked files cannot be accessed.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_IDX 14 Updates all indexes.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX23 3c Moves the selection down one position in the Navigator list.
1e SW_HID_NAVIGATOR_GLOB_TREELIST b8 The Navigator lists the main components of the master document. If you rest the mouse pointer over a name of a sub-document in the list, the full path of the sub-document is displayed.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX22 3a Moves the selection up one position in the Navigator list.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_FILE 3c Inserts one or more existing files into the master document.
14 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT b8 Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialog is opened.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INSERT 45 Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_SEL 26 Updates the contents of the selection.
36 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_UPDATE_NOW 7a Updates the selected link so that the most recently saved version of the linked file is displayed in the current document.
33 cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3ARB_MANUAL 37 Only updates the link when you click the Update button.
12 .uno%3AManageLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
36 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_BREAK_LINK 99 Breaks the link between the source file and the current document. The most recently updated contents of the source file are kept in the current document.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3ARB_AUTOMATIC d1 Automatically updates the contents of the link when you open the file. Any changes made in the source file are then displayed in the file containing the link. Linked graphic files can only be updated manually.
10 .uno%3AEditLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
11 .uno%3ALinkDialog c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
15 CUI_HID_LINKDLG_TABLB 68 Double-click a link in the list to open a file dialog where you can select another object for this link.
39 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_CHANGE_SOURCE 2d Change the source file for the selected link.
14 .uno%3APlugInsActive 124 Allows you to edit plug-ins in your file. Choose this command to enable or disable this feature. When enabled, a check mark appears beside this command, and you find commands to edit the plug-in in its context menu. When disabled, you find commands to control the plug-in in its context menu.
13 .uno%3AOriginalSize 28 Resizes the object to the original size.
12 .uno%3AObjectMenue 60 Lets you edit a selected object in your file that you inserted with the Insert - Object command.
33 cui%3AEdit%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3AED_FRAMENAME 7b Enter a name for the floating frame. The name cannot contain spaces, special characters, or begin with an underscore ( _ ).
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_FRMBORDER_ON 2a Displays the border of the floating frame.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_FRMBORDER_OFF 27 Hides the border of the floating frame.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ACB_MARGINHEIGHTDEFAULT 1c Applies the default spacing.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGON 2e Displays the scrollbar for the floating frame.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGOFF 2b Hides the scrollbar for the floating frame.
3e cui%3ANumericField%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ANM_MARGINHEIGHT dc Enter the amount of vertical space that you want to leave between the top and bottom edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGAUTO 59 Mark this option if the currently active floating frame can have a scrollbar when needed.
38 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ABT_FILEOPEN 5d Locate the file that you want to display in the selected floating frame, and then click Open.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ANM_MARGINWIDTH e2 Enter the amount of horizontal space that you want to leave between the right and the left edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
2d cui%3AEdit%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3AED_URL a2 Enter the path and the name of the file that you want to display in the floating frame. You can also click the ... button and locate the file that you to display.
2a svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAP%3ACBB_URL 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
15 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_APPLY 33 Applies the changes that you made to the image map.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_PROPERTY 3c Allows you to define the properties of the selected hotspot.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_OPEN 5b Loads an existing image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_CIRCLE b3 Draws an elliptical hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_SELECT 2f Selects a hotspot in the image map for editing.
27 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAP%3AEDT_TEXT 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
1a SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYDELETE 22 Deletes the selected anchor point.
15 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_MACRO 53 Lets you assign a macro that runs when you click the selected hotspot in a browser.
1a SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYINSERT 43 Adds an anchor point where you click on the outline of the hotspot.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_GRAPHWND 0 
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_RECT b3 Draws a rectangular hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_ACTIVE 5e Disables or enables the hyperlink for the selected hotspot. A disabled hotspot is transparent.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYEDIT 4f Lets you change the shape of the selected hotspot by editing the anchor points.
15 .uno%3AImageMapDialog 93 Allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a graphic or a group of graphics. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_SAVEAS 53 Saves the image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYMOVE 43 Lets you move the individual anchor points of the selected hotspot.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLY 1bb Draws a polygonal hotspot in the graphic. Click this icon, drag in the graphic, and then click to define one side of the polygon. Move to where you want to place the end of the next side, and then click. Repeat until you have drawn all of the sides of the polygon. When you are finished, double-click to close the polygon. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_FREEPOLY 122 Draws a hotspot that is based on a freeform polygon. Click this icon and move to where you want to draw the hotspot. Drag a freeform line and release to close the shape. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
29 SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3AEDT_URL 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
34 SVX_MULTILINEEDIT_RID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL_EDT_DESCRIPTION 24 Enter a description for the hotspot.
26 SVX%3AMODALDIALOG%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL 2e Lists the properties for the selected hotspot.
2a SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3AEDT_NAME 1b Enter a name for the image.
31 SVX%3ACOMBOBOX%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3ACBB_TARGETS a0 Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognized by all browsers from the list.
34 SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3AEDT_URLDESCRIPTION 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
12 .uno%3AChangesMenu 48 Lists the commands that are available for tracking changes in your file.
16 .uno%3ATraceChangeMode 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
13 .uno%3ATrackChanges 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
1d .uno%3AProtectTraceChangeMode 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 SC_HID_CHG_PROTECT 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 .uno%3AShowChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
19 .uno%3AShowTrackedChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
14 .uno%3ACommentChange 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
1c .uno%3ACommentChangeTracking 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
16 CUI_HID_REDLINING_EDIT 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
1b .uno%3AAcceptTrackedChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
14 .uno%3AAcceptChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
15 SC_HID_SC_SORT_ACTION 31 Lists the changes that were made in the document.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_ACCEPT 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
13 SW_HID_SORT_COMMENT 4a Sorts the list according to the comments that are attached to the changes.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_ACCEPTALL 4a Accepts all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_REJECTALL 4a Rejects all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
1e SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_DG_VIEW b0 Lists the changes that were recorded in the document. When you select an entry in the list, the change is highlighted in the document. To sort the list, click a column heading.
13 SC_HID_SC_SORT_DATE 31 Lists the date and time that the change was made.
19 .uno%3ARejectTracedChange 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_REJECT 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
10 SW_HID_SORT_DATE 2e Sorts the list according to the date and time.
15 SC_HID_SC_SORT_AUTHOR 23 Lists the user who made the change.
1e SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_UNDO 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
13 SW_HID_EDIT_COMMENT 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
19 .uno%3AAcceptTracedChange 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
1b SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PAGE 24 Accept or reject individual changes.
16 SC_HID_SC_SORT_COMMENT 33 Lists the comments that are attached to the change.
12 SW_HID_SORT_AUTHOR 27 Sorts the list according to the Author.
12 SW_HID_SORT_ACTION 2f Sorts the list according to the type of change.
14 SC_HID_SORT_POSITION 82 Sorts the list in a descending order according to the position of the changes in the document. This is the default sorting method.
19 SC_HID_SC_CHANGES_COMMENT 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_DF_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_LB_AUTOR 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_AUTOR 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
3a sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_HIGHLIGHT_CHANGES%3ARB_ASSIGN 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_TF_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
22 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_LB_ACTION 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_LB_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_IB_CLOCK 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
22 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_ACTION 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_BTN_REF 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
22 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_IB_CLOCK2 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_COMMENT 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_DF_DATE2 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_ED_COMMENT 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_ED_RANGE 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_RANGE 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_TF_DATE2 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SIMPLEREF%3ARB_ASSIGN 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
15 .uno%3AMergeDocuments 92 Imports changes made to copies of the same document into the original document. Changes made to footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored.
17 .uno%3ACompareDocuments 3e Compares the current document with a document that you select.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_IDENTIFIER_POS 5e Enter a name for the record. The name appears in the Identifier column in the list of records.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FremoveFilter 1c Deletes the selected record.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_YEAR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
13 .uno%3ABib%2Fsource 73 Lists the available tables in the current database. Click a name in the list to display the records for that table.
15 SVX_HID_FM_DELETEROWS 1c Deletes the selected record.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_URL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_TITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NUMBER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SCHOOL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_CHAPTER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
16 .uno%3ABib%2Fsdbsource 35 Select the data source for the bibliography database.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_VOLUME_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_REPORTTYPE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
14 .uno%3ABib%2FMapping bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FInsertRecord 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PUBLISHER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_BOOKTITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PAGES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MAPPINGDLG bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_JOURNAL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHORITYTYPE_POS a5 Select the type of record that you want to create. $[officename] inserts a number in the Type column of the record that corresponds to the type that you select here.
1c .uno%3ABibliographyComponent 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_INSTITUTION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MONTH_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SERIES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FDeleteRecord 1b Deletes the current record.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_HOWPUBLISHED_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
1b .uno%3ABib%2FstandardFilter 1c Deletes the selected record.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ORGANIZATIONS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
17 .uno%3ABib%2FautoFilter 96 Long-click to select the data field that you want to search using the term that you entered in the Search Key box. You can only search one data field.
12 .uno%3ABib%2Fquery 17e Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this box, and then press Enter.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ANNOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ADDRESS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_DB_TBX 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ISBN_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fvariable 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
18 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_OPTIMAL 45 Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document at .
1c cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Ffitw 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fautomatic 59 The automatic view layout displays pages side by side, as many as the zoom factor allows.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fzoomsb 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
b .uno%3AZoom 37 Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Foptimal 45 Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document at .
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fbookmode 83 In book mode view layout you see two pages side by side as in an open book. The first page is a right page with an odd page number.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2FZoomDialog 37 Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME.
14 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Ffitwandh 28 Displays the entire page on your screen.
1b SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_WHOLE_PAGE 28 Displays the entire page on your screen.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fsinglepage 56 The single page view layout displays pages beneath each other, but never side by side.
1b SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_PAGE_WIDTH 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2F100pc 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fcolumns 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fcolumnssb 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
e .uno%3AView100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
19 .uno%3AFunctionBarVisible 20 Shows or hides the Standard Bar.
1a .uno%3AShowImeStatusWindow 3b Shows or hides the Input Method Engine (IME) status window.
15 .uno%3AToolBarVisible 1d Shows or hides the Tools bar.
17 .uno%3AStatusBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
15 .uno%3ATaskBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
1a SFX2_HID_FULLSCREENTOOLBOX 76 In Writer and Calc, you can also use the shortcut keys Ctrl+Shift+J to switch between the normal and full screen mode.
11 .uno%3AFullScreen 7b Shows or hides the menus and toolbars in Writer or Calc. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen On/Off button.
13 .uno%3AColorControl 8b Show or hides the Color Bar. To modify or change the color table that is displayed, choose Format - Area, and then click on the Colors tab.
18 SVX_HID_COLOR_CTL_COLORS 145 Click the color that you want to use. To change the fill color of an object in the current file, select the object and then click a color. To change the line color of the selected object, right-click a color. To change the color of text in a text object, double-click the text-object, select the text, and then click a color.
18 .uno%3AAvailableToolbars 2a Opens a submenu to show and hide toolbars.
18 .cmd%3ARestoreVisibility aa Choose View - Toolbars - Reset to reset the toolbars to their default context sensitive behavior. Now some toolbars will be shown automatically, dependent on the context.
15 .uno%3ADeleteAllNotes 2c Delete all comments in the current document.
17 .uno%3AInsertAnnotation 7f Inserts a note at the current cursor position. To view or edit the contents of a note, select the note and choose this command.
17 .uno%3ADeleteAnnotation 1b Delete the current comment.
16 .uno%3AShowAnnotations 49 Use View - Comments to show or hide all comments (not available in Calc).
22 .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotationByAuthor 3b Delete all comments by this author in the current document.
13 .uno%3ADeleteAuthor 3b Delete all comments by this author in the current document.
11 .uno%3ADeleteNote 1b Delete the current comment.
1a .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotation 2c Delete all comments in the current document.
b .uno%3AScan 2b Inserts a scanned image into your document.
12 .uno%3ATwainSelect 29 Selects the scanner that you want to use.
14 .uno%3ATwainTransfer 82 Scans an image, and then inserts the result into the document. The scanning dialog is provided by the manufacturer of the scanner.
d .uno%3ABullet 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2FSpecialCharactersDialog 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
1b CUI_HID_CHARMAP_CTL_SHOWSET 4a Click the special character(s) that you want to insert, and then click OK.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Fdelete 4b Clears the current selection of special characters that you want to insert.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Ffontlb 4c Select a font to display the special characters that are associated with it.
13 .uno%3AInsertSymbol 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Fsubsetlb 2f Select a Unicode category for the current font.
1a SVT_HID_FILEDLG_PREVIEW_CB 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
1f SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_IMAGE_TEMPLATE 27 Select the frame style for the graphic.
15 HID_IMPGRF_CB_PREVIEW 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
17 SVT_HID_FILEDLG_LINK_CB 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
1d SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_URL_TXT 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
14 .uno%3AInsertGraphic 2c Inserts a picture into the current document.
11 .uno%3AObjectMenu 62 Inserts an object into your document. For movies and sounds, use Insert - Movie and Sound instead.
32 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2FInsertOLEObjectDialog 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
13 .uno%3AInsertObject 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
13 .uno%3AInsertPlugin 2c Inserts a plug-in into the current document.
2c cui%2Fui%2Finsertplugin%2FInsertPluginDialog 2c Inserts a plug-in into the current document.
12 .uno%3AInsertSound 2f Inserts a sound file into the current document.
12 .uno%3AInsertVideo 2f Inserts a video file into the current document.
1b .uno%3AInsertObjectStarMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
11 .uno%3AInsertMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
20 .uno%3AInsertObjectFloatingFrame 87 Inserts a floating frame into the current document. Floating frames are used in HTML documents to display the contents of another file.
11 .uno%3ADataImport 6a Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases.
1c .uno%3AViewDataSourceBrowser 6a Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases.
12 .uno%3AGraphicMenu 38 Select the source for a picture that you want to insert.
11 .uno%3ASetDefault 2d Removes direct formatting from the selection.
16 .uno%3AResetAttributes 2d Removes direct formatting from the selection.
1d .uno%3AStandardTextAttributes 2d Removes direct formatting from the selection.
11 .uno%3AFontDialog 45 Changes the font and the font formatting for the selected characters.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2FCharNamePage 3b Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlsizelb-nocjk 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlstylelb 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestfontnamelb-nocjk 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlfontnamelb 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fweststylelb-nocjk 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlsizelb 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestsizelb-nocjk 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Feaststylelb 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestsizelb-cjk 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Feastsizelb 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestfontnamelb-cjk 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fweststylelb-cjk 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Feastfontnamelb 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
22 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foutlinecb 5b Displays the outline of the selected characters. This effect does not work with every font.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Frelieflb e1 Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
c .uno%3AColor cf Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Ffontcolorlb 96 Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2FEffectsPage 2e Specify the font effects that you want to use.
f .uno%3AOverline 81 Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined.
29 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Funderlinecolorlb 25 Select the color for the underlining.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fpositionlb 2c Specify where to display the emphasis marks.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foverlinelb 7b Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fshadowcb 4b Adds a shadow that casts below and to the right of the selected characters.
22 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Feffectslb e1 Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
10 .uno%3AFontColor cf Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar.
28 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foverlinecolorlb 24 Select the color for the overlining.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Funderlinelb 7d Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Femphasislb 53 Select a character to display over or below the entire length of the selected text.
2a cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Findividualwordscb 3d Applies the selected effect only to words and ignores spaces.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fstrikeoutlb 33 Select a strikethrough style for the selected text.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ALB_LANGUAGE 100 Specifies the language setting for the selected fields. With the language set to Automatic, $[officename] automatically applies the number formats associated with the system default language. Select any language to fix the settings for the selected fields.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_LEADZEROES 4c Enter the maximum number of zeroes to display in front of the decimal point.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_FORMAT 5c Displays the number format code for the selected format. You can also enter a custom format.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ABTN_NEGRED 32 Changes the font color of negative numbers to red.
1d CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_TBI_INFO 2d Adds a comment to the selected number format.
1e CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_LB_FORMAT 49 Select how you want the contents of the selected cell(s) to be displayed.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ALB_CATEGORY 56 Select a category from the list, and then select a formatting style in the Format box.
1c CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_TBI_ADD 4a Adds the number format code that you entered to the user-defined category.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ABTN_THOUSAND 6c Inserts a separator between thousands. The type of separator that is used depends on your language settings.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_COMMENT 50 Enter a comment for the selected number format, and then click outside this box.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_DECIMALS 3c Enter the number of decimal places that you want to display.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ACB_SOURCEFORMAT 4b Uses the same number format as the cells containing the data for the chart.
1f CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_TBI_REMOVE 23 Deletes the selected number format.
1e .uno%3ATableNumberFormatDialog 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
14 CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ALB_CURRENCY 71 Select a currency, and then scroll to the top of the Format list to view the formatting options for the currency.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Furlpb 3e Locate the file that you want to link to, and then click Open.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Funvisitedlb c1 Select a formatting style to use for unvisited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Ftargetfrmlb 71 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Fnameed 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Furled 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Ftexted 3a Enter the text that you want to display for the hyperlink.
19 .uno%3AInsertHyperlinkDlg 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Fvisitedlb bf Select a formatting style to use for visited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2FCharURLPage 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Feventpb 3c Specify an event that triggers when you click the hyperlink.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fpairkerning 4c Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Ffontsizesb 50 Enter the amount by which you want to reduce the font size of the selected text.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fsubscript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
10 .uno%3ASubScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
12 .uno%3ASuperScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fnormal 2c Removes superscript or subscript formatting.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fkerninged 65 Enter the amount by which you want to expand or condense the character spacing for the selected text.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fautomatic 6a Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fsuperscript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2FPositionPage 44 Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fraiselowersb 9e Enter the amount by which you want to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to the baseline. One hundred percent is equal to the height of the font.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fkerninglb b2 Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text. For expanded or condensed spacing, enter the amount that you want to expand or condense the text in the by box.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fscalewidthsb 66 Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2FTwoLinesPage 7f Sets the options for double-line writing for Asian languages. Select the characters in your text, and then choose this command.
24 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Fendbracket 83 Select the character to define the end of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
22 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Ftwolines 5a Allows you to write in double lines in the area that you selected in the current document.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Fstartbracket 85 Select the character to define the start of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PARA_ASIAN%3ACB_AS_HANG_PUNC 88 Prevents commas and periods from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PARA_ASIAN%3ACB_AS_FORBIDDEN ef Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line. To edit the list of restricted characters, choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PARA_ASIAN%3ACB_AS_SCRIPT_SPACE 3c Inserts a space between Asian, Latin and complex characters.
10 .uno%3AEditStyle 4c Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment.
16 .uno%3AParagraphDialog 4c Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment.
34 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3ACB_AUTO 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s).
41 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_LINEDISTMETRIC 2c Enter the value to use for the line spacing.
1c CUI_HID_FORMAT_PARAGRAPH_STD 3d Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_LINEDIST 4a Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_TOPDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s).
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_RIGHTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_LEFTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin.
42 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_LINEDISTPERCENT 2c Enter the value to use for the line spacing.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3ACB_CONTEXTUALSPACING 94 Makes any space specified before or after this paragraph not be applied when the preceding and following paragraphs are of the same paragraph style.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_FLINEINDENT 110 Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, click the Position tab, and then enter an amount in the Minimum space numbering <=> text box.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_BOTTOMDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave below the selected paragraph(s).
33 cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3AED_TABPOS fa Select a tab stop type, enter a new measurement, and then click New. If you want, you can also specify the measurement units to use for the tab (cm for centimeter, or " for inches). Existing tabs to the left of the first tab that you set are removed.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3AED_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_DELALL 81 Removes all of the tab stops that you defined under Position. Sets Left tab stops at regular intervalls as the default tab stops.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_RIGHT 63 Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_NEW 3c Adds the tab stop that you defined to the current paragraph.
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_DASHLINE 3e Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dashes.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_LEFT 53 Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_DECIMAL 63 Aligns the decimal point of a number to the center of the tab stop and text to the left of the tab.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3AED_TABTYPE_DECCHAR 4e Enter a character that you want the decimal tab to use as a decimal separator.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_CENTER 2e Aligns the center of the text to the tab stop.
11 CUI_HID_TABULATOR 2e Set the position of a tab stop in a paragraph.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_NO 5c Inserts no fill characters, or removes existing fill characters to the left of the tab stop.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_POINTS 3c Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dots.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_UNDERSCORE 41 Draws a line to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ALB_LINECOLOR 46 Select the line color that you want to use for the selected border(s).
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_BOTTOM 65 Enter the distance that you want to have between the bottom border and the contents of the selection.
1a CUI_HID_BORDER_CTL_PRESETS 2a Select a predefined border style to apply.
2d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ACB_SYNC 5f Applies the same spacing to contents setting to all four borders when you enter a new distance.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AED_SHADOWSIZE 1e Enter the width of the shadow.
30 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_LEFT 63 Enter the distance that you want to have between the left border and the contents of the selection.
1a CUI_HID_BORDER_CTL_SHADOWS 2e Click a shadow style for the selected borders.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_RIGHT 64 Enter the distance that you want to have between the right border and the contents of the selection.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ALB_SHADOWCOLOR 1e Select a color for the shadow.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ALB_LINESTYLE 6c Click the border style that you want to apply. The border is applied to the borders selected in the preview.
2f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_TOP 62 Enter the distance that you want to have between the top border and the contents of the selection.
e CUI_HID_BORDER 43 Sets the border options for the selected objects in Writer or Calc.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ALB_SELECTOR 35 Select the type of background that you want to apply.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ALB_PARA_BOX 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
22 CUI_HID_BACKGROUND_CTL_BGDCOLORSET 62 Click the color that you want to use as a background. To remove a background color, click No Fill.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_POSITION 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_PREVIEW 34 Displays or hides a preview of the selected graphic.
18 SVX_HID_POPUP_COLOR_CTRL 62 Click the color that you want to use as a background. To remove a background color, click No Fill.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ALB_TBL_BOX 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
1f CUI_HID_BACKGROUND_CTL_POSITION 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
12 CUI_HID_BACKGROUND 24 Set the background color or graphic.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_LINK 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_BROWSE 52 Locate the graphic file that you want to use as a background, and then click Open.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3AMF_COL_TRANS 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_AREA 4b Stretches the graphic to fill the entire background of the selected object.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_TILE 53 Repeats the graphic so that it covers the entire background of the selected object.
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_CENTERALIGN 32 Centers the contents of the paragraph on the page.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_LEFTALIGN 2d Aligns the paragraph to the left page margin.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ALB_TEXTDIRECTION 4f Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL).
1e CUI_HID_FORMAT_PARAGRAPH_ALIGN 44 Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page.
42 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_JUSTIFYALIGN 3f Aligns the paragraph to the left and to the right page margins.
33 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ALB_TEXTORIENTATION 4f Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL).
3e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_TEXTDIRECTION 4f Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL).
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_RIGHTALIGN 2e Aligns the paragraph to the right page margin.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ACB_EXPAND 4f Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL).
39 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_LASTLINE 4f Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL).
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3APB_ORGSIZE 32 Returns the selected graphic to its original size.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_HEIGHT 28 Enter a height for the selected graphic.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_HEIGHTZOOM 39 Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_LEFT 161 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_WIDTH 27 Enter a width for the selected graphic.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3ARB_ZOOMCONST 68 Maintains the original scale of the graphic when you crop, so that only the size of the graphic changes.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3ARB_SIZECONST 123 Maintains the original size of the graphic when you crop, so that only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_WIDTHZOOM 39 Enter the width for the selected graphic as a percentage.
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_RIGHT 163 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the right of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_BOTTOM 151 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
30 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_TOP 14e If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ALB_NEXT 102 Select an existing style that you want to follow the current style in your document. For paragraph styles, the next style is applied to the paragraph that is created when you press Enter. For page styles, the next style is applied when a new page is created.
31 sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3AED_DESC 3c Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style.
16 SFX2_HID_MANAGE_STYLES 27 Set the options for the selected style.
28 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3AED_NAME a7 Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ALB_BASE 69 Select an existing style that you want to base the new style on, or select none to define your own style.
2c sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ACB_AUTO b0 Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated.
2d sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ALB_REGION 7f Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_PAPER_HEIGHT 61 Displays the height of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a height here.
2c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_ADAPT 86 Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_TEXT_FLOW 40 Select the text direction that you want to use in your document.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_BOTTOM_MARGIN 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_PAPER_TRAY ea Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_LEFT_MARGIN e7 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page.
13 CUI_HID_FORMAT_PAGE 73 Allows you to define page layouts for single and multiple-page documents, as well as a numbering and paper formats.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_PAPER_SIZE 81 Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Width boxes.
33 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ARB_LANDSCAPE 4e Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented horizontally.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_HORZ 33 Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page.
2f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_REGISTER 43 Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_REGISTER dd Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_VERT 31 Centers the cells vertically on the printed page.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_TOP_MARGIN 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the upper edge of the page and the document text.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_RIGHT_MARGIN e8 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page.
32 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ARB_PORTRAIT 4c Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented vertically.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_NUMBER_FORMAT 51 Select the page numbering format that you want to use for the current page style.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_LAYOUT 80 Specify whether to apply the formatting to odd pages, even pages, or to both odd and even pages that use the current page style.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_PAPER_WIDTH 5f Displays the width of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a width here.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_SHARED 65 Adds the header to both even and odd pages. This option is only available for the Default page style.
35 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_SHARED_FIRST 30 First and even/odd pages share the same content.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_RMARGIN 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the header.
15 SC_HID_SC_HEADER_EDIT 18 Add or edit header text.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_HEIGHT_DYN 51 Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter.
15 SVX_HID_FORMAT_HEADER 78 Adds a header to the current page style. A header is an area in the top page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_HEIGHT 2e Enter the height that you want for the header.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_TURNON 28 Adds a header to the current page style.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_LMARGIN 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the header.
30 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_DIST 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_DYNSPACING 76 Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ABTN_EXTRAS 4d Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the header.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_SHARED 7a Adds the footer to both even and odd pages. This option is only available if the current page uses the Default page style.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_TURNON 28 Adds a footer to the current page style.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_RMARGIN 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer.
30 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_DIST 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_HEIGHT_DYN 4c Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_HEIGHT 29 Enter the height you want for the footer.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_DYNSPACING 71 Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_LMARGIN 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer.
15 SC_HID_SC_FOOTER_EDIT 18 Add or edit footer text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ABTN_EXTRAS 4d Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the footer.
15 SVX_HID_FORMAT_FOOTER 7b Adds a footer to the current page style. A footer is an area in the bottom page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
35 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_SHARED_FIRST 30 First and even/odd pages share the same content.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToFullWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to full width characters.
1d .uno%3AChangeCaseToToggleCase 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
1a SID_TRANSLITERATE_SENTENCE 56 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
1c SID_TRANSLITERATE_CAPITALIZE 67 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToUpper 3a Changes the selected western characters to capital letters
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToTitleCase 67 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToHalfWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to half-width characters.
18 .uno%3ATransliterateMenu 82 Changes the case of the selected characters, or if the cursor is in a word, changes the case of all of the characters in the word.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToLower 3d Changes the selected western characters to lowercase letters.
1f .uno%3AChangeCaseToSentenceCase 56 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
18 SID_TRANSLITERATE_TOGGLE 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToKatakana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Katakana characters.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToHiragana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Hiragana characters.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_3 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2d svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3ALB_POSITION 2d Select where you want to place the ruby text.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_4 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_2 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
2f svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3APB_STYLIST 60 Opens the Styles and Formatting window where you can select a character style for the ruby text.
2f svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3ALB_CHAR_STYLE 2b Select a character style for the ruby text.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_1 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_1 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
11 .uno%3ARubyDialog 54 Allows you to add comments above Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_3 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_4 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_2 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2b svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3ALB_ADJUST 32 Select the horizontal alignment for the Ruby text.
10 .uno%3AAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
16 .uno%3AObjectAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
1c .uno%3AAlignHorizontalCenter a7 Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignCenter a7 Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
11 .uno%3AAlignRight 91 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
17 .uno%3AObjectAlignRight 91 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
e .uno%3AAlignUp ad Horizontally aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
f .uno%3AAlignTop ad Horizontally aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
12 .uno%3AAlignMiddle a3 Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
1a .uno%3AAlignVerticalCenter a3 Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignBottom b3 Horizontally aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
10 .uno%3AAlignDown b3 Horizontally aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
f .uno%3ALeftPara 39 Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left page margin.
10 .uno%3ARightPara 3a Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the right page margin.
11 .uno%3ACenterPara 2e Centers the selected paragraph(s) on the page.
12 .uno%3AJustifyPara cd Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left and the right page margins. If you want, you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph - Alignment.
11 .uno%3AMergeCells 45 Combines the contents of the selected table cells into a single cell.
10 .uno%3ASplitCell 65 Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally or vertically into the number of cells that you enter.
12 .uno%3ACellVertTop 3c Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell.
15 .uno%3ACellVertCenter 44 Centers the contents of the cell between top and bottom of the cell.
15 .uno%3ACellVertBottom 3f Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell.
b .uno%3ABold 9c Makes the selected text bold. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made bold. If the selection or word is already bold, the formatting is removed.
d .uno%3AItalic a2 Makes the selected text italic. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made italic. If the selection or word is already italic, the formatting is removed.
16 .uno%3AUnderlineDouble 2c Underlines the selected text with two lines.
10 .uno%3AUnderline 39 Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text.
10 .uno%3AStrikeout 57 Draws a line through the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, the entire word.
f .uno%3AShadowed 56 Adds a shadow to the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, to the entire word.
15 .uno%3ADistributeRows 60 Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara1 52 Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting.
12 .uno%3ASpacePara15 45 Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara2 3c Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines.
18 .uno%3ADistributeColumns 63 Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in the selection.
18 .uno%3AStyleNewByExample 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
33 sfx2%3AComboBox%3ADLG_NEW_STYLE_BY_EXAMPLE%3ALB_COL 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fstringinput%2Fedit 37 Enter a name for the new AutoFormat, and then click OK.
13 .uno%3ARenameObject 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_OBJECT_NAME%3ANTD_EDT_NAME 25 Enter a name for the selected object.
1e SW_HID_FORMAT_NAME_OBJECT_NAME 25 Enter a name for the selected object.
1b SD_HID_SD_NAMEDIALOG_OBJECT 25 Enter a name for the selected object.
10 .uno%3ANameGroup 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
39 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_OBJECT_TITLE_DESC%3ANTD_EDT_TITLE 7c Enter a title text. This short name is visible as an alternative tag in HTML format. Accessibility tools can read this text.
1d .uno%3AObjectTitleDescription 9c Assigns a title and a description to the selected object. These are accessible for accessibility tools and as alternative tags when you export the document.
41 cui%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_OBJECT_TITLE_DESC%3ANTD_EDT_DESC e3 Enter a description text. The long description text can be entered to describe a complex object or group of objects to users with screen reader software. The description is visible as an alternative tag for accessibility tools.
11 .uno%3AFormatLine 32 Sets the formatting options for the selected line.
11 .uno%3AXLineColor 1c Select a color for the line.
11 .uno%3AXLineStyle 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_EDGE_STYLE 91 Select the shape to be used at the corners of the line. In case of a small angle between lines, a mitered shape is replaced with a beveled shape.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ACB_SYMBOL_RATIO 53 Maintains the proportions of the symbol when you enter a new height or width value.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_END_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_START_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
11 CUI_HID_LINE_LINE 93 Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw. You can also add arrowheads to a line, or change chart symbols.
2b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_COLOR 1c Select a color for the line.
36 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMB_SYMBOL_BITMAP 3b Select the symbol style that you want to use in your chart.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_CAP_STYLE 52 Select the style of the line end caps. The caps are added to inner dashes as well.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMF_SYMBOL_WIDTH 1d Enter a width for the symbol.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_LINE_TRANSPARENT 71 Enter the transparency of the line, where 100% corresponds to completely transparent and 0% to completely opaque.
37 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ATSB_CENTER_START 4e Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ACBX_SYNCHRONIZE 8a Automatically updates both arrowhead settings when you enter a different width, select a different arrowhead style,or center an arrowhead.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMF_SYMBOL_HEIGHT 1e Enter a height for the symbol.
35 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ATSB_CENTER_END 4e Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_FLD_LINE_WIDTH 1e Select the width for the line.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_LINE_STYLE 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
10 .uno%3ALineWidth 1e Select the width for the line.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_FLD_START_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_FLD_END_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3AMTR_FLD_LENGTH_2 1d Enter the length of the dash.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_MODIFY 8a Updates the selected line style using the current settings. To change the name of the selected line style, enter a new name when prompted.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAME%3AEDT_STRING 24 Enter a name for the new line style.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3AMTR_FLD_LENGTH_1 1d Enter the length of the dash.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ALB_LINESTYLES 31 Select the style of line that you want to create.
35 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ANUM_FLD_2 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_ADD 34 Creates a new line style using the current settings.
35 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ANUM_FLD_1 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
10 CUI_HID_LINE_DEF 2c Edit or create dashed or dotted line styles.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_SAVE 4b Saves the current list of line styles, so that you can load it again later.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between dots or dashes.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ACBX_SYNCHRONIZE 45 Automatically adjusts the entries relative to the length of the line.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ALB_TYPE_1 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_LOAD 1e Imports a list of line styles.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ALB_TYPE_2 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
36 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_SAVE 46 Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3AEDT_NAME 2e Displays the name of the selected arrow style.
13 CUI_HID_LINE_ENDDEF 1c Edit or create arrow styles.
36 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_LOAD 1f Imports a list of arrow styles.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_ADD 5d To define a custom arrow style, select a drawing object in the document, and then click here.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_MODIFY 2d Changes the name of the selected arrow style.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ALB_LINEENDS 39 Choose a predefined arrow style symbol from the list box.
11 .uno%3AFormatArea 38 Sets the fill properties of the selected drawing object.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_GRADIENT 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_HATCHBCKGRDCOLOR 57 Click the color that you want to use as a background for the selected hatching pattern.
2b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_COLOR 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
2e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ARBT_ROW 63 Horizontally offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter.
34 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_STEPCOUNT 5d Automatically determines the number of steps for blending the two end colors of the gradient.
11 CUI_HID_AREA_AREA 35 Set the fill options for the selected drawing object.
2f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_TILE 2d Tiles the bitmap to fill the selected object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_Y_SIZE 1e Enter a height for the bitmap.
10 .uno%3AFillStyle 4e Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_OFFSET 33 Enter the percentage to offset the rows or columns.
33 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_ORIGINAL 8d Retains the original size of the bitmap when filling the selected object. To resize the bitmap, clear this checkbox, and then click Relative.
30 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_SCALE fd Rescales the bitmap relative to the size of the selected object by the percentage values that you enter in the Width and Height boxes . Clear this checkbox to resize the selected object with the measurements that you enter in the Width and Height boxes.
31 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ARBT_COLUMN 61 Vertically offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter.
32 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_STRETCH 5a Stretches the bitmap to fill the selected object. To use this feature, clear the Tile box.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_HATCHING 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
39 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ANUM_FLD_STEPCOUNT 4a Enter the number of steps for blending the two end colors of the gradient.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_X_OFFSET 32 Enter the horizontal offset for tiling the bitmap.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_X_SIZE 1d Enter a width for the bitmap.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ACB_HATCHBCKGRD 6d Applies a background color to the hatching pattern. Select this checkbox, and then click a color in the list.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_Y_OFFSET 30 Enter the vertical offset for tiling the bitmap.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_BITMAP 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
15 CUI_HID_AREA_GRADIENT 42 Set the properties of a gradient, or save and load gradient lists.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_COLOR_FROM 72 Enter the intensity for the color in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_LOAD 23 Load a different list of gradients.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_ANGLE 31 Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_ADD 6f Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_COLOR_FROM 37 Select a color for the beginning point of the gradient.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_GRADIENT_TYPES 5c Lists the available gradients. Click the gradient that you want to apply, and then click OK.
32 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_COLOR_TO 30 Select a color for the endpoint of the gradient.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_SAVE 43 Saves the current list of gradients, so that you can load it later.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_CENTER_X cc Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_CENTER_Y c8 Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_COLOR_TO 70 Enter the intensity for the color in the To box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_BORDER 9c Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_GRADIENTS 3d Select the type of gradient that you want to apply or create.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_MODIFY 80 Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ALB_LINE_TYPE 34 Select the type of hatch lines that you want to use.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_ADD 80 Adds a custom hatching pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your hatching pattern, and then click this button.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 54 Enter the rotation angle for the hatch lines, or click a position in the angle grid.
12 CUI_HID_AREA_HATCH 4a Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save and load hatching lists.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ALB_HATCHINGS 6c Lists the available hatching patterns. Click the hatching pattern that you want to apply, and then click OK.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_SAVE 4b Saves the current list of hatching patterns, so that you can load it later.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_LOAD 2c Loads a different list of hatching patterns.
14 CUI_HID_TPHATCH_CTRL 4e Click a position in the grid to define the rotation angle for the hatch lines.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_MODIFY 87 Applies the current hatching properties to the selected hatching pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to have between the hatch lines.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ALB_LINE_COLOR 24 Select the color of the hatch lines.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_MODIFY 97 Replaces a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor with the current bitmap pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
31 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_LOAD 22 Loads a different list of bitmaps.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ALB_BACKGROUND_COLOR 32 Select a background color for your bitmap pattern.
31 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_SAVE 41 Saves the current list of bitmaps, so that you can load it later.
2d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ALB_COLOR 54 Select a foreground color, and then click in the grid to add a pixel to the pattern.
13 CUI_HID_AREA_BITMAP 95 Select a bitmap that you want to use as a fill pattern, or create your own pixel pattern. You can also import bitmaps, and save or load bitmap lists.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_IMPORT 80 Locate the bitmap that you want to import, and then click Open. The bitmap is added to the end of the list of available bitmaps.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ALB_BITMAPS 5b Select a bitmap in the list, and then click OK to apply the pattern to the selected object.
2f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_ADD 49 Adds a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor to the current list.
15 CUI_HID_TPSHADOW_CTRL 28 Click where you want to cast the shadow.
11 .uno%3AFillShadow c9 Adds a shadow to the selected object. If the object already has a shadow, the shadow is removed. If you click this icon when no object is selected, the shadow is added to the next object that you draw.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ALB_SHADOW_COLOR 1e Select a color for the shadow.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 52 Enter the distance that you want the shadow to be offset from the selected object.
3f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_SHADOW_TRANSPARENT 64 Enter a percentage from 0% (opaque) to 100% (transparent) to specify the transparency of the shadow.
38 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ATSB_SHOW_SHADOW 2d Adds a shadow to the selected drawing object.
13 CUI_HID_AREA_SHADOW 55 Add a shadow to the selected drawing object, and define the properties of the shadow.
40 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_CENTER_X 2d Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient.
41 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_END_VALUE 74 Enter a transparency value for the endpoint of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_ANGLE 28 Enter a rotation angle for the gradient.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ARBT_TRANS_LINEAR 8c Turns on color transparency. Select this option, and then enter a number in the box, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ARBT_TRANS_OFF 1d Turns off color transparency.
43 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_START_VALUE 7b Enter a transparency value for the beginning point of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ALB_TRGR_GRADIENT_TYPES 40 Select the type of transparency gradient that you want to apply.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRANSPARENT 6e Adjusts the transparency of the current fill color. Enter a number between 0% (opaque) and 100% (transparent).
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ARBT_TRANS_GRADIENT 74 Applies a transparency gradient to the current fill color. Select this option, and then set the gradient properties.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_BORDER 6b Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the transparent area of the gradient. The default value is 0%.
40 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_CENTER_Y 2b Enter the vertical offset for the gradient.
15 .uno%3ATextAttributes 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
15 CUI_HID_PAGE_TEXTATTR 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
3e cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 63 Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_TOP 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text.
1d CUI_HID_TEXTATTR_CTL_POSITION 36 Click where you want to place the anchor for the text.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_BOTTOM 7a Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_FIT_TO_SIZE 46 Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_WORDWRAP_TEXT 59 Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_RIGHT 79 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_SIZE 56 Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_LEFT 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text.
3d cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 61 Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
36 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_CONTOUR 52 Adapts the text flow so that it match the contours of the selected drawing object.
39 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_FULL_WIDTH 48 Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing object or text object.
16 .uno%3ATransformDialog 37 Resizes, moves, rotates, or slants the selected object.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ALB_ANCHOR 0 
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_X 6f Enter the horizontal distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
42 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 61 Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_WIDTH 26 Enter a width for the selected object.
13 CUI_HID_TPSIZE_CTRL 7d Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for the selected object in the Width and Height boxes.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ACBX_SCALE 3a Maintains proportions when you resize the selected object.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ALB_ORIENT 0 
3e cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_POSPROTECT 44 Prevents changes to the position or the size of the selected object.
17 CUI_HID_TPPOSITION_CTRL f2 Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the amount that you want to shift the object relative to the base point that you selected in the Position Y and Position X boxes. The base points correspond to the selection handles on an object.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_HEIGHT 27 Enter a height for the selected object.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_SIZEPROTECT 26 Prevents you from resizing the object.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_Y 6d Enter the vertical distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
43 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 63 Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ANGLE%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 48 Enter the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object.
18 CUI_HID_TPROTATION_CTRL2 3f Click to specify the rotation angle in multiples of 45 degrees.
18 CUI_HID_TPROTATION_CTRL1 2e Click where you want to place the pivot point.
13 CUI_HID_TRANS_ANGLE 1c Rotates the selected object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ANGLE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_Y 4d Enter the vertical distance from the top edge of the page to the pivot point.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ANGLE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_X 50 Enter the horizontal distance from the left edge of the page to the pivot point.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SLANT%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 22 Enter the angle of the slant axis.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SLANT%3AMTR_FLD_RADIUS 49 Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners.
13 CUI_HID_TRANS_SLANT 4a Slants the selected object, or rounds the corners of a rectangular object.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ACB_LAENGE 3d Click here to display a single-angled line in an optimal way.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_ANSATZ 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_WINKEL 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_ANSATZ 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_ANSATZ_REL 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_LAENGE 73 Enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to the inflection point of the line.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_ABSTAND 6a Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the end of the callout line, and the callout box.
18 CUI_HID_CAPTION_CTL_TYPE 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
f .uno%3AFlipMenu 36 Flips the selected object horizontally, or vertically.
1b .uno%3AObjectMirrorVertical 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
11 .uno%3AMirrorVert 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
1d .uno%3AObjectMirrorHorizontal 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
11 .uno%3AMirrorHorz 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
15 .uno%3AObjectPosition 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
12 .uno%3AArrangeMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
17 .uno%3AArrangeFrameMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
13 .uno%3ABringToFront 64 Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order, so that it is in front of other objects.
e .uno%3AForward 5a Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order.
17 .uno%3AObjectForwardOne 5a Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order.
f .uno%3ABackward 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
14 .uno%3AObjectBackOne 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
11 .uno%3ASendToBack 66 Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order, so that it is behind the other objects.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToForeground 2b Moves the selected object in front of text.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToBackground 26 Moves the selected object behind text.
11 .uno%3AAnchorMenu 33 Sets the anchoring options for the selected object.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPage 2e Anchors the selected item to the current page.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPara 33 Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToCell 24 Anchors the selected item to a cell.
17 .uno%3ASetAnchorToFrame 33 Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorAsChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectBezierMode 39 Lets you change the shape of the selected drawing object.
1f SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_OFF 38 Removes the shadow effects that you applied to the text.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_ROTATE 4c Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline.
24 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_AUTOSIZE 38 Resizes the text to fit the length of the text baseline.
20 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_LEFT 35 Aligns the text to the left end of the text baseline.
f .uno%3AFontWork 66 Edits Fontwork effects of the selected object that has been created with the previous Fontwork dialog.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_SHADOW_X 55 Enter the horizontal distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_SLANTX 36 Horizontally slants the characters in the text object.
36 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3ACLB_SHADOW_COLOR 23 Select a color for the text shadow.
1c SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_OUTLINE 44 Shows or hides the borders of the individual characters in the text.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_CENTER 26 Centers the text on the text baseline.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 75 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the text baseline and the base of the individual characters.
3b svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_TEXTSTART 6d Enter the amount of space to leave between the beginning of the text baseline, and the beginning of the text.
1e SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_OFF 1c Removes baseline formatting.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_SHADOW_Y 53 Enter the vertical distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_SLANT a2 Adds a slant shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_RIGHT 36 Aligns the text to the right end of the text baseline.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_NORMAL 9c Adds a shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
1a SVX_HID_FONTWORK_CTL_FORMS 42 Click the shape of the baseline that you want to use for the text.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_SLANTY 34 Vertically slants the characters in the text object.
1d SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHOWFORM 46 Shows or hides the text baseline, or the edges of the selected object.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_MIRROR 9c Reverses the text flow direction, and flips the text horizontally or vertically. To use this command, you must first apply a different baseline to the text.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_UPRIGHT 97 Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline and preserves the original vertical alignment of the individual characters.
10 .uno%3AGroupMenu 61 Groups keep together selected objects, so that they can be moved or formatted as a single object.
12 .uno%3AFormatGroup 4a Groups the selected objects, so that they can be moved as a single object.
14 .uno%3AFormatUngroup 38 Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects.
11 .uno%3AEnterGroup a1 Opens the selected group, so that you can edit the individual objects. If the selected group contains nested group, you can repeat this command on the subgroups.
11 .uno%3ALeaveGroup 54 Exits the group, so that you can no longer edit the individual objects in the group.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_STOP_INSIDE 31 Text remains visible after the effect is applied.
3b cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_ENDLESS 9a Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the effect, clear this checkbox, and enter a number in the Continuous box.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ALB_EFFECT 8f Select the animation effect that you want to apply to the text in the selected drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect.
39 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_RIGHT 20 Scrolls text from left to right.
40 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_START_INSIDE 49 Text is visible and inside the drawing object when the effect is applied.
38 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_DOWN 20 Scrolls text from top to bottom.
39 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_PIXEL 23 Measures increment value in pixels.
38 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_LEFT 20 Scrolls text from right to left.
36 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_UP 20 Scrolls text from bottom to top.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3AMTR_FLD_DELAY 3d Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3AMTR_FLD_AMOUNT 3b Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text.
38 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_AUTO c5 $[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, clear this checkbox, and then enter a value in the Automatic box.
29 cui%3ATabPage%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION 44 Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object.
3e cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ANUM_FLD_COUNT 47 Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat.
1e DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_ROWHEIGHT 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_MAN%3ABTN_DEFVAL 3f Automatically adjusts the row height based on the current font.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_MAN%3AED_VALUE 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
31 dbaccess%3AMetricField%3ADLG_ROWHEIGHT%3AMF_VALUE 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
10 .uno%3ARowHeight 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
31 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ROWHEIGHT%3ACB_STANDARD 3f Automatically adjusts the row height based on the current font.
30 dbaccess%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLWIDTH%3AMF_VALUE 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
12 .uno%3AColumnWidth 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_MAN%3AED_VALUE 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
30 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_COLWIDTH%3ACB_STANDARD 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_MAN%3ABTN_DEFVAL 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
20 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_COLUMNWIDTH 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
11 CUI_HID_ALIGNMENT 57 Sets the alignment options for the contents of the current cell, or the selected cells.
3e cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_ASIAN_VERTICAL 133 Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated.
37 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ANF_DEGREES a2 Enter the rotation angle for the text in the selected cell(s). A positive number rotates the text to the left and a negative number rotates the text to the right.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ALB_VERALIGN 51 Select the vertical alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ALB_HORALIGN 53 Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents.
34 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_HYPH 3c Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line.
1a CUI_HID_ALIGNMENT_CTR_DIAL 2e Click in the dial to set the text orientation.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3AED_INDENT 44 Indents from the left edge of the cell by the amount that you enter.
34 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_WRAP a2 Wraps text onto another line at the cell border. The number of lines depends on the width of the cell. To enter a manual line break, press Ctrl+Enter in the cell.
21 CUI_HID_ALIGNMENT_CTR_BORDER_LOCK 3b Specify the cell edge from which to write the rotated text.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_TXTSTACKED 133 Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_TABBROWSER 87 Select database records. Drag-and-drop rows or cells to the document to insert contents. Drag-and-drop column headers to insert fields.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
20 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLEFORMAT 1c Formats the selected row(s).
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_COLUMNFORMAT 1f Formats the selected column(s).
f .uno%3AWindow3D 41 Specifies the properties of 3D object(s) in the current document.
33 svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ANUM_VERTICAL 4f Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object
2d svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_GEO 10c Adjusts the shape and of the selected 3D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3D object that was created by converting a 2D object. To convert a 2D object to 3D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3D, or Convert - To 3D Rotation Object.
35 svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ANUM_HORIZONTAL 52 Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_INVERT 19 Inverts the light source.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_END_ANGLE 4a Enter the number of degrees to include in the selected 3D rotation object.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_PERCENT_DIAGONAL 52 Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3D object.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_FLAT 23 Renders the 3D surface as polygons.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_SPHERE 1c Renders a smooth 3D surface.
3c svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TWO_SIDED_LIGHTING 8f Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_DOUBLE_SIDED 60 Closes the shape of a 3D object that was created by extruding a freeform line (Convert - To 3D).
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_OBJ 80 Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_BACKSCALE 67 Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3D object.
2f svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_DEPTH 67 Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3D object. This option is not valid for 3D rotation objects.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_REPRESENTATION 3f Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3D object.
36 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_FOCAL_LENGTH 81 Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens.
2f svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_SLANT 3b Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_SHADOW_3D 35 Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3D object.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_DISTANCE 55 Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected object.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_SHADEMODE 135 Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single color to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colors across the polygons. Phong shading averages the color of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_COLOR 25 Select a color for the ambient light.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_2 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_4 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
2f svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT 33 Define the light source for the selected 3D object.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_1 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_6 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_7 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_3 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
2c svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_LIGHT_1 2c Select a color for the current light source.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_8 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_5 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_AMBIENTLIGHT 25 Select a color for the ambient light.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_COLOR 1e Converts the texture to color.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEXTURE 120 Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface textures to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+Ctrl, and then drag an image onto the selected 3D object.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_PARALLEL_X 34 Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_OBJECT_X 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_REPLACE 24 Applies the texture without shading.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_PARALLEL_Y 32 Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_CIRCLE_X 41 Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_OBJECT_Y 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
34 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_FILTER 37 Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_CIRCLE_Y 3f Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
37 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_LUMINANCE 28 Converts the texture to black and white.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_MODULATE 79 Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialog.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_SPECULAR_COLOR 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
32 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_MATERIAL 2f Changes the coloring of the selected 3D object.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_SPECULAR 35 Select the color that you want the object to reflect.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_EMISSION_COLOR 35 Select the color that you want the object to reflect.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_EMISSION 2a Select the color to illuminate the object.
40 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_MAT_SPECULAR_INTENSITY 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_MAT_COLOR 2a Select the color to illuminate the object.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_COLOR 36 Select the color that you want to apply to the object.
32 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_FAVORITES 59 Select a predefined color scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom color scheme.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_DISTANCE 64 Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_LEFT 6b Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
38 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_TOP 6a Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1a .uno%3ADistributeSelection 9d Distributes three or more selected objects evenly along the horizontal axis or the vertical axis. You can also evenly distribute the spacing between objects.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_BOTTOM 6d Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_RIGHT 6c Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_NONE 2b Does not distribute the objects vertically.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_CENTER 71 Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_CENTER 73 Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_NONE 2d Does not distribute the objects horizontally.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_DISTANCE 66 Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1f CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL 49 Replaces all occurrences of the unknown word with the current suggestion.
20 CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNORERULE 74 While performing a grammar check, click Ignore Rule to ignore the rule that is currently flagged as a grammar error.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ALB_LANGUAGE 34 Specifies the language to use to check the spelling.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ACB_CHECK_GRAMMAR 58 Enable Check grammar to work first on all spellcheck errors, then on all grammar errors.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_UNDO 69 Click to undo the last step of your spellcheck session. Click again to undo the previous step, and so on.
37 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3AMB_ADDTODICT 33 Adds the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ALB_SUGGESTION 80 Lists suggested words to replace the misspelled word. Select the word that you want to use, and then click Change or Change All.
1f .uno%3ASpellingAndGrammarDialog 41 Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors.
1c CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 8a Replaces the unknown word with the current suggestion. If you changed more than just the misspelled word, the entire sentence is replaced.
38 cui%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3AED_NEWWORD 91 Displays the sentence with the misspelled word highlighted. Edit the word or the sentence, or click one of the suggestions in the text box below.
f .uno%3ASpelling 41 Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_OPTIONS 6c Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking.
1f CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 7e Skips all occurrences of the unknown word until the end of the current %PRODUCTNAME session and continues with the spellcheck.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_AUTOCORR 6c Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking.
1c CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 39 Skips the unknown word and continues with the spellcheck.
17 .uno%3AMoreDictionaries 3d Opens the default browser on the dictionaries extension page.
13 .uno%3ALanguageMenu 3d Opens the default browser on the dictionaries extension page.
18 .uno%3AChineseConversion 8d Translates the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is translated.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Freplaceed 85 Displays a suggested replacement for the current word. You can also type a new word in this box, or click a word in the Synonym list.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Falternatives 6c Select the meaning that matches the context of the current word, and then select a word in the Synonym list.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Fwordcb 46 Displays the current selection, or the word that contains that cursor.
16 .uno%3AThesaurusDialog 3c Replaces the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Fleft 3d Recalls the previous contents of the "Current word" text box.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2FThesaurusDialog 3c Replaces the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
10 .uno%3AThesaurus 3c Replaces the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Flangcb 24 Select a language for the thesaurus.
30 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ABTN_EXEC 74 Replaces the selected source colors in the current image with the colors that you specify in the Replace with boxes.
1b SVX_HID_BMPMASK_TBI_PIPETTE 8d Select one of the four source color boxes. Move the mouse pointer over the selected image, and then click the color that you want to replace.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_3 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_1 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
1b SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_PIPETTE a5 Displays the color in the selected image that directly underlies the current mouse pointer position. This features only works if the Color Replacer tool is selected.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_4 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
1a SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_QCOL_1 af Displays the color in the selected image that you want to replace. To set the source color, click here, click the Color Replacer, and then click a color in the selected image.
2d svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_TRANS 47 Select the color to replace the transparent areas in the current image.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_4 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_3 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_2 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_2 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_1 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
e .uno%3ABmpMask 5f Opens the Color Replacer dialog, where you can replace colors in bitmap and meta file graphics.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_TRANS 4f Replaces transparent areas in the current image with the color that you select.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_3 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_4 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_1 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_2 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
15 .uno%3AAutoCorrectDlg 3e Sets the options for automatically replacing text as you type.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOFMT_APPLY%3APB_EDIT 29 Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option.
20 CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_OPTIONS 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
1c CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_CLB 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
1e CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOFORMAT_CLB 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
1f CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOFMT_OPTIONS 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
20 CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE 6e Edits the replacement table for automatically correcting or replacing words or abbreviations in your document.
1f CUI_HID_OFACTL_AUTOCORR_REPLACE 12f Lists the entries for automatically replacing words or abbreviations while you type. To add an entry, enter text in the Replace and With boxes, and then click New. To edit an entry, select it, change the text in the With box, and then click Replace. To delete an entry, select it, and then click Delete.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3AED_SHORT 47 Enter the word or abbreviation that you want to replace while you type.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3APB_NEW_REPLACE 33 Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3AED_REPLACE f3 Enter the replacement text, graphic, frame, or OLE object that you want to replace the text in the Replace box. If you have selected text, a graphic, a frame, or an OLE object in your document, the relevant information is already entered here.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3ACB_TEXT_ONLY 85 Saves the entry in the With box without formatting. When the replacement is made, the text uses the same format as the document text.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_NEWDOUBLECAPS 31 Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3AED_ABBREV d3 Type an abbreviation followed by a period, and then click New. This prevents $[officename] from automatically capitalizing the first letter of the word that comes after the period at the end of the abbreviation.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_NEWABBREV 31 Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions.
1f CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT 6d Specify the abbreviations or letter combinations that you do not want $[officename] to correct automatically.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ACB_AUTOABBREV 12e Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalize first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialog.
39 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3AED_DOUBLE_CAPS ce Type the word or abbreviation that starts with two capital letters that you do not want $[officename] to change to one initial capital. For example, enter PC to prevent $[officename] from changing PC to Pc.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ACB_AUTOCAPS 12e Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalize first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialog.
3c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ALB_DOUBLE_CAPS b3 Lists the words or abbreviations that start with two initial capitals that are not automatically corrected. All words which start with two capital letters are listed in the field.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ALB_ABBREV 3d Lists the abbreviations that are not automatically corrected.
19 CUI_HID_AUTOCORR_LANGUAGE 4f Select the language for which you want to create or edit the replacement rules.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_DBL_STD 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
39 cui%3ACheckbox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3ACB_SGL_TYPO 78 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for single quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_STARTQUOTE 9d Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoFormat - Apply.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_SGL_STD 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_SGL_STARTQUOTE 9d Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoFormat - Apply.
1c CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_QUOTE_SW_CLB 5a Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M].
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_ENDQUOTE 9d Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoFormat - Apply.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_SGL_ENDQUOTE 9d Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoFormat - Apply.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3ACB_TYPO 78 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for single quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
1a SW_HID_LINGU_WORD_LANGUAGE 63 Changes the language settings for the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
15 SW_HID_LINGU_ADD_WORD 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
19 SW_HID_LINGU_SPELLING_DLG 1c Opens the Spellcheck dialog.
22 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_IGNORE 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
23 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_ADDWORD 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
1a SW_HID_LINGU_PARA_LANGUAGE 7e Changes the language setting for the paragraph that contains the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
27 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_AUTOCORRECT 97 To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect - Replace.
14 SW_HID_LINGU_REPLACE 83 Click the word to replace the highlighted word for the current session only. Use the AutoCorrect submenu for permanent replacement.
15 SW_HID_LINGU_AUTOCORR 97 To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect - Replace.
21 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_START 1c Opens the Spellcheck dialog.
18 SW_HID_LINGU_IGNORE_WORD 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_APPEND_SPACE 49 If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_ACTIV 92 Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word.
42 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_REMOVE_LIST a1 Makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.
46 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ANF_MAX_ENTRIES 55 Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list.
42 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ALB_ENTRIES ea Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, select "When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents".
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_AS_TIP 2a Displays the completed word as a Help Tip.
46 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ANF_MIN_WORDLEN 5c Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_COLLECT 87 Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3APB_ENTRIES 41 Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ADCB_EXPAND_KEY 4c Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion.
38 SVX_PUSHBUTTON_RID_OFAPAGE_SMARTTAG_OPTIONS_PB_SMARTTAGS 78 To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured.
36 SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_OFAPAGE_SMARTTAG_OPTIONS_CB_SMARTTAGS 43 Enables Smart Tags to be evaluated and shown in your text document.
14 .uno%3AOutlineBullet 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
20 .uno%3ABulletsAndNumberingDialog 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
17 CUI_HID_VALUESET_BULLET 2c Click the bullet style that you want to use.
1a CUI_HID_VALUESET_SINGLENUM 2f Click the numbering style that you want to use.
14 CUI_HID_VALUESET_NUM 2d Click the outline style that you want to use.
31 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PICK_BMP%3ACB_LINKED 6c If enabled, the graphics are inserted as links. If not enabled, the graphics are embedded into the document.
17 CUI_HID_VALUESET_NUMBMP 33 Click the graphics that you want to use as bullets.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AED_PREFIX 4c Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ACB_RATIO 2e Maintains the size proportions of the graphic.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3APB_BULLET 4a Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select a bullet symbol.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_BUL_COLOR 2f Select a color for the current numbering style.
37 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AED_START 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_ORIENT 2c Select the alignment option for the graphic.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_CHARFMT 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ANF_ALL_LEVEL 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
36 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMB_BITMAP 50 Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMF_WIDTH 1e Enter a width for the graphic.
37 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_LEVEL 47 Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMF_BUL_REL_SIZE 7b Enter the amount by which you want to resize the bullet character with respect to the font height of the current paragraph.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMF_HEIGHT 1f Enter a height for the graphic.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AED_SUFFIX a0 Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create a numbered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_FMT 31 Select a numbering style for the selected levels.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_INDENT 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_ALIGN cb Set the alignment of the numbering symbols in the list. You cannot change the alignment if the values in the Spacing to text and the Minimum space numbering <-> boxes are the same, or too close together.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Findentmf f1 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_INDENT_AT 7c Enter the distance from the left page margin to the start of all lines in the numbered paragraph that follow the first line.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ACB_RELATIVE 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_NUMDIST 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
3c cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_BORDERDIST f1 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Frelative 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Findentatmf 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fstandard 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Flevellb 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fnumdistmf 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
38 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_LEVEL 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
3c cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_ALIGNED_AT 5b Enter the distance from the left page margin at which the numbering symbol will be aligned.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_ALIGN_2 cb Set the alignment of the numbering symbols in the list. You cannot change the alignment if the values in the Spacing to text and the Minimum space numbering <-> boxes are the same, or too close together.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_LISTTAB 6e If you select a tab stop to follow the numbering, you can enter a non-negative value as the tab stop position.
3f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_LABEL_FOLLOWED_BY 53 Select the element that will follow the numbering: a tab stop, a space, or nothing.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fnumalignlb cb Set the alignment of the numbering symbols in the list. You cannot change the alignment if the values in the Spacing to text and the Minimum space numbering <-> boxes are the same, or too close together.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2FOutlinePositionPage 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3APB_STANDARD 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_NEWDLG 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
12 .uno%3AMacroDialog 22 Opens a dialog to organize macros.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 2f Opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
30 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Frun 20 Runs or saves the current macro.
37 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fnewlibrary 2a Saves the recorded macro in a new library.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_NEWLIB 16 Creates a new library.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_PASSWORD 37 Assigns or edits the password for the selected library.
2f basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 51 Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fmacros 52 Lists the macros that are contained in the module selected in the Macro from list.
35 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Forganize 74 Opens the Macro Organizer dialog, where you can add, edit, or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries.
2f basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
2e basctl%3AListBox%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_LB_BASICS 60 Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organize.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_NEWDLG 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
3a modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fmacronameedit 67 Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here.
36 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fnewmodule 29 Saves the recorded macro in a new module.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_DEL 2a Prompts you to delete the selected script.
2f basctl%3AEdit%3ARID_DLG_NEWLIB%3ARID_ED_LIBNAME 2b Enter a name for the new library or module.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_CREATE 15 Creates a new script.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fassign 6e Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a toolbar, or an event.
1d BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBS_TREE 56 Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_RENAME 44 Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected script.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_APPEND 66 Locate that $[officename] Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open.
31 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fedit 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_EDIT 3a Opens the default script editor for your operating system.
12 CUI_HID_SCRIPTSBOX 83 Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_NEWMOD 2a Opens the editor and creates a new module.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fdelete 33 Creates a new macro, or deletes the selected macro.
3d modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2FBasicMacroDialog 22 Opens a dialog to organize macros.
36 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Flibraries a5 Lists the libraries and the modules where you can open or save your macros. To save a macro with a particular document, open the document, and then open this dialog.
20 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_MODULES_TREE 48 Ги листа постоечките макроа и дијалози.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_RUN 41 To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run.
15 .uno%3AMacroSignature 6e Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your macros. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
f .uno%3ARunMacro 2b Opens a dialog where you can start a macro.
27 .uno%3AMacroOrganizer%3FTabId%3Ashort=1 32 Opens the Dialogs tab page of the Macro Organizer.
14 .uno%3AMacroRecorder 14 Records a new macro.
14 .uno%3AStopRecording 18 Stops recording a macro.
33 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_PASSWORD%3AED_REPEAT_PASSWD 32 Reenter the new password for the selected library.
10 SVX_HID_PASSWORD 2e Protects the selected library with a password.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_PASSWORD%3AED_OLD_PASSWD 34 Enter the current password for the selected library.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_PASSWORD%3AED_NEW_PASSWD 2e Enter a new password for the selected library.
44 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=BeanShell 2e Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts.
16 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer 50 Opens a submenu with links to dialogs where you can organize macros and scripts.
45 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=JavaScript 2e Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts.
20 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBSDLG_TREE 6d Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list.
2e basctl%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_LIBS%3ARID_CB_REPL 43 Replaces a library that has the same name with the current library.
2d basctl%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_LIBS%3ARID_CB_REF 68 Adds the selected library as a read-only file. The library is reloaded each time you start %PRODUCTNAME.
16 .uno%3AConfigureDialog 59 Customizes $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
12 .uno%3ALoadToolBox 59 Customizes $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_ADD_COMMANDS ad Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select the command that you want to add to the menu, and then click Add. You can also drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
31 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_CHANGE 29 Opens a submenu with additional commands.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_NEW 71 Opens the New Menu dialog where you can enter the name of a new menu as well as select the location for the menu.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fmacroselectordialog%2Fcommands 5e Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
35 cui%3AImageButton%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3ABTN_MENU_DOWN 2a Moves the selected item down one position.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3ABTN_MENU_UP 28 Moves the selected item up one position.
37 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_CHANGE_ENTRY 2f Opens a menu that contains additional commands.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ALB_MENUS 32 Select the menu and submenu that you want to edit.
2d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ALB_SAVEIN 47 Select the application or open document where you want to add the menu.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fmacroselectordialog%2Fcategories 5e Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ARB_MODULE 41 Displays shortcut keys for the current $[officename] application.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_SAVE 4c Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_ACC_CHANGE 6c Assigns the key combination selected in the Shortcut keys list to the command selected in the Function list.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_RESET 32 Resets modified values back to the default values.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_LOAD 4b Replaces the shortcut key configuration with one that was previously saved.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_ACC_REMOVE 6a Го бриши избраниот елемент без дадена потврда за бришење..
22 CUI_HID_CONFIGFUNCTION_ACC_LISTBOX dd Select a function that you want to assign a shortcut key to, click a key combination in the Shortcut keys list, and then click Modify. If the selected function already has a shortcut key, it is displayed in the Keys list.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ARB_OFFICE 49 Displays shortcut keys that are common to all $[officename] applications.
1b CUI_HID_ACCELCONFIG_LISTBOX be Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. To assign or modify the shortcut key for the command selected in the Function list, click a shortcut in this list, and then click Modify.
14 CUI_HID_CONFIG_ACCEL 5d Assigns or edits the shortcut keys for $[officename] commands, or $[officename] Basic macros.
1f CUI_HID_CONFIGGROUP_ACC_LISTBOX 63 Lists the available function categories. To assign shortcuts to Styles, open the "Styles" category.
13 CUI_HID_SVX_SAVE_IN 49 Select the location where to load the configuration and where to save it.
1f CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR_ITEM 21 The Modify button opens a submenu
2e cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_UP 27 Moves the selected item up in the list.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR 22 The Toolbar button opens a submenu
17 CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR 6c Opens the Name dialog, where you enter the name of a new toolbar and select the location of the new toolbar.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_DOWN 29 Moves the selected item down in the list.
1c CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR_ITEM 21 The Modify button opens a submenu
2f cui%3APushButton%3AMD_ICONSELECTOR%3ABTN_DELETE 58 Click to remove the selected icon from the list. Only user-defined icons can be removed.
2f cui%3APushButton%3AMD_ICONSELECTOR%3ABTN_IMPORT 24 Adds new icons to the list of icons.
12 .uno%3ATableEvents 6d Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3APB_ASSIGN 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3APB_DELETE 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MACROASSIGN%3APB_ASSIGN 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MACRO_LB_EVENT b1 The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MACROASSIGN%3APB_DELETE 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3ALB_SAVEIN 59 Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fclose 12 Closes the dialog.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Ffilterlist 3a Select one or more filters, then click one of the buttons.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fopen 4d Displays an Open dialog to open a filter from an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fedit 32 Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fdelete 44 Deletes the selected file after you confirm the dialog that follows.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2FXMLFilterSettingsDialog 7d Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fsave 56 Displays a Save as dialog to save the selected file as an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Ftest 32 Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fhelp 27 Displays the help page for this dialog.
1c .uno%3AOpenXMLFilterSettings 7d Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files.
25 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fnew 2d Opens a dialog with the name of a new filter.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TABPAGE_BASIC 34 Enter or edit general information for an XML filter.
1f FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EXTENSION 99 Enter the file extension to use when you open a file without specifying a filter. $[officename] uses the file extension to determine which filter to use.
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_NAME 5a Enter the name that you want to display in the list box of the XML Filter Settings dialog.
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DESCRIPTION 32 Внесете коментар (по избор).
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_APPLICATION 78 Изберете ја апликацијата која сакате да ја користите со филтерот.
24 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_INTERFACE_NAME 4d Enter the name that you want to display in the File type box in file dialogs.
1d FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DOCTYPE 22 Enter the DOCTYPE of the XML file.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_XSLT_BROWSE 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EXPORT_XSLT_BROWSE 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_XSLT 6b If this is an import filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for importing.
25 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_TEMPLATE 7b Enter the name of the template that you want to use for importing. In the template, styles are defined to display XML tags.
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EXPORT_XSLT 6b If this is an export filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for exporting.
2c FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_TEMPLATE_BROWSE 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT 3c Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog.
29 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_CURRENT d9 The front-most open file that matches the XML filter criteria will be used to test the filter. The current XML export filter transforms the file and the resulting XML code is displayed in the XML Filter output window.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_BROWSE a0 Locate the file that you want to apply the XML export filter to. The XML code of the transformed file is opened in your default XML editor after transformation.
2d FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT_FILE 3c Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog.
2f FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_TEMPLATE_FILE 57 Displays the file name of the template that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
30 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_DISPLAY_SOURCE 59 Opens the XML source of the selected document in your default XML editor after importing.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_BROWSE 5f Opens a file selection dialog. The selected file is opened using the current XML import filter.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_SOURCE_FILE_VALIDATE 37 Validates the contents of the XML Filter output window.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_OUTPUT_WINDOW 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
29 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_VALIDATE_OUPUT 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 81 No changes will be made to the current selection, and every time the same selection is detected it will be skipped automatically.
1f CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 6d No changes will be made to the current selection. The next word or character will be selected for conversion.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_REPLACE_BY_CHARACTER 68 Check to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not checked, full words are replaced.
1f CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 5d Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_SIMPLE_CONVERSION 41 The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_BRACKETED 43 The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part.
20 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_OPTIONS 26 Opens the Hangul/Hanja Options dialog.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_ABOVE 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_BELOW 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_GRID 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
1e CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CLOSE 12 Closes the dialog.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_ABOVE 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_LIST 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_HANJA_ONLY 33 Check to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_HANGUL_ONLY 33 Check to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja.
1d CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL aa Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_BRACKETED 43 The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part.
1c .uno%3AHangulHanjaConversion 4f Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3APB_FIND 57 Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_BELOW 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part.
18 CUI_HID_SPELLDLG_SETWORD 1f Displays the current selection.
1e CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_EDIT_NEWWORD 3e Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_DELETE 2d Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_EDIT 57 Opens the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog where you can edit any user-defined dictionary.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_NEW 4b Opens the New dictionary dialog box, where you can create a new dictionary.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_IGNOREPOST 56 Ignores positional characters at the end of Korean words when you search a dictionary.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_SHOWRECENTLYFIRST 60 Shows the replacement suggestion that you selected the last time as the first entry on the list.
20 CUI_HID_HANGULHANJA_OPT_DICTS_LB ae Lists all user-defined dictionaries. Select the check box next to the dictionary that you want to use. Clear the check box next to the dictionary that you do not want to use.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_AUTOREPLACEUNIQUE 4b Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_NEWDICT%3AED_DICTNAME 20 Enter a name for the dictionary.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3APB_HHE_DELETE 1b Deletes the selected entry.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_4 94 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacment word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_3 94 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacment word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_2 94 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacment word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_1 94 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacment word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3ALB_BOOK 39 Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3APB_HHE_NEW 3a Adds the current replacement definition to the dictionary.
3c cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3ALB_ORIGINAL 79 Select the entry in the current dictionary that you want to edit. If you want, you can also type a new entry in this box.
12 .uno%3ASpellDialog 19 Checks spelling manually.
10 .uno%3ANewWindow 44 Opens a new window that displays the contents of the current window.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_STD 24 Opens the Select Certificate dialog.
3e xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_DIGSIG%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 22 Opens the View Certificate dialog.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_DEL 2a Removes the selected source from the list.
29 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_SIGNATURESDLG 36 Lists the digital signatures for the current document.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ABTN_SIGNATURE 70 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
10 .uno%3ASignature 70 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
46 desktop%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_DESCRIPTIONS 95 While checking for updates, you see a progress indicator. Wait for some messages to show up in the dialog, or click Cancel to abort the update check.
21 DESKTOP_HID_DEPLOYMENT_GUI_UPDATE ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
28 DESKTOP_HID_DEPLOYMENT_GUI_UPDATEINSTALL ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
38 desktop%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_ALL 8c By default, only the downloadable extensions are shown in the dialog. Mark Show all Updates to see also other extensions and error messages.
39 desktop%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_OK 54 When you click the Install button the Download and Installation dialog is displayed.
13 .uno%3AInsertZWNBSP 94 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will keep the word together at the end of a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
17 .uno%3AInsertHardHyphen 4d Inserts a hyphen that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
1d .uno%3AInsertNonBreakingSpace 4c Inserts a space that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
10 .uno%3AInsertRLM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
10 .uno%3AInsertLRM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
19 .uno%3AFormattingMarkMenu 51 Opens a submenu to insert special formatting marks. Enable CTL for more commands.
11 .uno%3AInsertZWSP a9 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will insert a line break once it becomes the last character in a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
17 .uno%3AInsertSoftHyphen 80 Inserts an invisible hyphen within a word that will appear and create a line break once it becomes the last character in a line.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_LISTVIEW 55 Displays the contents of the Gallery as small icons, with title and path information.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_NEWTHEME 56 Adds a new theme to the Gallery and lets you choose the files to include in the theme.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_WINDOW 52 To insert a Gallery object, select the object, and then drag it into the document.
e .uno%3AGallery 59 Opens the Gallery, where you can select graphics and sounds to insert into your document.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_THEMELIST 3c Click a theme to view the objects associated with the theme.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ICONVIEW 2e Displays the contents of the Gallery as icons.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_SEARCH 52 Locate the directory containing the files that you want to add, and then click OK.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_TAKE 2f Adds the selected file(s) to the current theme.
40 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ACBX_PREVIEW 31 Displays or hides a preview of the selected file.
42 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_TAKEALL 37 Adds all of the files in the list to the current theme.
42 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ALBX_FOUND 8b Lists the available files. Select the file(s) that you want to add, and then click Add. To add all of the files in the list, click Add All.
41 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ACBB_FILETYPE 2d Select the type of file that you want to add.
f .uno%3AGridMenu 26 Sets the display properties of a grid.
14 .uno%3ASnapLinesMenu 2d Specifies the display options for snap lines.
14 .uno%3AAVMediaPlayer 82 Opens the Media Player window where you can preview movie and sound files as well as insert these files into the current document.
14 .uno%3AInsertAVMedia 31 Inserts a video or sound file into your document.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3APB_CHANGEPATH 2f Click to select a folder to download the files.
36 desktop%3ACheckBox%3ATP_UPDATE_CHECK%3ACB_UPDATE_CHECK 34 You can check for updates manually or automatically.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ACB_AUTODOWNLOAD 90 Mark to enable the automatic check for updates. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box to disable or enable this feature.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DLG f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD2 9c Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_CANCEL 75 Го прекинува симнувањето и ги брише делумно симнатите датотеки.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_RESUME 44 Продолжува со паузираното симнување.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_PAUSE 40 Pauses the download. Later click Resume to continue downloading.
21 SFX2_HID_DLG_CHECKFORONLINEUPDATE f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_INSTALL 3e Ги инсталира симнатите ажурирања.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD 9c Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_DISABLE 20 Enable or disable the extension.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_OPTIONS 57 Select an installed extension, then click to open the Options dialog for the extension.
2c DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_REMOVE 94 Изберете ја екстензијата која сакате да ја отстраните и потоа кликнете Отстрани.
39 service%3Acom.sun.star.deployment.ui.PackageManagerDialog 5c The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and exports %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
36 desktop%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_DLG_LICENSE%3AML_LICENSE 87 Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
2c desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fextensions cb Select the directory where you want to add a new extension, or select the extensions that you want to remove, enable, disable, or export. To select multiple extensions, press the Ctrl key when you click.
38 desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2FExtensionManagerDialog 5c The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and exports %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
38 desktop%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_LICENSE%3APB_LICENSE_DOWN 87 Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
2b uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD 54 Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive.
1d sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fpass1ed 54 Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive.
33 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD_CRT%3AED_PASSWORD_CRT 54 Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirm2ed 16 Re-enter the password.
1d sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fpass2ed 54 Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2FPasswordDialog 54 Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive.
13 SC_HID_PASSWD_TABLE 54 Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive.
11 SC_HID_PASSWD_DOC 16 Re-enter the password.
24 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_MORE 38 Click to show or hide the file sharing password options.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirm1ed 16 Re-enter the password.
36 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD_CRT%3AED_PASSWORD_REPEAT 16 Re-enter the password.
43 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_ALLOWDUPLICATEFIELDNAMES 98 Allows to use the same field name for multiple fields in the generated PDF file. If disabled, field names will be exported using generated unique names.
3c filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_VISIBLE 7a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
3e filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_TRANSITIONEFFECTS 4c Selects to export Impress slide transition effect to respective PDF effects.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_VIEW_PDF_BROWSER 94 Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
36 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTNOTES 42 Selects to export notes of Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTEMPTYPAGES 190 If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are being exported to pdf file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. The previous chapter ends on an odd page. %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not.
3a filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTBOOKMARKS f0 Selects to export bookmarks of Writer documents as PDF bookmarks. Bookmarks are created for all outline paragraphs (Tools - Outline Numbering) and for all table of contents entries for which you did assign hyperlinks in the source document.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_NONE 46 Не се дозволени промени на содржината.
39 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ACB_ENAB_ACCESS 35 Select to enable text access for accessibility tools.
39 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_PDFA_1B_SELECT ea Converts to the PDF/A-1a format. This is defined as an electronic document file format for long term preservation. All fonts that were used in the source document will be embedded into the generated PDF file. PDF tags will be written.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_VIEW_PDF_DEFAULT 6c Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system.
35 filter%3AListBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ALB_FORMSFORMAT 3f Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file.
3f filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_INSDEL 74 Дозволени се само вметнување, бришење и ротирање на страниците.
34 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_ADDSTREAM 68 This setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF.
40 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_REDUCEIMAGERESOLUTION 51 Selects to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch.
3c filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_DEFAULT b7 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTFORMFIELDS 60 Choose to create a PDF form. This can be filled out and printed by the user of the PDF document.
3d FILTER_NUMERICFIELD_RID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR_NUM_MAGNF_INITIAL_PAGE 41 Select to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_PRINT_HIGHRES 2f The document can be printed in high resolution.
43 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_ANY_NOCOPY 33 All changes are permitted, except extracting pages.
3a FILTER_NUMERICFIELD_RID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER_NUM_BOOKMARKLEVELS 5d Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
3a filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_SINGPG 3c Select to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time.
3f FILTER_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER_RB_VISIBLEBOOKMARKLEVELS 5d Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
3a filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ACB_PGLY_FIRSTLEFT f9 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages.
41 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_LOSSLESSCOMPRESSION 43 Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved.
41 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_FILLFORM 68 Дозволени се само пополнување на полињата во формуларот.
3b filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_PRINT_NONE 4a Печатењето на документот не е дозволено.
39 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_WIND 62 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_PRINT_LOWRES 65 The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honor this setting.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_WNDOPT_OPNFULL 69 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows.
40 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_COMMENT 38 Only commenting and filling in form fields is permitted.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_JPEGCOMPRESSION 61 Selects a JPEG compression of images. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_OPNMODE_THUMBS 54 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents.
3a filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_WIDTH 61 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_OPNMODE_OUTLINE 53 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.
40 filter%3AComboBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACO_REDUCEIMAGERESOLUTION 4e Изберете ја целната резолуција за сликите.
39 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_DISPDOCTITLE 5e Select to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_UOP_HIDEVTOOLBAR 40 Select to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_WNDOPT_RESINIT 4b Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EMBEDSTANDARDFONTS fd Normally the 14 standard Postscript fonts are not embedded in a PDF file, because every PDF reader software already contains these fonts. Enable this option to embed the standard fonts that are installed on your system and that are used in the document.
3b filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_DEFAULT 6a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software.
2c filter%3AEdit%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3AED_PAGES 5c Ја изнесува страницата која ја пишувате во полето.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_CNV_OOO_DOCTOPDF d2 Enable this checkbox to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf.
33 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_RANGE 5c Ја изнесува страницата која ја пишувате во полето.
3f filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_OPNMODE_PAGEONLY a1 Изберете за да создадете PDF датотека која ќе ја прикажува само содржината на страницата.
12 .uno%3AExportToPDF 39 Saves the current file to Portable Document Format (PDF).
31 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_ALL 5c Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document.
37 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_SELECTION 3c Ја изнесува тековната селекција.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_WNDOPT_CNTRWIN 52 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centered on screen.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_EXP_BMRK_TO_DEST 141 The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows to link to those objects by name from other documents.
38 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_CONT 4f Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column.
3b FILTER_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER_RB_ALLBOOKMARKLEVELS 46 Select to show all bookmark levels when the reader opens the PDF file.
33 FILTER_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR_RB_MAGNF_ZOOM 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
35 filter%3AMetricField%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ANF_QUALITY 4d Внесете ниво на квалитет за JPEG компресија.
34 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_TAGGEDPDF 6d Selects to export special tags into the corresponding PDF tags. This can increase file sizes by huge amounts.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_UOP_HIDEVMENUBAR 41 Select to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_UOP_HIDEVWINCTRL 41 Select to hide the reader's controls when the document is active.
38 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ACB_ENDAB_COPY 35 Select to enable copying of content to the clipboard.
3b filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_CONTFAC 96 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_ENAB_RELLINKFSYS 82 Enable this checkbox to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help.
34 filter%3APushButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ABTN_PWD 35 Click to open a dialog where you enter the passwords.
34 FILTER_METRICFIELD_RID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR_NUM_MAGNF_ZOOM 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
42 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_VIEW_PDF_APPLICATION c2 Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsPDF 7b Exports the entire file to Portable Document Format (PDF), and then sends the result as an attachment to an e-mail message.
1b UUI_HID_XMLSECDLG_MACROWARN 62 Enable or disable the macros. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security to set the options.
23 SFX2_HID_WARNING_SECURITY_HYPERLINK 62 Enable or disable the macros. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security to set the options.
43 xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_CERTCHOOSER%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 51 Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate.
2c XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_CHOOSESIGNATURES 51 Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with.
3f xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_CERTPATH%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 51 Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate.
e .uno%3AWebHtml 95 Creates a temporary copy of the current document in HTML format, opens the system default Web browser, and displays the HTML file in the Web browser.
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_EDIT 56 Opens a dialog to edit the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
1f SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_REMOVE 43 Deletes the selected XForm model. You cannot delete the last model.
3c svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_MODEL%3ACB_MODIFIES_DOCUMENT d4 When enabled, the document status will be set to "modified" when you change any form control that is bound to any data in the model. When not enabled, such a change does not set the document status to "modified".
16 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX 77 Ја одредува структурата на податоците во тековниот XForms документ.
18 .uno%3AShowDataNavigator 77 Ја одредува структурата на податоците во тековниот XForms документ.
1a SVX_HID_XFORMS_MODELS_LIST 2e Selects the XForms model that you want to use.
1e SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_SHOW_DETAILS 2d Switches the display to show or hide details.
29 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ATTRIBUTE 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
22 SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_REMOVE 42 Deletes the current instance. You cannot delete the last instance.
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_INSTANCES_MENUBTN 3a This button has submenus to add, edit or remove instances.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_MODEL%3AED_INST_NAME f Enter the name.
27 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ELEMENT 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
19 SVX_HID_XFORMS_ITEMS_LIST 34 Lists the items that belong to the current instance.
22 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_REMOVE 47 Deletes the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
1f SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_ADD 30 Opens a dialog where you can add a new instance.
1d SVX_HID_XFORMS_MODELS_MENUBTN 29 Adds, renames, and removes XForms models.
20 SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_EDIT 39 Opens a dialog where you can modify the current instance.
1d SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_EDIT 21 Renames the selected Xform model.
1a SVX_HID_XFORMS_TAB_CONTROL 77 Ја одредува структурата на податоците во тековниот XForms документ.
1f SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
1c SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_ADD 3c Opens the Add Model dialog where you can add an XForm model.
38 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
3a svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_CONSTRAINT 51 Го прогласува елементот како само за читање.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_REQUIRED 4b Го прогласува елементот како релевантен.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_RELEVANT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_READONLY 51 Го прогласува елементот како само за читање.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
35 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ALB_DATATYPE 2b Select the data type for the selected item.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_READONLY 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
2e svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3AED_NAME 1b Enter the name of the item.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_CALCULATE 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 51 Го прогласува елементот како само за читање.
31 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3AED_DEFAULT 2c Enter a default value for the selected item.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 4b Го прогласува елементот како релевантен.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_RELEVANT 4b Го прогласува елементот како релевантен.
3d svx%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_CONDITION%3AED_CONDITION 12 Enter a condition.
40 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_CONDITION%3APB_EDIT_NAMESPACES 4f Opens the Form Namespaces dialog where you can add, edit, or delete namespaces.
21 SVX_HID_XFORMS_NAMESPACEITEM_LIST 34 Lists the currently defined namespaces for the form.
3f svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_ADD_NAMESPACE 21 Adds a new namespace to the list.
42 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_DELETE_NAMESPACE 1f Deletes the selected namespace.
40 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_EDIT_NAMESPACE 1d Edits the selected namespace.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive lower bound for values.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XML_DATA_MODEL 43 Select a model from the list of all models in the current document.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BINDING_NAME d1 Select or enter the name of a binding. Selecting the name of an existing binding associates the binding with the form control. Entering a new name creates a new binding and associates it with the form control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_DATA_TYPE 41 Select a data type which the control should be validated against.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive lower bound for values.
21 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_ADD_DATA_TYPE ac Click the button to open a dialog where you can enter the name of a new user-defined data type. The new data type inherits all facets from the currently selected data type.
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_FRACTION_DIGITS 66 Specifies the maximum total number of fractional digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_WHITESPACES f3 Specifies how whitespaces are to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are Preserve, Replace, and Collapse. The semantics follow the definition at http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_TOTAL_DIGITS 5b Specifies the maximum total number of digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive upper bound for values.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_PATTERN 125 Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elseswhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialog.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_LENGTH 30 Specifies the number of characters for a string.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_LENGTH 38 Specifies the maximum number of characters for a string.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive upper bound for values.
24 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_REMOVE_DATA_TYPE 5a Select a user-defined data type and click the button to delete the user-defined data type.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BIND_EXPRESSION 71 Enter the DOM node to bind the control model to. Click the ... button for a dialog to enter the XPath expression.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
13 .uno%3APrintDefault e2 Кликнете на иконата Печати датотека директноза да го печатите активниот документ со стандардните поставувања за печатење.
16 .uno%3ABezier_Unfilled 2b1 Црта мазна Bezier крива. Кликнете каде што сакате да започнува кривата, влечете, отпуштете, и потоа движете го покажувачот каде што сакате да завршува кривата и кликнете. Движете го покажувачот и повторно кликнете за да и додадете на кривата права линија. Кликнете два пати за да завршите со цртањето. За да креирате затворена форма, кликнете два пати на почетната точка на кривата.
10 .uno%3ACircleCut 327 Црта исполнета форма, дефинирана од кружен лак и неговиот дијаметар во тековниот документ. За да нацртате дел од круг, влечете го кругот додека ја постигнете саканата големина, а потоа кликнете за да го дефинирате почетна точка на дијаметарот. Поместете го покажувачот каде што сакате да ја ставите крајната точка од дијаметарот и кликнете. Не мора да кликате на елипсата. За да нацртате дел од елипса задржете го притиснат Shift додека влечете.
18 .uno%3AFreeline_Unfilled 194 Црта произволна линија каде што влечете во тековниот документ. За да ја завршите линијата, отпуштете го копчето на глувчето. За да нацртате затворена форма, отпуштете го копчето на глувчето до почетната точка на линијата.
e .uno%3AEllipse 178 Црта елипса каде што влечете во тековниот документ.Кликнете каде што сакате да нацртате елипса и влечете додека да ја добиете саканата големина. За да нацртате круг, задржете го тастерот Shift додека влечете.
b .uno%3ALine 103 Црта права линија каде што ќе повлечете во тековниот документ. За да ја задржите линијата на 45 степени, задржете го копчето Shift додека влечете.
a .uno%3AArc 2a4 Црта лак во тековниот документ. За да нацртате лак, влечете елипса додека да ја постигнете саканата големина, и потоа кликнете за да ја дефинирате почетната точка на лакот. Позиционирајте го покажувачот каде што сакате да ја поставите крајната точка и кликнете. Не мора да кликнете на елипсата. За да нацртате кружен лак задржете го притиснат тастерот Shift додека влечете.
11 .uno%3AInsertDraw f9 Кликнете за да ја отворите или затворите лентата Цртање , каде што можете да додадете  форми, линии, текст и повици во тековниот документ.
17 .uno%3APolygon_Unfilled 22a Црта линија составена од серии од прави линии. Влечете за да нацртате линија, кликнете за да ја дефинирате крајната точка на линијата и потоа влечете за да нацртате нова линија. Кликнете два пати за да завршите со цртањето. За да креирате затворена форма, кликнете два пати на почетната точка од линијата.
12 .uno%3ADrawCaption 304 Црта линија која завршува со правоаголно балонче со хоризонтална насока на текстот од каде влечете во тековниот документ. Влечете ја страна на балончето за да ја помените неговата големина. За да додадете текст, кликнете на работ од балончето и потоа напишете го или вметнете го Вашиот текстот. За да го измените правоаголното балонче во заоблено, влечете го најголемата аголна страна кога покажувачот ќе се смени во рака.
13 .uno%3AText_Marquee 1af Вметнува анимиран текст со хоризонтална насока на текстот во тековниот документ.  Влечете го полето за текст, потоа напишете го или вметнете го вашиот текст. За да доделите ефект за анимација, изберете Формат - Текст - Анимација на текст.
b .uno%3ARect 1c9 Црта правоаголни каде што повлекувате во тековниот документ. За да нацртате квадрат, држете го притиснат тастерот Shift додека влечете. Кликнете каде што сакате да го поставите аголот на правоаголникот и влечете додека да ја добиете саканата големина.
13 .uno%3AVerticalText 2cb Црта текстуално поле со ветикална насока на текстот каде што влечете во тековниот документ. Кликнете каде било во документот и потоа напишете го или вметнете го текстот. Исто така можете да го поместите покажувачот каде што сакате да го додадете текстот, влечете го полето за текст и потоа напишете го или вметнете го текстот. Ова е достапно само кога е овозможена поддршка за азијски јазици.
f .uno%3ADrawText 20e Црта текстуално поле со хоризонтална насока на текстот каде што влечете во тековниот документ. Влечете го полето за тект за да ја постигнете саканата големина каде било во документот и потоа напишете го или вметнете го текстот. Ротирајте го текстуалното поле за да добиете ротиран текст.
16 .uno%3AVerticalCaption 37a Црта линија која завршува со правоаголно балонче со вертикална насока на текстот од каде влечете во тековниот документ. Влечете ја страна на балончето за да ја промените неговата големина. За да додадете текст, кликнете на работ од балончето и потоа напишете го или вметнете го Вашиот текстот. За да го измените правоаголното балонче во заоблено, влечете го најголемата аголна страна кога покажувачот ќе се смени во рака. Ова е достапно само кога е овозможена поддршка за азијски јазици.
a .uno%3APie 30a Црта исполнета форма, дефинирана од елипсовиден лак и двата негови радиуси во тековниот документ. За да нацртате елипсовидна пита, влечете елипса додека ја постигнете саканата големина, а потоа кликнете за да го дефинирате неговиот прв радиус. Поместете го покажувачот каде што сакате да го ставите вториот радиус и кликнете. Не мора да кликате на елипсата. За да нацртате кружна пита задржете го притиснат Shift додека влечете.
e .uno%3AListBox 26 Креира поле за листа.
11 .uno%3APushbutton 18 Креира копче.
13 .uno%3AMoreControls 43 Го отвара алатникот Повеќе контроли.
f .uno%3ACheckbox 30 Креира поле за означување.
f .uno%3AComboBox 2f Креира комбинирана листа.
15 .uno%3AFormattedField 2d Креира форматирано поле.
d .uno%3AConfig c7 Иконата Контроли на форма отвора алатникот со алатките кои Ви се потребни за да креирате интерактивна форма.
12 .uno%3ARadiobutton 26 Креира поле за избор.
f .uno%3ACombobox 2f Креира комбинирана листа.
b .uno%3AEdit 26 Креира поле за текст.
16 .uno%3AFormDesignTools 3f Го отвара алатникот Дизај на форма
c .uno%3ALabel 38 Креира поле за приказ на текст.
f .uno%3ACheckBox 30 Креира поле за означување.
12 .uno%3ARadioButton 26 Креира поле за избор.
14 .uno%3AConvertToEdit 58 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за текст.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCheckBox 62 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за означување.
17 .uno%3AConvertToNumeric 5b Избраната контрола се претвора во нумеричко поле.
15 .uno%3AConvertToFixed 4c Избраната контрола се претвора во ознака.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCurrency 5a Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за валута.
18 .uno%3AChangeControlType e6 Повикува подмени каде што може да изберете тип на контрола со која ќе ја замените тековно избраната компонента во документот.
15 .uno%3AConvertToRadio 5c Избраната контрола се претвора во копче за опција.
14 .uno%3AConvertToList 58 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за листа.
1c .uno%3AConvertToImageControl 60 Избраната контрола се претвора во контрола за слика.
18 .uno%3AConvertToImageBtn 5a Избраната контрола се претвора во копче со слика.
16 .uno%3AConvertToButton 4a Избраната контрола се претвора во копче.
17 .uno%3AConvertToPattern 56 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за шема.
1b .uno%3AConvertToFileControl 60 Избраната контрола се претвора во избор за датотеки.
19 .uno%3AConvertToFormatted 5f Избраната контрола се претвора во форматирано поле.
14 .uno%3AConvertToDate 58 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за датум.
15 .uno%3AConvertToCombo 61 Избраната контрола се претвора во комбинирана листа.
14 .uno%3AConvertToTime 58 Избраната контрола се претвора во поле за време.
18 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWCOLS_MORE 44 Го повикува дијалогот Покажи  колони.
14 SVX_HID_FM_DELETECOL 41 Ја бриште тековно избраната колона.
12 SVX_HID_FM_HIDECOL 2e Ја крие избраната колона.
14 SVX_HID_FM_CHANGECOL c2 Отвора подмени за избор на податочно поле за замена на избраното податочното полево контролата за табела.
16 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWALLCOLS 6a Кликнете Сите Ако сакате да Ви бидат покажани сите колони.
14 SVX_HID_FM_INSERTCOL b0 Повикува подмену за да го изберете податочното поле за да го придружите на контролата за табела.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_DLG_SHOWGRIDCOLUMNS%3A1 123 Во дијалогот Покажи колони  можете да ги изберете колоните кои сакате да бидат покажани. Држете го притиснат тастерот Shift или Ctrl за да изберете повеќе елементи.
13 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWCOLS 9a Повикува подмени каде што можете да ги изберете колоните кои ќе се покажат повторно.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_FM_PROPDLG_TABCTR 40 Opens a dialog for editing the properties of a selected control.
18 .uno%3AControlProperties 40 Opens a dialog for editing the properties of a selected control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMIN 95 You can determine here a value for the control field to impede the user to enter a lesser value. That means that a lesser value will not be possible.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WIDTH 21 Defines the width of the control.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SELECT_SEQ 3a Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMIN 33 Determines the earliest date that a user can enter.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MIN 31 Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_TIME 16 Sets the default time.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISUALEFFECT 65 Specifies whether Check boxes and Option buttons are displayed in a 3D look (default) or a flat look.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISIBLESIZE bb Specifies the size of scrollbar thumb in "value units". A value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min." ) / 2 would result in a thumb which occupies half of the background area.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRICTFORMAT 5b If the strict format function is activated (Yes), only the allowed characters are accepted.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FORMATKEY 5a Specifies the format code for the control. Click the ... button to select the format code.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDDEN_VALUE 3f You can enter the data that is inherited by the hidden control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMIN 95 You can determine here a value for the control field to impede the user to enter a lesser value. That means that a lesser value will not be possible.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_POSITION 55 Specifies to show or hide the positioning items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ICONSIZE 52 Specifies whether the icons in a selected Navigation Bar should be small or large.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAME 87 On the Properties tab page, specifies the name for the control field. On the Form Properties tab page, specifies the name for the form.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABINDEX 75 The Tab order property determines the order in which the controls are focused in the form when you press the Tab key.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUESTEP 1e Determines spin box intervals.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ANCHOR_TYPE 2b Defines where the control will be anchored.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_NAVIGATION 54 Specifies to show or hide the navigation items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_URL 5e Specifies the URL address that opens when you click an "Open document / web page" button type.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_DATE 16 Sets the default date.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WHEEL_BEHAVIOR 165 Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TRISTATE 77 Specifies whether a check box can also represent ZERO values of a linked database apart from the TRUE and FALSE values.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMAX 54 Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLED 69 If a control field has the property "Enabled" (Yes), the form user will be able to use the control field.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FONT 3a Select the font for the text that is in the control field.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEINCREMENT 5a Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks the arrow icon on the scrollbar.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTISELECTION 36 Allows you to select more than one item in a list box.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LABEL 55 The Label property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SPINVALUE 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDERCOLOR 54 Specifies the border color for controls that have the Border property set to "flat".
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRSYM_POSITION 65 Determines if the currency symbol is displayed before or after the number when using currency fields.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HEIGHT 22 Defines the height of the control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_PRINTABLE 50 Specifies whether you want the control field to appear in a document's printout.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABSTOP 54 The Tabstop property determines if a control field can be selected with the tab key.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ORIENTATION 4d Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation for a scrollbar or spin box.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRINGITEMLIST 54 Defines the list entries visible in the document. Open this list and type your text.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_AUTOCOMPLETE 2d Assigns the AutoFill function to a combo box.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOWTHOUSANDSEP 1e Inserts a thousands separator.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPIN 6e The "Yes" option transforms the control field into a spin button, where corresponding arrow buttons are added.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LITERALMASK 76 Defines the literal mask. The literal mask contains the initial values and is always visible after downloading a form.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MAXTEXTLEN 41 Defines the maximum number of characters that the user can enter.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULTVALUE 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TOGGLE 126 Specifies if a Push Button behaves as a Toggle Button. If you set Toggle to "Yes", you can switch between the "selected" and "not selected" control states when you click the button or press the spacebar while the the control has the focus. A button in the "selected" state appears "pressed in".
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_RECORDMARKER 73 Specifies whether the first column is displayed with row labels, in which the current record is marked by an arrow.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLE_VISIBLE 68 Defines whether the control will be visible in live mode. In design mode, the control is always visible.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ROWHEIGHT 32 Specifies the row height of a table control field.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMAX 54 Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRENCYSYMBOL 3e You can enter a character or a string for the currency symbol.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VSCROLL 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_READONLY 49 Determines if the control is read-only (Yes) or if it can be edited (No).
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WORDBREAK 24 Displays text on more than one line.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDEINACTIVESELECTION 6c Specifies whether a text selection on a control remains selected when a the focus is no longer on a control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEFORMAT 37 Determine here the desired format for the date readout.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONY 3e Defines the Y position of the control, relative to the anchor.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGEPOSITION 4f Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGE_URL 6f The Graphics property specifies the graphic's path and file name that you want to have displayed on the button.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SYMBOLCOLOR 53 Specifies the color for symbols on controls, for example the arrows on a scrollbar.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HSCROLL 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MAX 31 Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPURL 83 Specifies a batch label in URL spelling which refers to a help document and which can be called with the help of the control field.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TAG 4d Specifies additional information or a descriptive text for the control field.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_BUTTON 73 The Default button property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_FILTERSORT 5f Specifies to show or hide the filtering and sorting items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCALEIMAGE 31 Resizes the image to fit the size of the control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT_DELAY 3d Specifies the delay in milliseconds between repeating events.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEDEFAULT 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDER 62 Determines if the field's border should be displayed "Without frame", with a "3-D look" or "Flat".
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SCROLLVALUE 29 Sets the default value for the scrollbar.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_SCROLLBARS 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPININCREMENT 55 Determines intervals to add or subtract with each activation of the spin box control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FOCUSONCLICK 5e If you set this option to "Yes", the Push Button receives the focus when you click the button.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPTEXT 5b Provides the option of entering a help text that will be displayed as a tip on the control.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT 7d Specifies if the action of a control such as a spin button repeats when you click the control and hold the mouse button down.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BUTTONTYPE 51 The Action property determines the action that occurs when you activate a button.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXTTYPE cf Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALIGN 4f Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATIONBAR 59 Specifies whether to display the navigation bar on the lower border of the table control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MIN 95 You can determine here a value for the control field to impede the user to enter a lesser value. That means that a lesser value will not be possible.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BLOCKINCREMENT 5e Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks next to the slider at the scrollbar.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EDITMASK 75 Defines the edit mask. By specifying a character code you can determine what the user can enter in the control field.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTILINE cf Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_FRAME 6b Specifies the target frame to display the document that is opened by the "Open document / web page" action.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ECHO_CHAR b5 If the text box is used as a password input, enter the ASCII-code of the display character. This character is displayed instead of the characters typed by the user for the password.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_RECORDACTIONS 50 Specifies to show or hide the action items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONX 3e Defines the X position of the control, relative to the anchor.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BACKGROUNDCOLOR 2f Sets the background color of the control field.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMIN 32 Determines the minimum time that a user can enter.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEFORMAT 37 You can define the desired format for the time display.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLLABEL 32 Specifies the source for the label of the control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINECOUNT 8b Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the "Dropdown" option.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEEND_FORMAT 5e For text fields, select the line end code to be used when writing text into a database column.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DECIMAL_ACCURACY 4c Determines the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXT 34 Sets the default text for a text box or a combo box.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DROPDOWN 42 Specifies whether the combo box should dropdown (Yes) or not (No).
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FILTERPROPOSAL f9 While designing your form, you can set the "Filter proposal" property for each text box in the Data tab of the corresponding Properties dialog. In subsequent searches in the filter mode, you can select from all information contained in these fields.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLSOURCE 49 Specifies the field of the data source table to which the control refers.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EMPTY_IS_NULL 34 Defines how an empty string input should be handled.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REFVALUE d3 You can enter a reference value for the web form, which will be remitted to a server when sending the form. With database forms, the value entered is written in the database field, assigned to the control field.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CELL_EXCHANGE_TYPE 4a Select the mode of linking a list box with a linked cell on a spreadsheet.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUND_CELL 85 Specifies the reference to a linked cell on a spreadsheet. The live state or contents of the control are linked to the cell contents.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCETYPE 3e Determines the data to fill the lists in list and combo boxes.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCE b3 With database forms, specifies the data source for the list content of the form-element. This field can be used to define a value list for documents without a database connection.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LIST_CELL_RANGE 5a Enter a cell range that contains the entries for a list box or combo box on a spreadsheet.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_UNCHECKEDREFVALUE 112 Check boxes and radio buttons in Spreadsheets can be bound to cells in the current document. If the control is enabled, the value you enter in Reference value (on) is copied to the cell. If the control is disabled, the value from Reference value (off) is copied to the cell.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUNDCOLUMN a9 Use an index to specify the table field or table SQL query to link to the field that is provided under Data field. Valid values for this property are 1, 2, 3, and so on.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CHANGED 82 The Changed event takes place when the control loses the focus and the content of the control has changed since it lost the focus.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEENTERED 4c The Mouse inside event takes place if the mouse is inside the control field.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSLOST 4c The When losing focus event takes place if a control field looses the focus.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYUP 5c The Key release event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSGAINED 51 The When receiving focus event takes place if a control field receives the focus.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ACTIONPERFORMED 3b The When initiating event occurs when an action is started.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_TEXTCHANGED 54 The Text modified event takes place if you enter or modify a text in an input field.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ITEMSTATECHANGED 59 The Item status changed event takes place if the status of the control field has changed.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEDRAGGED 76 The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed at the same time.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEEXITED 50 The Mouse outside event takes place when the mouse is outside the control field.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEPRESSED 6f The Mouse button pressed event occurs if the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEMOVED 41 The Mouse moved event occurs if the mouse moves over the control.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYTYPED 5b The Key pressed event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSERELEASED 71 The Mouse button released event occurs if the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEACTIONPERFORMED 4d This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control.
15 .uno%3AFormProperties 61 In this dialog you can specify, among others,  the data source and the events for the whole form.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SUBMIT_ENCODING 32 Specifies the type for encoding the data transfer.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SUBMIT_METHOD 40 Specifies the method to transfer the completed form information.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONING 53 The Before record change event occurs before the current record pointer is changed.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_SUBMITTED 40 The Before submitting event occurs before the form data is sent.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEPARAMETER 63 The Fill parameters event occurs when the form to be loaded has parameters that must be filled out.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADED 4a The When reloading event occurs directly after the form has been reloaded.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RESETTED 3d The After resetting event occurs after a form has been reset.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CONFIRMDELETE 51 The Confirm deletion event occurs as soon as data has been deleted from the form.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ERROROCCURRED 58 The Error occurred event is activated if an error occurs when accessing the data source.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_AFTERUPDATE 72 The After update event occurs after the control content changed by the user has been written into the data source.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ROWCHANGE 58 The After record action event occurs directly after the current record has been changed.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONED 60 The After record change event occurs directly after the current record pointer has been changed.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADING 3e The Before reloading event occurs before the form is reloaded.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVERESETTED 37 The Prior to reset event occurs before a form is reset.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADED 73 The When unloading event occurs directly after the form has been unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADING 67 The Before unloading event occurs before the form is unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_LOADED 46 The When loading event occurs directly after the form has been loaded.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEROWCHANGE 4b The Before record action event occurs before the current record is changed.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_EDITS 27 Determines if the data can be modified.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATION 4d Specifies whether the navigation functions in the lower form bar can be used.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATAENTRY 70 Determines if the form only allows the addition of new data (Yes) or if it allows other properties as well (No).
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MASTERFIELDS 80 If you create a subform, enter the data field of the parent form responsible for the synchronization between parent and subform.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CYCLE 3f Determines how the navigation should be done using the tab key.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_DELETIONS 26 Determines if the data can be deleted.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_ADDITIONS 20 Determines if data can be added.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SLAVEFIELDS 6b If you create a subform, enter the variable where possible values from the parent form field can be stored.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATASOURCE 37 Defines the data source to which the form should refer.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SORT_CRITERIA 9c Specifies the conditions to sort the data in the form. The specification of the sorting conditions follows SQL rules without the use of the ORDER BY clause.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCE fd Determines the content to be used for the form. The content can be an existing table or a query (previously created in the database), or it can be defined by an SQL-statement. Before you enter a content you have to define the exact type in Content type.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCETYPE 8a Defines whether the data source is to be an existing database table or query, or if the form is to be generated based on an SQL statement.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ESCAPE_PROCESSING 46 Specifies whether the SQL statement is to be analyzed by %PRODUCTNAME.
15 HID_TABORDER_CONTROLS 76 Lists all controls in the form. These controls can be selected with the tab key in the given order from top to bottom.
10 .uno%3ATabDialog 79 In the Tab Order dialog you can modify the order in which control fields get the focus when the user presses the tab key.
f .uno%3AAddField 48 Opens a window where you can select a database field to add to the form.
11 SVX_HID_FIELD_SEL 88 The field selection window lists all database fields of the table or query that was specified as the data source in the Form Properties.
1e .uno%3ASwitchControlDesignMode b1 Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
1d .uno%3ASwitchXFormsDesignMode b1 Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
15 SVX_HID_FM_NEW_HIDDEN bc Creates a hidden control in the selected form that is not visible on screen and is hidden from the user. A hidden control serves to include data that is transmitted together with the form.
e SVX_HID_FM_NEW 6f Adds new elements to the form. The Add function can only be called if a form is selected in the Form Navigator.
16 SVX_HID_FORM_NAVIGATOR 68 The Form Navigator contains a list of all created (logical) forms with the corresponding control fields.
1a .uno%3AShowPropertyBrowser 34 Starts the Properties dialog for the selected entry.
13 SVX_HID_FM_NEW_FORM 23 Creates a new form in the document.
15 .uno%3AShowFmExplorer 84 Opens the Form Navigator. The Form Navigator displays all forms and subforms of the current document with their respective controls.
18 SVX_HID_FM_RENAME_OBJECT 1c Renames the selected object.
11 SVX_HID_FM_DELETE 1b Deletes the selected entry.
13 .uno%3AOpenReadOnly 3a Opens forms in Design Mode so that the form can be edited.
11 .uno%3AUseWizards 51 Specifies whether to start the wizard automatically when inserting a new control.
15 .uno%3ADesignerDialog 76 Specifies whether to show or hide the Styles and Formatting window, which is where you can assign and organize Styles.
11 .uno%3AStyleApply 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
16 .uno%3AStyleApplyState 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
15 SVX_HID_STYLE_LISTBOX 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
13 .uno%3ACharFontName 4d Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly.
11 .uno%3AFontHeight 5d Allows you to choose between different font sizes from the list, or to enter a size manually.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionLeftToRight 2f Specifies the horizontal direction of the text.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionTopToBottom 2d Specifies the vertical direction of the text.
16 .uno%3ADecrementIndent 8a Click the Decrease Indent icon to reduce the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the previous tab position.
16 .uno%3AIncrementIndent 0 
10 .uno%3ABackColor 14d Applies the current highlight color to the background of a text selection. If no text is selected, click the Highlighting icon, select the text that you want to highlight, and then click the Highlighting icon again. To change the highlight color, click the arrow next to the Highlighting icon, and then click the color that you want.
16 .uno%3ABackgroundColor ab Click to open a toolbar where you can click a background color for a paragraph. The color is applied to the background of the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceIncrease 5f Click the Increase Spacing icon to increase the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceDecrease 5f Click the Decrease Spacing icon to decrease the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
15 .uno%3ASetBorderStyle 71 Click the Borders icon to open the Borders toolbar, where you can modify the border of a sheet area or an object.
10 .uno%3ALineStyle 5b Click this icon to open the Line Style toolbar, where you can modify the border line style.
15 .uno%3AFrameLineColor 86 Click the Line Color (of the border) icon to open the Border Color toolbar, which enables you to change the border color of an object.
17 .uno%3AToggleAnchorType 2f Allows you to switch between anchoring options.
14 .uno%3AOptimizeTable 99 Отвора алатник кој содржи функции за оптимизирање на редовите и колоните во табела.
13 .uno%3ALineEndStyle 69 Opens the Arrowheads toolbar. Use the symbols shown to define the style for the end of the selected line.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectRotateMode 1c Rotates the selected object.
12 .uno%3AObjectAlign 2b Modifies the alignment of selected objects.
13 .uno%3AOutlineRight 50 Moves the selected paragraph down one level in a numbering or bullets hierarchy.
15 .uno%3ADecrementLevel 50 Moves the selected paragraph down one level in a numbering or bullets hierarchy.
12 .uno%3AOutlineLeft 50 Moves the selected paragraph up one level in the numbering or bullets hierarchy.
15 .uno%3AIncrementLevel 50 Moves the selected paragraph up one level in the numbering or bullets hierarchy.
d .uno%3AMoveUp 39 Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it.
10 .uno%3AOutlineUp 39 Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it.
f .uno%3AMoveDown 38 Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it.
12 .uno%3AOutlineDown 38 Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it.
14 .uno%3ADefaultBullet 5b Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs, or removes them from bulleted paragraphs.
e .uno%3AOpenUrl 9f Loads a document specified by an entered URL. You can type a new URL, edit an URL, or select one from the list. Displays the full path of the current document.
a SID_RELOAD 3a Replaces the current document with the last saved version.
d .uno%3AReload 3a Replaces the current document with the last saved version.
21 SFX2_HID_HELP_TEXT_SELECTION_MODE d6 You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink.
e .uno%3AEditDoc 3b Enables you to edit a read-only document or database table.
15 .uno%3ASelectTextMode d6 You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink.
11 .uno%3ADSBEditDoc 3d Turns the edit mode for the current database table on or off.
b .uno%3AStop 5e Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click to interrupt all loading processes.
f SID_BROWSE_STOP 5e Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click to interrupt all loading processes.
18 .uno%3AExportDirectToPDF 4a Exports the current document directly as PDF. No settings dialog is shown.
15 .uno%3AStatusGetTitle 42 Displays information about the active %PRODUCTNAME Basic document.
18 .uno%3AStatusGetPosition 7d Displays the current cursor position in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The row number is specified, then the column number.
1a SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_NAME 2a Assigns a name to an Internet URL or file.
19 SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_URL 55 Allows you to either type a URL, or insert a URL from a document using drag-and-drop.
13 .uno%3ASetHyperlink 3c Inserts a hyperlink from the current URL into your document.
1c SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_TARGET 36 Specifies the target frame type for the specified URL.
1c CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_CANCEL_BTN 21 Closes the dialog without saving.
16 .uno%3ARemoveHyperlink 2a Removes the hyperlink, leaving plain text.
1c .uno%3AOpenHyperlinkOnCursor 2b Opens the hyperlink at the cursor position.
14 .uno%3AEditHyperlink 1b Opens the Hyperlink dialog.
16 .uno%3AHyperlinkDialog 3e Opens a dialog that enables you to create and edit hyperlinks.
1b CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_RESET_BTN 39 Resets the entries in the dialog to their original state.
1c CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_CHOICECTRL 2c Select the type of hyperlink to be inserted.
18 CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_OK_BTN 22 Applies the data to your document.
1c .uno%3ACopyHyperlinkLocation 20 Copies the URL to the clipboard.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ABTN_SCRIPT 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
38 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_FTP 19 Creates an FTP hyperlink.
42 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_SCRIPT 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
1f CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_APPLY 3f Inserts the target in the Target field of the Hyperlink dialog.
36 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
1f CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_CLOSE 64 Once the hyperlink has been completely entered, click on Close to set the link and leave the dialog.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_INTERNET 1a Creates an http hyperlink.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ABTN_BROWSE 3d Opens a web browser, into which you can load the desired URL.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACBX_ANONYMOUS 3d Allows you to log in to the FTP address as an anonymous user.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_INET_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
1e CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_TREE 48 Specifies the position in the target document where you wish to jump to.
3b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
3e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_SCRIPT 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
3b cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ABTN_SCRIPT 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
3d cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_LOGIN 41 Specifies your login name, if you are working with FTP addresses.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_INTERNET 1a Creates an http hyperlink.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_PASSWD 3f Specifies your password, if you are working with FTP addresses.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_MAIL_PATH 67 Specifies the full URL of the addressee, in the form mailto:name@provider.com or news:group.server.com.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_SUBJECT 57 Specifies the subject that is inserted in the subject line of the new message document.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ARB_LINKTYP_MAIL 36 Assigns the specified e-mail address to the hyperlink.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ABTN_ADRESSBOOK 27 Hides or shows the data source browser.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ARB_LINKTYP_NEWS 28 Assigns a news address to the hyperlink.
16 CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MAIL 36 Assigns the specified e-mail address to the hyperlink.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_BROWSE 24 Opens the Target in Document dialog.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TARGET_DOC 4c Specifies a target for the hyperlink into the document specified under Path.
41 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_FILEOPEN 33 Opens the Open dialog, where you can select a file.
19 CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_DOC_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
45 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_DOCUMENT_TYPES 2d Specifies the file type for the new document.
3f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_PATH_NEWDOC 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
42 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITNOW 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
1d CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
42 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_CREATE 3a Opens the Select Path dialog, where you can select a path.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITLATER 48 Specifies that the document is created but it is not immediately opened.
d .uno%3APageUp 30 Moves back to the previous page in the document.
13 .uno%3APreviousPage 30 Moves back to the previous page in the document.
f .uno%3APageDown 2f Moves forward to the next page in the document.
f .uno%3ANextPage 2f Moves forward to the next page in the document.
15 .uno%3AGoToStartOfDoc 28 Moves to the first page of the document.
10 .uno%3AFirstPage 28 Moves to the first page of the document.
13 .uno%3AGoToEndOfDoc 27 Moves to the last page of the document.
f .uno%3ALastPage 27 Moves to the last page of the document.
f .uno%3ACloseWin 1a Closes the current window.
22 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_EDIT_DATABASE 72 Ја отвара избраната датотека од база на податоци за уредување.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_ADMINISTRATE b3 Opens a dialog to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialog opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialog box.
18 .uno%3ADSBrowserExplorer 36 Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_RENAME_ENTRY c6 To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name.. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled.
1e DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_CLOSECONN 5b Closes the connection to the data source. See Tools - Options - Data sources - Connections.
f .uno%3ASortDown 39 Sorts the data of the selected field in descending order.
11 .uno%3AAutoFilter 4e Filters the records based on the content of the currently selected data field.
17 .uno%3ARemoveFilterSort 51 Cancels the filter settings and displays all of the records in the current table.
28 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_REFRESH_REBUILDVIEW 6b Rebuilds the view of the database table. Use this command when you have changed the structure of the table.
e .uno%3ARefresh 1d Refreshes the displayed data.
13 .uno%3ASbaBrwInsert 59 Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position.
39 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_HEADL_COLNMS 5a Uses the field names of the database table as headings for each of the text table columns.
36 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ALB_TBL_DB_COLUMN 42 Specifies the database columns to be inserted into the text table.
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ONE_TO 44 Moves the selected database field into the Table column(s) list box.
3b sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ONE_FROM 45 Removes the selected database field from the Table column(s) list box
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_AS_TABLE 50 Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as a table.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_HEADL_EMPTY 32 Inserts an empty heading line into the text table.
36 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ACB_TABLE_HEADON 4d Specifies whether to insert a heading line for the columns in the text table.
3a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_DBFMT_FROM_DB 1d Accepts the database formats.
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ALL_TO 43 Moves all listed database fields into the Table column(s) list box.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3APB_TBL_AUTOFMT 79 Opens the AutoFormat dialog, in which you can select format styles that are immediately applied when inserting the table.
3b sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ALL_FROM 3e Removes all database fields from the Table column(s) list box.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3APB_TBL_FORMAT 7e Opens the Table Format dialog, which enables you to define the table properties such as borders, background, and column width.
37 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ALB_DBFMT_FROM_USR 63 Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted.
3b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_DBFMT_FROM_USR 63 Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted.
32 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ALB_TABLE_COL 3c Lists all database columns to be inserted into the document.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_AS_TEXT 4d Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as text.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertContent 4b Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records.
28 .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FInsertContent 4b Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records.
11 .uno%3AFilterCrit 28 Allows you to set the filtering options.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_FILTERCRIT 28 Allows you to set the filtering options.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_FIELD3 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP1 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
2a sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_VAL2 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE1 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP3 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
1f .uno%3ADataFilterStandardFilter 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE2 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOND2 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_FIELD1 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD2 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COND1 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD3 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_VAL3 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
2a sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_VAL1 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD1 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COND3 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
28 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_OP2 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_FIELD2 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOND3 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COND2 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP2 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE3 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
28 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_OP1 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
10 .uno%3AOrderCrit 31 Specifies the sort criteria for the data display.
1a DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ORDERCRIT 31 Specifies the sort criteria for the data display.
13 CUI_HID_SEARCH_TEXT 3c Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list.
13 CUI_HID_SEARCH_CASE 53 Specifies that upper and lower case are taken into consideration during the search.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BTN_CLOSE 5d Closes the dialog. The settings of the last search will be saved until you quit %PRODUCTNAME.
19 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BTN_SEARCH 1d Starts or cancels the search.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_POSITION 45 Specifies the relationship of the search term and the field contents.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SINGLEFIELD 28 Searches through a specified data field.
10 .uno%3ARecSearch 23 Searches database tables and forms.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ALB_FORM 46 Specifies the logical form in which you want the search to take place.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORNULL 39 Specifies that fields will be found that contain no data.
1d CUI_HID_SEARCH_FIELDSELECTION 28 Searches through a specified data field.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORNOTNULL 36 Specifies that fields will be found that contain data.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BACKWARD 63 Specifies that the search process will run in reverse direction, from the last to the first record.
16 CUI_HID_SEARCH_REGULAR 22 Searches with regular expressions.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_STARTOVER 77 Restarts the search. A forward search restarts with the first record. A backwards search restarts with the last record.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_FORMATTER 57 Specifies that all field formats are considered when searching in the current document.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_ALLFIELDS 1c Searches through all fields.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_WILDCARD 27 Allows a search with a * or ? wildcard.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORTEXT 3c Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list.
11 .uno%3AFormFilter 4d Prompts the database server to filter the visible data by specified criteria.
13 .uno%3AFormFiltered 3f Switches between the filtered and unfiltered view of the table.
15 .uno%3AViewFormAsGrid 39 Activates an additional table view when in the form view.
2d .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FDocumentDataSource 57 Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document.
1c .uno%3ADSBDocumentDataSource 57 Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document.
14 .uno%3ASbaExecuteSql 31 Runs the SQL query and displays the query result.
13 .uno%3ADBClearQuery 3f Clears the query and removes all tables from the design window.
24 DBACCESS_HID_JOINSH_ADDTAB_TABLELIST 3b Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window.
20 DBACCESS_HID_JOINSH_ADDTAB_CLOSE 1d Closes the Add Tables dialog.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3ARB_CASE_QUERIES 13 Shows only queries.
39 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3ARB_CASE_TABLES 12 Shows only tables.
f .uno%3AAddTable 3b Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window.
35 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3APB_ADDTABLE 25 Inserts the currently selected table.
19 .uno%3ADBChangeDesignMode 36 Displays the design view or the SQL view of the query.
13 .uno%3ASbaNativeSql 8c In Native SQL mode you can enter SQL commands that are not interpreted by $[officename], but are instead passed directly to the data source.
16 .uno%3ADBViewFunctions 5c Displays the "Function" row in the lower part of the design view of the Query Design window.
17 .uno%3ADBViewTableNames 3f Displays the "Table" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
14 .uno%3ADBViewAliases 3f Displays the "Alias" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
17 .uno%3ADBDistinctValues 66 Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query in the current column by the parameter DISTINCT.
13 .uno%3ASelectObject 35 Allows you to select objects in the current document.
11 .uno%3ASourceView 9b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. To view the HTML source of a new document, you must first save the new document as an HTML document.
11 SW_HID_SOURCEVIEW 9b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. To view the HTML source of a new document, you must first save the new document as an HTML document.
14 .uno%3APageStyleName 86 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style from the already assigned styles.
13 .uno%3ALayoutStatus 86 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style from the already assigned styles.
16 .uno%3AStatusPageStyle 86 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style from the already assigned styles.
10 .uno%3AStateZoom 2f Specifies the current page display zoom factor.
11 .uno%3AInsertMode 5d Displays the current insert mode. You can toggle between INSRT = insert and OVER = overwrite.
14 .uno%3ASelectionMode 36 Here you can switch between different selection modes.
1a .uno%3AStatusSelectionMode 36 Here you can switch between different selection modes.
13 .uno%3AModifyStatus ac If changes to the document have not yet been saved on the hard drive, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
15 .uno%3AModifiedStatus ac If changes to the document have not yet been saved on the hard drive, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
f .uno%3AModified ac If changes to the document have not yet been saved on the hard drive, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
12 .uno%3ACurrentTime 1a Displays the current time.
12 .uno%3ACurrentDate 1a Displays the current date.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterToolbox 5e Opens the Graphic Filter bar, where you can use various filters on the selected graphic image.
4f cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_POSTER%3ADLG_FILTERPOSTER_NUM_POSTER 43 Specifies the number of colors to which the image is to be reduced.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_CBX_EDGES 2f Enhances, or sharpens, the edges of the object.
4d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_MTR_WIDTH 2a Defines the width of the individual tiles.
1c .uno%3AGraphicFilterSolarize 29 Opens a dialog for defining solarization.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterRelief 27 Displays a dialog for creating reliefs.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterInvert 59 Inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a grayscale image.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSobel 28 Displays the image as a charcoal sketch.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterMosaic 46 Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color.
1f .uno%3AGraphicFilterRemoveNoise 24 Removes single pixels from an image.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPoster 38 Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors.
4e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_MTR_HEIGHT 2b Defines the height of the individual tiles.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSepia 2e Opens a dialog for setting the aging function.
4f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SOLARIZE%3ADLG_FILTERSOLARIZE_CBX_INVERT 45 Specifies whether the pixels to be solarized are also to be inverted.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterSharpen 23 Increases the contrast in an image.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterSmooth 21 Softens the contrast in an image.
55 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SOLARIZE%3ADLG_FILTERSOLARIZE_MTR_THRESHOLD 5b Specifies the degree of brightness, in percent, above which the pixels are to be solarized.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPopart 26 Converts an image to a pop-art format.
4b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SEPIA%3ADLG_FILTERSEPIA_MTR_SEPIA 5a Defines the intensity of aging, in percent. The higher the value, the more the image ages.
f .uno%3AGrafMode a2 Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object. The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will not be changed, only the view of the object.
e .uno%3AGrafRed 51 Specifies the amount of red RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
10 .uno%3AGrafGreen 53 Specifies the amount of green RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
f .uno%3AGrafBlue 4b Specifies the amount of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic.
14 .uno%3AGrafLuminance 39 Specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object.
13 .uno%3AGrafContrast 3e Specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image.
10 .uno%3AGrafGamma 72 Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the brightness of the midtone values.
17 .uno%3AGrafTransparence 31 Specifies the transparency in the graphic object.
13 .uno%3AGrafAttrCrop 26 Opens a dialog to crop pixel graphics.
b .uno%3ACrop 3b Drag any of the eight cropping handles to crop the picture.
12 .uno%3ABasicShapes 57 Opens the Basic Shapes toolbar which you can use to insert graphics into your document.
12 .uno%3AArrowShapes 55 Opens the Block Arrows toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
14 .uno%3ACalloutShapes 51 Opens the Callouts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
14 .uno%3AColorSettings 4b With the Color toolbar you can edit some properties of the selected object.
16 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes 53 Opens the Flowcharts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
1d .uno%3AFontworkGalleryFloater 64 The icon opens the Fontwork Gallery from which you can insert graphical text art into your document.
17 .uno%3AFormatPaintbrush 74 Copies the formatting of the selected text or object and applies the formatting to another text selection or object.
11 .uno%3AStarShapes 4e Opens the Stars toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
13 .uno%3ASymbolShapes 56 Opens the Symbol Shapes toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
18 SFX2_HID_HELP_TABCONTROL cd Навигацискиот панел на прозорецот од помошта содржи страници со јазичиња Содржина, Индекс, Најди и Обележувачи.
23 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BOOKMARKS 54 Ја додава оваа страница во вашите обележувачи
2c sfx2%3AComboBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH aa Внесете го текстот за кој што сакате да пребарате или изберете елемент од текстот во листата.
15 SFX2_HID_HELP_LISTBOX a6 Полето за листа на самиот врв е каде што можете да изберете други модули на помош за %PRODUCTNAME.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3APB_FIND 55 Го наоѓа следното појавување на бараниот поим.
11 .uno%3AHelpOnHelp 56 Обезбедува краток преглед на Системот за помош
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_BACKWARDS 63 Пребарува назад од тековната позиција на покажувачот.
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_INDEX 4d Го сокрива и покажува навигацискиот панел
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_PRINT 35 Ја печати тековната страница
30 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WHOLEWORDS 32 Наоѓа само целосни зборови.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_MATCHCASE 50 Разликува меѓу текст со големи и мали букви.
22 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BACKWARD 47 Се враќа назад на претходната страница
26 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_SEARCHDIALOG 4f Го отвора дијалогот Најди на оваа страница.
30 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WRAPAROUND a0 Ја пребарува целата Помошна страница, почнувајќи од тековната позиција на покажувачот.
21 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_FORWARD 3a Оди напред на следната страница
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_START 71 Се преместува на првата страница од тековниот наслов на Помош
15 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOX 7d Алатникот содржи важни функции за контролирање на Системот за помош
2a sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_HELP_INDEX%3ACB_INDEX 95 Двоен клик на елемент или напишете го зборот што сакате да го најдете во индексот.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_INDEX%3APB_OPEN_INDEX 4f Кликнете за да ја прикажете избраната тема.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ALB_RESULT 109 Ги прикажува заглавјата на страниците најдени во вашето пребарување со целосен текст. За да прикажете страница, двоен клик на нејзиниот елемент.
33 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3APB_OPEN_SEARCH 4c Го прикажува елементот избран во листата.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3APB_SEARCH 93 Кликнете за да започне пребарувањето со целосен текст за поимот што го внесовте.
2c sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 9b Внесете го поимот за пребарување овде. Пребарувањето не разликува мали/големи букви.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ACB_FULLWORDS d3 Одредува дали да се изврши точно пребарување за зборот што го внесовте. Непотполните зборови нема да бидат најдени.
2b sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ACB_SCOPE 99 Одредува дали само да пребарува во заглавјата на документ за поимот за пребарување.
1c SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_OPEN 48 ја прикажува избраната тема од помошта.
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_DELETE 3f го избришува избраниот обележувач
36 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_HELP_ADDBOOKMARK%3AED_BOOKMARK_TITLE b4 Го прикажува името на обележаната страница. Исто така можете да напишете ново име за обележувачот.
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_RENAME 63 отвора дијалог за внесување друго име за обележувачот
31 sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_HELP_BOOKMARKS%3ALB_BOOKMARKS f9 Двојно кликање на обележувач и притискање на копчето Enter ја отвора доделената страница во помош. Десен клик го отвора контекстното мени.
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_TABPAGE_CONTENTS b5 Ги прикажува главните теми од помошта, подредени на сличен начин како папки во менаџер на датотеки.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltUp 60 Го накривува избраниот објект нагоре за пет степени.
1f .uno%3AExtrusionLightingFloater 5e Го отвора прозорецот Осветлување на извлекувањето.
17 .uno%3AExtrusion3DColor 4e Го отвора алатникот Боја на извлекувањето.
19 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltRight 62 Го накривува избраниот објект надесно за пет степени.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltLeft 60 Го накривува избраниот објект налево за пет степени.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltDown 60 Го накривува избраниот објект надолу за пет степени.
1e .uno%3AExtrusionSurfaceFloater 58 Го отвора прозорецот Површина на извлекувањето.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionToggle 68 Ги вклучува и исклучува 3Д-ефектите за избраните објекти.
3c svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_EXTRUSION_DEPTH%3AMTR_DEPTH 3e Внесете длабочина на извлекување.
20 .uno%3AExtrusionDirectionFloater 50 Го отвора прозорецот Насока на извлекување.
1c .uno%3AExtrusionDepthFloater 56 Го отвора прозорецот Длабочина на извлекување.
1a SVX_HID_POPUP_LINEEND_CTRL 1e Изберете насока.
14 .uno%3AAutoPilotMenu 63 Guides you through creating business and personal letters, faxes, agendas, presentations, and more.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_NEXT 3a Saves the current settings and continues to the next page.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDNEXT 3a Saves the current settings and continues to the next page.
38 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.letter.CallWizard%3Fstart 28 Starts the wizard for a letter template.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDPREV 46 Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_BACK 46 Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotLetter 28 Starts the wizard for a letter template.
1c WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_CREATE 68 According to your selections, the wizard creates a new document template and saves it on your hard disk.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_NEXT 3a Saves the current settings and continues to the next page.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_PREVIOUS 46 Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKBUSINESSPAPER 93 Specifies whether paper is used that already contains an imprinted logo, address, or footer line. The Wizard shows the Letterhead layout page next.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVATELETTER 34 Specifies that you want to create a personal letter.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTBUSINESSLETTER 3d Specifies that you want to create a business letter template.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVOFFICIALSTYLE 2b Select the design for your letter template.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 2b Select the design for your letter template.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVOFFICIALLETTER 3b Specifies that you want to create a formal personal letter.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 2b Select the design for your letter template.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE1 45 Specifies whether you want to create a personal or a business letter.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOX 33 Sets the object distance from the left page margin.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERFOOTER 6f Specifies that a footer area is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a footer.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSHEIGHT 21 Defines the height of the object.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYLOGO 66 Specifies that a logo is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a logo.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOY 32 Sets the object distance from the top page margin.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMFOOTERHEIGHT 81 Enter the height of the footer area that is already imprinted on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print in that area.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOWIDTH 20 Defines the width of the object.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKCOMPANYRECEIVER 8a Specifies that your own address is imprinted in small size above the sender address. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address in small size.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSWIDTH 20 Defines the width of the object.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE2 57 Allows you to specify the elements that are already imprinted on your letterhead paper.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYADDRESS 6e Specifies that an address is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSX 33 Sets the object distance from the left page margin.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSY 32 Sets the object distance from the top page margin.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOHEIGHT 21 Defines the height of the object.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEADDRESSRECEIVER 3c Includes a small size return address on the letter template.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEFOOTER 29 Includes a footer on the letter template.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTSALUTATION 56 Includes a salutation on the letter template. Select the salutation from the list box.
1d WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSELOGO 27 Includes a logo on the letter template.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTLETTERNORM 4b Select a country in order to use a typical letter layout from that country.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESUBJECT 2f Includes a subject line on the letter template.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESIGNS 4c Includes a line with references to a business letter on the letter template.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE3 38 Defines the items to be included in the letter template.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESALUTATION 56 Includes a salutation on the letter template. Select the salutation from the list box.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEBENDMARKS 2b Includes fold marks on the letter template.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTGREETING 59 Includes a complimentary close on the letter template. Select the text from the list box.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEGREETING 59 Includes a complimentary close on the letter template. Select the text from the list box.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERCITY 29 Specifies the address data of the sender.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTATE_TEXT 29 Specifies the address data of the sender.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERNAME 21 Specifies the name of the sender.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 48 Specifies that placeholder fields are inserted into the letter template.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTREET 2b Specifies the street address of the sender.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE4 2f Specifies the sender and recipient information.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 3e Address database fields are inserted into the letter template.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERDEFINE 33 Use the address data from the following text boxes.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 45 Use the address data from Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User data.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERPOSTCODE 29 Specifies the address data of the sender.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 30 Select to suppress the footer on the first page.
1c WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTFOOTER 24 Enter the text for the footer lines.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE5 39 Specifies the information to include in the footer space.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 2e Includes page numbers in your letter template.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTPATH 68 Enter the path and file name for the template, or click the ... button to select the path and file name.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTCREATELETTER 5c Saves and closes the template, and then opens a new untitled document based on the template.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CMDPATH 68 Enter the path and file name for the template, or click the ... button to select the path and file name.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTTEMPLATENAME 2d Specifies the title of the document template.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTMAKECHANGES 31 Saves the template and keeps it open for editing.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE6 50 Specifies where and under which name you want to save the document and template.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CREATE b0 According to your selections, the wizard creates a document template and saves it. A new document based on the template appears in the work area, with the filename "UntitledX".
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_NEXT 8a The wizard saves the current settings and goes to the next page. The Next button will become inactive once you have reached the last page.
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_BACK c8 Click the Back button to view the settings chosen on the previous page. The current settings will not be modified or deleted if you click this button. Back will be active from the second page onwards.
35 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.fax.CallWizard%3Fstart 1b Opens the wizard for faxes.
13 .uno%3AAutoPilotFax 1b Opens the wizard for faxes.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 1f Specifies the predefined style.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE1 27 Defines the style of your fax document.
20 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTPRIVATEFAX 29 Creates a fax template for a private fax.
23 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 1f Specifies the predefined style.
21 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTBUSINESSFAX 30 Creates a fax template for a business-style fax.
19 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESUBJECT 18 Includes a company logo.
1a WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEGREETING 46 Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box.
1c WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESALUTATION 16 Includes a date field.
19 WIZARDS_HID_LSTSALUTATION 46 Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTREET 12 Includes a footer.
20 WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 3f Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERNAME 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE2 29 Specifies the fax elements to be printed.
18 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEFOOTER 3f Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box.
17 WIZARDS_HID_LSTGREETING 18 Includes a subject line.
1b WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERDEFINE 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE3 3a Specifies the receiver and sender information for the fax.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FILETEMPLATEPATH 45 Inserts database fields for a later mail merge with the fax document.
18 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERFAX 1e Enter the sender address data.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTTEMPLATENAME 84 Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERCITY 76 Select to enter the address data in the following text boxes. The data is inserted as normal text in the fax document.
1e WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 1e Enter the sender address data.
20 WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 1e Enter the sender address data.
1f WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 1e Enter the sender address data.
1a WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTATE 84 Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data.
15 WIZARDS_HID_TXTFOOTER 1e Enter the sender address data.
22 WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 1e Enter the sender address data.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE4 1a Specifies the footer data.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE5 27 Defines the template name and location.
38 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.agenda.CallWizard%3Fstart 38 Starts the wizard to help you create an agenda template.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotAgenda 38 Starts the wizard to help you create an agenda template.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_LIST_PAGEDESIGN 29 Select the page design from the list box.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE1 27 Specifies a page design for the agenda.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_CHK_MINUTES 4d Prints out a page on which you can write down the minutes during the meeting.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TITLE 23 Specifies the title of the meeting.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_DATE 22 Specifies the date of the meeting.
20 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_LOCATION 26 Specifies the location of the meeting.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE2 3d Specifies the date, time, title, and location of the meeting.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TIME 22 Specifies the time of the meeting.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE3 3e Specifies the headings that you want to include in the agenda.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_READ 2e Specifies whether to print a Please read line.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_BRING 2f Specifies whether to print a Please bring line.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_NOTES 28 Specifies whether to print a Notes line.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_MEETING_TYPE 34 Specifies whether to print the type of meeting line.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_FACILITATOR 46 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the facilitator.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_ATTENDEES 44 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the attendees.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_NOTETAKER 45 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the note taker.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_OBSERVERS 44 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the observers.
27 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_RESOURCEPERSONS 4b Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the resource persons.
22 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_TIMEKEEPER 45 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the timekeeper.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE4 30 Specifies the names to be printed on the agenda.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_CALLED_BY 58 Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the person who called the meeting.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_DOWN 21 Moves the current topic row down.
1a WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_UP 1f Moves the current topic row up.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE5 3a Specifies the topics to be printed on the agenda template.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_REMOVE 1e Removes the current topic row.
25 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_RESPONSIBLE_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_TOPIC_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_INSERT 34 Inserts a new empty topic row above the current row.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_MINUTES_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_MAKECHANGES 53 Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens the template for further editing.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_BTN_TEMPLATEPATH 4c Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE6 36 Choose the title and location for the agenda template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_CREATEAGENDA 5f Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens a new agenda document based on that template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATENAME 2a Specifies the name of the agenda template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATEPATH 4c Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template.
24 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ABUT_LAST 44 Returns to the previous step without deleting your current settings.
24 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ABUT_NEXT 34 Accepts the new settings and moves to the next page.
c slot%3A10425 7f Use the wizard to interactively create a presentation. With the wizard, you can modify the sample templates to suit your needs.
1d .uno%3AAutoPilotPresentations 7f Use the wizard to interactively create a presentation. With the wizard, you can modify the sample templates to suit your needs.
16 .uno%3ANewPresentation 7f Use the wizard to interactively create a presentation. With the wizard, you can modify the sample templates to suit your needs.
18 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_OPEN 100 Lists the presentations that you created and saved to the Templates directory that is specified under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. To edit the layout and formatting of a presentation with the wizard, select the presentation, and then click Next.
29 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3APB_PAGE1_OPEN 2a Click Open to see a file selection dialog.
26 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_STARTWITH 71 Specifies that you only want the Wizard to start when you expressly request it with File - Wizard - Presentation.
2b sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_EMPTY 23 Creates a new (empty) presentation.
1d SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_TEMPLATES 3a Lists the available template categories for presentations.
2a sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_OPEN 34 Displays a list of previously created presentations.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_TEMPLATE 3d Opens a list box containing various modifiable presentations.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE1 44 Specifies the presentation type and allows you to select a template.
1a SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_REGION 3a Lists the available template categories for presentations.
24 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PREVIEW 36 Specifies that templates appear in the preview window.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM2 2c Creates a presentation to be used as slides.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM4 34 Creates a presentation that can be printed on paper.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM3 3d Creates a presentation to be used as overhead transparencies.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM5 2e Uses the original page format of the template.
21 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGETEMPLATES 5e Allows you to select a slide design for the presentation you selected on page 1 of the Wizard.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM1 2c Creates a computer screen presentation only.
28 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE2_LAYOUT 5e Allows you to select a slide design for the presentation you selected on page 1 of the Wizard.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE2 5e Allows you to select a slide design for the presentation you selected on page 1 of the Wizard.
27 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE3_SPEED 1c Determines the effect speed.
27 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PAGE3_LOGO 5f Specifies whether to display the $[officename] logo during the pause between each presentation.
28 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE3_EFFECT 2a Specifies an effect for your presentation.
2a sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE3_LIVE 60 The Default option runs the presentation as a full screen presentation with the specified speed.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE3 46 Assigns special effects to your presentation and determines its speed.
2a sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_ASS%3ATMF_PAGE3_BREAK 2c Defines the pause between each presentation.
29 sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_ASS%3ATMF_PAGE3_TIME 2f Defines the duration of each presentation page.
2b sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE3_KIOSK 49 Runs the presentation automatically, and restarts it again after a break.
28 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKTOPIC 29 Specifies the topic of your presentation.
37 sd%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKINFORMATION 66 Use this field for further thoughts and ideas that you would like to cover later in your presentation.
27 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKNAME 30 Specifies your name or the name of your company.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE4 30 Specifies your name or the name of your company.
2a sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PAGE5_SUMMARY 2f Creates a summary of all presentation contents.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE5 2f Creates a summary of all presentation contents.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDFINISH 39 Click to create the form without answering further pages.
1a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_DIALOG 28 Activates the Wizard for creating forms.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN_PK_SELECTED 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVESELECTED 36 Click to remove the selected field from the right box.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEALL 29 Click to add all fields to the right box.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVESELECTED 36 Click to remove the selected field from the right box.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_LBTABLES 42 Specifies the table or query that you want to create the form for.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVESELECTED 36 Click to remove the selected field from the right box.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_DOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVEALL 2e Click to remove all fields from the right box.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVESELECTED 34 Click to add the selected field(s) to the right box.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVESELECTED 34 Click to add the selected field(s) to the right box.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVESELECTED 34 Click to add the selected field(s) to the right box.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
2d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVESELECTED 34 Click to add the selected field(s) to the right box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVESELECTED 36 Click to remove the selected field from the right box.
17 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_UP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVESELECTED 34 Click to add the selected field(s) to the right box.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP_PK_SELECTED 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEALL 29 Click to add all fields to the right box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSSELECTED 2d Displays the fields that are in the new form.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVEALL 2e Click to remove all fields from the right box.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVEALL 2e Click to remove all fields from the right box.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERREMOVESELECTED 36 Click to remove the selected field from the right box.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVEALL 2e Click to remove all fields from the right box.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEALL 29 Click to add all fields to the right box.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEALL 29 Click to add all fields to the right box.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTSELECTMANUALLY 3d Click to add a subform based on a manual selection of fields.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTONEXISTINGRELATION 35 Click to add a subform based on an existing relation.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_lstRELATIONS 32 Select the relation on which the subform is based.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKCREATESUBFORM 18 Select to add a subform.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSSELECTED 3d Displays all fields that will be included in the new subform.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_LBTABLES 44 Specifies the table or query for which the subform is to be created.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK2 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK1 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK4 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK3 77 Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK4 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK3 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK2 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK1 77 Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNLEFT 1c The labels are left-aligned.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPLABELED 47 Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels above the field.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPJUSTIFIED 31 Arranges the labels above the corresponding data.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTABLESTYLE 2d Aligns the database fields in a tabular form.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDLEFTLABELED 51 Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels to the left of the fields.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNRIGHT 1d The labels are right-aligned.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOMODIFICATION 20 Select to disallow editing data.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOADDITION 23 Select to disallow adding new data.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTDISPLAYALLDATA 4f Creates a form that can be used to display existing data and to enter new data.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTNEWDATAONLY 37 Creates a form that is only used for entering new data.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNODELETION 21 Select to disallow deleting data.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LSTSTYLES 26 Specifies the page style for the form.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDSIMPLEBORDER 2b Specifies that the field borders look flat.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMD3DBORDER 30 Specifies that the field borders have a 3D look.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNOBORDER 29 Specifies that the fields have no border.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTMODIFYFORM 3f Saves the form, and opens it in edit mode to change the layout.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTWORKWITHFORM 4a Saves the form, and opens it as a form document to enter and display data.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_TXTPATH 1f Specifies the name of the form.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DOCUMENT_CREATE_REPWIZ 2a Activates the wizard for creating reports.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVESELECTED 39 Click to transfer the selected field(s) to the right box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVESELECTED 36 Click to remove the selected field from the right box.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSAVAILABLE 4a Displays the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_LBTABLES 40 Select the table or query for which the report is to be created.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVEALL 2e Click to remove all fields from the right box.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSSELECTED 38 Displays all fields that are included in the new report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVEALL 2e Click to transfer all fields to the right box.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_6 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_5 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_4 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_3 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_2 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_1 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_PREGROUPINGDEST b4 Lists the fields by which the report will be grouped. To remove one level of grouping, select the field name, then click the < button. You may select up to four levels of grouping.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDGROUP 54 Click to move a field from the left box to the right box, or double-click the field.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDUNGROUP 54 Click to move a field from the right box to the left box, or double-click the field.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_GROUPING c6 Lists the fields from your selection on the previous page of the Wizard. To group the report by a field, select the field name, then click the > button. You may select up to four levels of grouping.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND1 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND1 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND2 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND4 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND2 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT4 37 Select an additional field by which to sort the report.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT1 33 Select the first field by which to sort the report.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND3 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND3 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND4 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT2 37 Select an additional field by which to sort the report.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT3 37 Select an additional field by which to sort the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PAGELAYOUT 8a Defines a page layout for the report. The page layouts are loaded from template files, which assign a header, footer, and page background.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PORTRAIT 33 Selects a portrait page orientation for the report.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_LANDSCAPE 34 Selects a landscape page orientation for the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_DATALAYOUT 65 Defines a set of styles for the report. The styles assign fonts, indents, table background, and more.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTSTATDOCUMENT 89 Saves the report as a static report. When you open a static report, it will always display the data from the time the report was created.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTEDITTEMPLATE 44 When you click Finish, the report will be saved and opened for edit.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_TITLE 43 Specifies the title that is printed at the title line of each page.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTDYNTEMPLATE 6f Saves the report as a template. When you open a dynamic report, it will display with the current data contents.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTUSETEMPLATE 30 When you click Finish, the report will be saved.
33 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_DEL_DESIGN 31 Deletes the selected design from the design list.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_OLD_DESIGN 81 Loads an existing design from the design list to use as a starting point for the steps to follow on the next pages of the Wizard.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE1 35 Creates a new design in the next pages of the Wizard.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_NEW_DESIGN 35 Creates a new design in the next pages of the Wizard.
2d sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_DESIGNS 1e Displays all existing designs.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_PERL 3d Used by WebCast export to create HTML pages and Perl scripts.
34 sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_DURATION_TMF 32 Defines the amount of time for each slide display.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_ASP 99 When you select the ASP option, the WebCast export creates ASP pages. Note that the HTML presentation can only be offered by a web server supporting ASP.
2c sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_NOTES 2d Specifies that your notes are also displayed.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_STANDARD 2e Creates standard HTML pages from export pages.
26 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_URL 6f Specifies the URL (absolute or relative), where the created HTML presentation on the web server has been saved.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_WEBCAST 52 In a WebCast export, automatic scripts will be generated with Perl or ASP support.
26 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CGI 48 Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) for the generated Perl scripts.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_ENDLESS 55 Automatically restarts the HTML presentation after the last slide has been displayed.
30 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_FRAMES b2 Creates standard HTML pages with frames. The exported page will be placed in the main frame, and the frame to the left will display a table of contents in the form of hyperlinks.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CHG_AUTO 8b The page transition takes place automatically after the specified period of time elapses and does not depend on the presentation's contents
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_KIOSK 87 Creates a default HTML presentation as a kiosk export, in which the slides are automatically advanced after a specified amount of time.
35 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CHG_DEFAULT d4 The slide transition depends on the timing that you set for each slide in the presentation. If you set a manual page transition, the HTML presentation introduces a new page by pressing any key from your keyboard.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE2 2e Creates standard HTML pages from export pages.
28 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_INDEX 66 Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) to be entered by the viewer in order to see the presentation.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CONTENT 27 Creates a title page for your document.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_JPG 25 The files are exported as JPEG files.
30 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_SLD_SOUND 60 Specifies that the sound files that are defined as an effect for slide transitions are exported.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE3 79 The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_GIF 23 The files are exported as GIF files
2e sd%3AComboBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_QUALITY 35 Specifies the compression factor of the JPEG graphic.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_PNG 79 The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_3 3a Select a high resolution for a high quality slide display.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_2 3d Select the medium resolution for a medium-sized presentation.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_1 5f Select the low resolution to keep the file size small, even for presentations with many slides.
2b sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_WWW_EDIT 49 Specifies your homepage. A hyperlink will be inserted in the publication.
29 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_AUTHOR 2f Specifies the name of the publication's author.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE4 2f Specifies the name of the publication's author.
30 sd%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_MISC 36 Specifies additional text to appear on the title page.
2d sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_EMAIL_EDIT 1d Specifies the e-mail address.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE5 30 Inserts only text hyperlinks instead of buttons.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE5_TEXTONLY 30 Inserts only text hyperlinks instead of buttons.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_DEFAULT 34 Uses the default colors of the viewer's Web Browser.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_LINK 55 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the hyperlink color of the presentation.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_BACK 56 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the background color of the presentation.
33 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_DOCCOLORS 43 Determines the colors from the styles used in the current document.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_TEXT 50 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the text color of the presentation.
2e sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_VLINK 58 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the visited link color of the presentation.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_USER 43 Allows you to define your own colors for some presentation objects.
2e sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_ALINK 57 Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the active link color of the presentation.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE6 43 Determines the colors from the styles used in the current document.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_GRIDWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_DIALOG 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
27 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FImportWizard.Main.Main 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDHELP 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_OPTMSDOCUMENTS 54 Converts documents in Microsoft Word format *.doc into OpenDocument *.odt documents.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKLOGFILE 56 Creates a log file in your work directory showing which documents have been converted.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKEXCEL 55 Converts documents in Microsoft Excel format *.xls into OpenDocument *.ods documents.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKWORD 54 Converts documents in Microsoft Word format *.doc into OpenDocument *.odt documents.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKPOWERPOINT 5a Converts documents in Microsoft PowerPoint format *.ppt into OpenDocument *.odp documents.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENTRECURSE 61 Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDDOCUMENTPATH 43 Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATERECURSE 61 Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENT 31 Indicates that the documents are to be converted.
2d WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDDOCUMENTPATHSELECT 2a Opens a dialog to select the desired path.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBDOCUMENTPATH 34 Specifies the directory containing the source files.
2d WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDTEMPLATEPATHSELECT 2a Opens a dialog to select the desired path.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATE 2d Specifies that templates are to be converted.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDTEMPLATEPATH 43 Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBTEMPLATEPATH 34 Specifies the directory containing the source files.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON3 3c All currency cells in the active document will be converted.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBSOURCE 4b Indicates the directory or the name of the single document to be converted.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_DIALOG 8a Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euros.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBHELP 22 Activates the help for the dialog.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKRECURSIVE 48 Specifies whether all subfolders of the selected directory are included.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBBACK 30 Returns to the first page of the Euro Converter.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_COMBOBOX1 32 Specifies the currency to be converted into euros.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON4 5b All currency cells in the range selected before the converter was called will be converted.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKBOX1 1d Converts the entire document.
14 .uno%3AEuroConverter 8a Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euros.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBGOON 16 Starts the conversion.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBTARGETOPEN 4f Opens a dialog in which you can select a directory to hold the converted files.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKPROTECT bc Specifies that sheet protection will be disabled during conversion and thereafter re-enabled. If sheet protection is covered by a password, you will see a dialog for entering the password.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKTEXTDOCUMENTS 57 Converts currency amounts found in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON1 36 All cells with the selected Cell Styles are converted.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_LISTBOX1 32 Displays the ranges to be converted from the list.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBTARGET 4b Specifies the folder and path in which the converted files are to be saved.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBCANCEL 1a Closes the Euro Converter.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBSOURCEOPEN 3b Opens a dialog to select the desired directory or document.
31 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FEuro.AutoPilotRun.StartAutoPilot 8a Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euros.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBDIR 6b Converts all $[officename] Calc and $[officename] Writer documents and templates in the selected directory.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON2 3f All currency cells in the active spreadsheet will be converted.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBFILE 2a Converts a single $[officename] Calc file.
3a extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_MORK 4f Select this option if you already use an address book in Seamonkey or Netscape.
41 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_THUNDERBIRD 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
3b extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_MACAB 4b Select this option if you already use an address book in OS X Address book.
3f extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION 43 Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution.
3a extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_LDAP 46 Select this option if you already have address data on an LDAP server.
21 .uno%3AAutoPilotAddressDataSource 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
49 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION_GROUPWISE 43 Select this option if you already use an address book in Groupwise.
c slot%3A10934 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_FINISH 44 Establishes the connection to the data source and closes the dialog.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_CANCEL 32 Exits the wizard without implementing any changes.
44 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OUTLOOKEXPRESS 4a Select this option if you already use an address book in KDE Address book.
3d extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OUTLOOK 4a Select this option if you already use an address book in KDE Address book.
39 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_KAB 4a Select this option if you already use an address book in KDE Address book.
3b extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OTHER 60 Select this option if you want to register another data source as address book in $[officename].
44 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION_LDAP 48 Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution LDAP.
2c extensions%3ATabPage%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
4b extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_ADMININVOKATION%3APB_INVOKE_ADMIN_DIALOG 3a Calls a dialog in which you can enter additional settings.
3d extensions%3AListBox%3ARID_PAGE_TABLESELECTION%3ALB_TABLELIST 59 Specifies the table that is to serve as the address book for the $[officename] templates.
36 extensions%3AEdit%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3AET_DATASOURCENAME 1f Specifies the data source name.
37 extensions%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3ACB_REGISTER_DS db Registers the newly created database file in %PRODUCTNAME. The database will then be listed in the data source window (F4). If this check box is cleared, the database will be available only by opening the database file.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BROWSECONN 2b Specifies the location using a file dialog.
34 extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3APB_BROWSE 2b Specifies the location using a file dialog.
49 extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_FIELDMAPPING%3APB_INVOKE_FIELDS_DIALOG 34 Opens the Templates: Address Book Assignment dialog.
35 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.web.CallWizard%3Fstart 46 The Web Wizard helps you to maintain a web site on an Internet server.
16 WIZARDS_HID0_WEBWIZARD 46 The Web Wizard helps you to maintain a web site on an Internet server.
18 WIZARDS_HID1_BTN_DEL_SES 1e Deletes the selected settings.
19 WIZARDS_HID1_LST_SESSIONS 7c Select the settings that you want to load and then click Load. To start the wizard with the default settings, select "none".
1b WIZARDS_HID2_LST_DOC_EXPORT 44 Select the file format that you want to export the selected file to.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_DESC 2e Enter a description for the selected document.
18 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_ADD_DOC db Opens a dialog where you can select the files that you want to have to your web site. The order of the list determines the order in which the hyperlinks to the documents are displayed on the index page of your web site.
1b WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_AUTHOR 37 Enter the name of the author for the selected document.
1a WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_TITLE 88 Enter the title for the selected document. The title appears as a hyperlink to the selected document on the index page of your web site.
18 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_REM_DOC 28 Removes the selected file from the list.
15 WIZARDS_HID2_LST_DOCS f9 Lists the documents that you want to publish to your web site. The wizard can convert %PRODUCTNAME documents to HTML, PDF, or, in some cases, Flash format before the documents are uploaded. All other files are uploaded in their original file format.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG9 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG8 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG7 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG6 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG3 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG2 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG5 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG4 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG1 25 Select the layout for the index page.
20 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_UP_DATE 49 Includes the date of the last time a file was modified on the index page.
21 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_FILENAME 3b Includes the file names of the documents on the index page.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_640 3d Optimizes the web site for a 640x480 pixel screen resolution.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_FORMAT 33 Displays the format of the files on the index page.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_PAGES 3c Displays the number of pages in your site on the index page.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_F_ICON 30 Displays the file format icon on the index page.
24 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_DESCRIPTION 44 Includes the summary information of the documents on the index page.
20 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_CR_DATE 3f Includes the creation dates of the documents on the index page.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_1024 3e Optimizes the web site for a 1024x768 pixel screen resolution.
1d WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_SIZE 36 Displays the file size in kilobytes on the index page.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_AUTHOR 4d Includes the names of the people who created the documents on the index page.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_800 3d Optimizes the web site for a 800x600 pixel screen resolution.
16 WIZARDS_HID5_BTN_ICONS 54 Select the Icons that you want to use for the navigation elements on the index page.
17 WIZARDS_HID5_LST_STYLES 2b Select the color scheme for the index page.
18 WIZARDS_HID5_BTN_BACKGND 2d Select a Background image for the index page.
18 WIZARDS_HID_BG_BTN_OTHER 4e Opens a file open dialog to select a background image file for the index page.
e WIZARDS_HID_BG 36 Specifies a background image for the Web Wizard style.
17 WIZARDS_HID_BG_BTN_NONE 30 Clears the background image from the index page.
17 WIZARDS_HID_IS_BTN_NONE 28 Clears the icon set from the index page.
e WIZARDS_HID_IS 54 Select an icon set for navigation on HTML presentations documents in the Web Wizard.
1b WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_EMAIL 57 Enter the e-mail address for the index page. The address is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1e WIZARDS_HID6_DATE_SITE_CREATED 53 Enter the creation date for the index page. The date is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1f WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_COPYRIGHT 58 Enter the copyright notice for the index page. The notice is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1e WIZARDS_HID6_DATE_SITE_UPDATED 53 Enter the modified date for the index page. The date is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1b WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_TITLE 5f Enter the title for the index page. This element is displayed on the title bar of web browsers.
1a WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_DESC 56 Enter a description for the index page. The description is stored in an HTML meta tag.
16 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_LOCAL d9 Uploads your index page and files to a local directory. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_FTP c6 Uploads your files to an FTP server. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
1e WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_LOCAL d9 Uploads your index page and files to a local directory. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
16 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_LOCAL 22 Opens a dialog to select a folder.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_FTP 67 Opens the FTP Connection dialog where you can edit and test the connection settings for the FTP server.
1c WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_ZIP 104 Adds your index page and files to a compressed archive file and uploads the file to your web site. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
15 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_SAVE 25 Enter the name for the settings file.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_ZIP 46 Opens a dialog where you can specify the location of the archive file.
15 WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_SAVE 35 Saves the settings that you specified in this wizard.
18 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_PREVIEW 48 Opens your web page in the default web browser of your operating system.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_FTP c6 Uploads your files to an FTP server. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_ZIP 104 Adds your index page and files to a compressed archive file and uploads the file to your web site. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_TXT_PATH 57 Enter the location of a directory on the FTP server where you want to store your files.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_BTN_PATH 51 Opens a dialog where you can specify the FTP server directory to store the files.
14 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_TEST 33 Tests the FTP connection with the current settings.
14 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_PASS 3d Enter the password that is required to access the FTP server.
f WIZARDS_HID_FTP 44 Edit and test the FTP server connection settings for the Web Wizard.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_USERNAME 3e Enter the user name that is required to access the FTP server.
16 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_SERVER 2f Enter the name or IP address of the FTP server.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ORDER 66 If you click the cell, you can select among the sorting options: ascending, descending and not sorted.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FIELD 7c Enter the name of the data field that you referred to in the Query. All settings made in the lower rows refer to this field.
1c DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_CRIT 51 Specifies the criteria by which the content of the data field should be filtered.
26 DBACCESS_HID_QUERY_EDIT_JOINCONNECTION 16 Edit Joint Properties.
2d dbaccess%3AComboBox%3ADLG_SAVE_AS%3AET_SCHEMA 49 Enter the name of the schema that is assigned to the query or table view.
20 DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FUNCTION 2b Select a function to run in the query here.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_TABLE 4b The corresponding database table of the selected data field is listed here.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_QRYDGNCRIT 26 Select conditions to define the query.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ALIAS 8d Specifies an alias. This alias will be listed in a query instead of the field name. This makes it possible to use user-defined column labels.
1a DBACCESS_HID_CTL_QRYDGNTAB 50 Double-click fields to add them to the query. Drag-and-drop to define relations.
1f DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_VISIBLE 5a If you mark the Visible property for a data field, that field will be visible in the query
28 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_SAVE_AS%3AET_TITLE 2a Enter the name of the query or table view.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_JOINTYPE 2d Specifies the link type of the selected link.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_RIGHT_TABLE 35 Specifies two different tables that you want to join.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_LEFT_TABLE 35 Specifies two different tables that you want to join.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_JOIN_CONTROL f7 Inserts the keyword NATURAL into the SQL statement that defines the relation. The relation joins all columns that have the same column name in both tables. The resulting joined table contains only one column for each pair of equally named columns.
2f dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_OLDPASSWORD 17 Enter the old password.
33 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD_REPEAT 1d Enter the new password again.
2c dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD 17 Enter the new password.
1c sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fusered 23 Specifies the name of the new user.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_DEFAULT 3c Specifies the value that is the default in new data records.
29 DBACCESS_HID_TABLEDESIGN_TABED_PRIMARYKEY 4f If this command has a check mark, the data field in this line is a primary key.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_TYPECELL 19 Specifies the field type.
21 DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_BACKGROUND 32 This area is where you define the table structure.
25 DBACCESS_HID_TABLE_DESIGN_HELP_WINDOW 14 Displays help texts.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT_SAMPLE 41 Displays the format code that you can select with the ... button.
1b DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT 2a This button opens the Field Format dialog.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TABLEDESIGN_INSERTROWS 96 Inserts an empty row above the current row, if the table has not been saved. Inserts an empty row at the end of the table if the table has been saved.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_NAMECELL 84 Specifies the name of the data field. Note the database restrictions, such as the length of the name, special characters and spaces.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_COMMENTCELL 22 Specifies an optional description.
32 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN%3APB_CLOSE 12 Closes the dialog.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_FIELD 54 Displays the a list fields in the current table. You can select more than one field.
14 .uno%3ADBIndexDesign 4a The Index Design dialog allows you edit the indexes for the current table.
31 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN%3ACB_UNIQUE 3e Specifies whether the current index allows only unique values.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_SAVEINDEX 2b Saves the current index in the data source.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_INDEXLIST 46 Displays the available indexes. Select an index from the list to edit.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_DROPINDEX 1a Deletes the current index.
28 dbaccess%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN 4a The Index Design dialog allows you edit the indexes for the current table.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_RENAMEINDEX 1a Renames the current index.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_NEWINDEX 14 Creates a new index.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_RESETINDEX 50 Resets the current index to the setting that it had when the dialog was started.
2c DBACCESS_HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_SORTORDER 1a Determines the sort order.
1c DBACCESS_HID_CTL_RELATIONTAB 57 Here you can link together tables from the current database through common data fields.
14 .uno%3ADBAddRelation 3c Allows you to define and edit a relation between two tables.
29 DBACCESS_HID_RELATIONDIALOG_LEFTFIELDCELL 4a The names of the tables selected for the link appear here as column names.
2a DBACCESS_HID_RELATIONDIALOG_RIGHTFIELDCELL 4a The names of the tables selected for the link appear here as column names.
1d DBACCESS_HID_RELDLG_KEYFIELDS 28 Defines the key fields for the relation.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_WIZ_TABLENAME_EDIT 1e Specifies a name for the copy.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_APPENDDATA 40 Appends the data of the table to be copied to an existing table.
34 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_VIEW b4 If the database supports Views, you can select this option only when a query is copied in a table container. This option enables you to see and edit a query as a normal table view.
30 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3AET_KEYNAME 46 Specifies a name for the primary key generated. This name is optional.
33 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_DEF 40 Copies only the table definition and not the corresponding data.
3b dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ACB_PRIMARY_COLUMN 4a Automatically generates a primary key data field and fills it with values.
37 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_DEFDATA 29 Creates a 1:1 copy of the database table.
45 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3ALB_NEW_COLUMN_NAMES 3e Lists the fields that you want to include in the copied table.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMN_LH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
3e dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMNS_LH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
3e dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMNS_RH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
45 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3ALB_ORG_COLUMN_NAMES b8 Lists the available data fields that you can include in the copied table. To copy a data field, click its name, and then click > button. To copy all of the fields, click the >> button.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMN_RH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
21 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_BOOL_DEFAULT 2c Select the default value for a Yes/No field.
43 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3ALB_NEW_COLUMN_NAMES 43 Lists the data fields that will be included in to the copied table.
35 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3APB_AUTO 23 Enables automatic type recognition.
19 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_TYPE 14 Select a field type.
18 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_LEN 32 Enter the number of characters for the data field.
37 dbaccess%3ANumericField%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3AET_AUTO 40 Enter the number of lines to use for automatic type recognition.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_TEXT_LEN 32 Enter the number of characters for the data field.
1a DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_SCALE 7a Enter the number of decimal places for the data field. This option is only available for numerical or decimal data fields.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_COLUMNNAME 54 Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name.
36 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3APB_ALL 2b Selects all of the data fields in the list.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_UP 35 Moves the selected entry up one position in the list.
28 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_NAMEMATCHING_COLS_AVAIL 168 Lists the data fields in the source table. To include a data field from the source table in the destination table, select the check box in front of the data field name. To map the contents of a data field in the source table to a different data field in the destination table, click the data field in the source table list, and then click the up or down arrow.
37 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3APB_NONE 2a Clears all of the check boxes in the list.
43 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_UP_RIGHT 35 Moves the selected entry up one position in the list.
45 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_DOWN_RIGHT 37 Moves the selected entry down one position in the list.
3f dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_DOWN 37 Moves the selected entry down one position in the list.
29 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_NAMEMATCHING_COLS_ASSIGN a0 Lists the possible data fields in the destination table. Only the data fields that are selected in the source table list will be included the destination table.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SQL92CHECK 89 Only allows names that use characters that conform to the SQL92 naming constraints in the data source. All other characters are rejected.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_USECATALOG b2 Uses the current data source of the Catalog. This is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. If the ODBC data source is a dBase driver, leave this check box clear.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_ODBC_OPTIONS 56 Use this text field to enter additional optional driver settings if this is necessary.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_RETRIEVE_AUTO 63 Enter an SQL statement that returns the last auto-incremented value for the primary key data field.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 70 Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_AUTORETRIEVEENABLED 67 Enables $[officename] support of auto-incremented data fields for the current ODBC or JDBC data source.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_INDICIES 61 Opens the Indexes dialog, where you can organize the table indexes in the current dBase database.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SHOWDELETED 7f Displays all the records in a file, including those marked as deleted. If you select this check box, you cannot delete records.
33 dbaccess%3AComboBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ACB_TABLES 31 Select the database table that you want to index.
36 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_REMOVE 3a Moves the selected table indexes to the Free Indexes list.
39 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_REMOVEALL 38 Moves all of the table indexes to the Free Indexes list.
38 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ALB_TABLEINDEXES 3a Lists the current indexes for the selected database table.
36 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_ADDALL 38 Moves all of the free indexes to the Table Indexes list.
33 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_ADD 33 Moves the selected index to the Table Indexes list.
37 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ALB_FREEINDEXES 3b Lists the available indexes that you can assign to a table.
2f dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3ALB_HISTORY 6a Lists the previously executed SQL commands. To run a command again, click the command, and then click Run.
34 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3AME_STATUS 48 Displays the results, including errors, of the SQL command that you ran.
31 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3AME_SQL 3a Enter the SQL administration command that you want to run.
32 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3APB_EXECUTE 40 Runs the command that you entered in the Command to execute box.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL 49 Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.
d .uno%3ASortup 5b Sorts the list of table names in ascending order starting at the beginning of the alphabet.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_TBLGRANTS 4c Displays and lets you edit the database access rights for the selected user.
1e DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBCHGPWD 3d Changes the current user password for accessing the database.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBUSER 34 Adds a new user for accessing the selected database.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBUSERDELETE 1a Removes the selected user.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_LBUSER 32 Select the user whose settings you want to modify.
34 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_TRANSACTIONLOG 3a Displays the path and the name of the TRANSACTIONLOG file.
2e dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_FREESIZE 53 Displays the amount of free space (in megabytes) that is available in the database.
2a dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_SIZE 36 Displays the full size (in megabytes) of the database.
39 dbaccess%3ANumericField%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_MEMORYUSING 42 Displays the amount of used space in the database as a percentage.
31 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3ALB_DATADEVS 38 Displays the path and the name of the DATADEVSPACE file.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_SYSDEVSPACE 37 Displays the path and the name of the SYSDEVSPACE file.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_USR a1 Enter the name of the domain user that is used by Adabas internally. Normally, the default settings for the name and password of the domain user are not changed.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSPWD 11 Enter a password.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CACHE_SIZE 2e Enter the size of the data cache in megabytes.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CONPWD 11 Enter a password.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE 25 Enter the path for the data DEVSPACE.
2b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG_SIZE 34 Enter the size of the transaction file in megabytes.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CONUSR cb Enter the name of a user that you want to give limited control to modify some parameters of the database. Normally, the default settings for the name and the password of the control user are not changed.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DBNAME 1e Type the name of the database.
29 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE_SIZE 4d Enter the size of the database in megabytes here. The maximum size is 100 MB.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBDATADEVSPACE 48 Locate the directory where you want to save the file, and then click OK.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBTRANSACTIONLOG 48 Locate the directory where you want to save the file, and then click OK.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DOMAINPWD 11 Enter a password.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSUSR 2d Enter the name of the database administrator.
25 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBSYSDEVSPACE 48 Locate the directory where you want to save the file, and then click OK.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSDEVSPACE 27 Enter the path for the system DEVSPACE.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG 2c Enter the path for the transaction log file.
2a DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHECK_REQUIRED_FIELDS d8 When you enter a new record or update an existing record in a form, and you leave a field empty which is bound to a database column which requires input, then you will see a message complaining about the empty field.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_IGNOREINDEXAPPENDIX 2d Creates an index with ASC or DESC statements.
1f HID_DSADMIN_PRIMARY_KEY_SUPPORT 5f Enable to overrule Base's heuristics used to detect whether the database supports primary keys.
1b HID_DSADMIN_ESCAPE_DATETIME 35 Use date/time literals that conform to ODBC standard.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BOOLEANCOMPARISON 3b Select the type of Boolean comparison that you want to use.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_ENABLEOUTERJOIN 5c Use escape sequences for outer joins. The syntax for this escape sequence is {oj outer-join}
25 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_APPENDTABLEALIAS 39 Appends the alias to the table name in SELECT statements.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SCHEMA 37 Allows you to use the schema name in SELECT statements.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DOSLINEENDS 6d Select to use the CR + LF code pair to end every text line (preferred for DOS and Windows operating systems).
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_PARAMETERNAMESUBST 44 Replaces named parameters in a data source with a question mark (?).
26 HID_DSADMIN_AS_BEFORE_CORRELATION_NAME 9b Some databases use the keyword "AS" between a name and its alias, while other databases use a whitespace. Enable this option to insert AS before the alias.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL 49 Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CATALOG b7 Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBase driver.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_IGNOREDRIVER_PRIV 43 Ignores access privileges that are provided by the database driver.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHARSET 54 Select the character set that you want to use to view the database in $[officename].
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SPECIAL_MESSAGE 38 Select the type of database that you want to connect to.
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLCLASS 49 Enter the name of the JDBC driver class that connects to the data source.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_PB_TESTMYSQLCLASS 3c Tests the database connection through the JDBC driver class.
3c dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3APAGE_CONNECTION%3ACB_PASSWORD_REQUIRED 3b Enter the password that is required to access the database.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CALC_PATH 4e Enter the path to the spreadsheet document that you want to use as a database.
2e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLDBNAME 1f Enter the name of the database.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_PATH 3e Enter the path to the directory that contains the dBASE files.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FLAT_PATH 38 Enter the path to the text files that the database uses.
3b dbaccess%3APushButton%3APAGE_CONNECTION%3APB_TESTCONNECTION 38 Tests the database connection with the current settings.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_DATABASE_WIZARD 57 The Database Wizard creates a database file that contains information about a database.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_GETEXISTINGDATABASE 49 Select to create a database document for an existing database connection.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DSTYPE 3e Select the database type for the existing database connection.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ALB_DOCUMENTLIST 86 Select a database file to open from the list of recently used files. Click Finish to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ARB_OPENEXISTINGDOC 62 Select to open a database file from a list of recently used files or from a file selection dialog.
36 dbaccess%3APushButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3APB_OPENDOCUMENT a6 Opens a file selection dialog where you can select a database file. Click Open or OK in the file selection dialog to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard.
36 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_CREATEDBDATABASE 20 Select to create a new database.
36 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_RB_REGISTERDATASOURCE 96 Select to register the database within your user copy of %PRODUCTNAME. After registering, the database is displayed in the View - Data Sources window.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_CB_OPENAFTERWARDS 4f Select to display the database file, where you can edit the database structure.
3a DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_RB_DONTREGISTERDATASOURCE 4e Select to keep the database information only within the created database file.
34 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_CB_STARTTABLEWIZARD 46 Select to call the Table Wizard after the Database Wizard is finished.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_PB_MSACCESSLOCATION 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_ET_MSACCESSLOCATION 28 Specifies the path to the database file.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_PB_ADABASNAME 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_ET_ADABASNAME 24 Enter the name of the database file.
3e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_AUTHENTIFICATION_ET_GENERALUSERNAME 30 A user name can have a maximum of 18 characters.
46 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_AUTHENTIFICATION_CB_GENERALPASSWORDREQUIRED 2b A password must contain 3 to 18 characters.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_ET_ADOURL 1a Enter the data source URL.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_PB_ADOURL 2a Click to open a database selection dialog.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_ET_DBASELOCATION 28 Enter the path to the dBase *.dbf files.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_PB_DBASELOCATION 1d Open a path selection dialog.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLHOSTSERVER 41 hostname is the name of the machine that runs the MySQL database.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DRIVERCLASS 22 Enter the name of the JDBC driver.
2c DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLPORT df Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver.
2a DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_JDBCURL df Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver.
29 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_BASEDN 4c Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, "dc=com".
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_BASEDN 4c Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, "dc=com".
29 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_CB_USESSL 56 Creates a secure connection to the LDAP server through the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL).
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_PORTNUMBER 30 Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389.
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_HOSTSERVER 45 Enter the name of the LDAP server using the format "ldap.server.com".
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_PORTNUMBER 30 Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_HOSTNAME 45 Enter the name of the LDAP server using the format "ldap.server.com".
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MYSQL_RB_CONNECTVIAJDBC 48 Connects to an existing JDBC data source that was set on a system level.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MYSQL_RB_CONNECTVIAODBC 48 Connects to an existing ODBC data source that was set on a system level.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_ET_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 24 Enter the path to the database file.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_PB_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 33 Click to open an ODBC data source selection dialog:
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEPORT 2e Enter the port number for the database server.
35 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEHOSTSERVER 26 Enter the name of the Oracle database.
30 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLECLASS 26 Enter the URL for the database server.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_ET_SPREADSHEETPATH 35 Enter the path and file name to the spreadsheet file.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_PB_SPREADSHEETPATH 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
45 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_CB_SPREADSHEETPASSWORDREQUIRED 44 Select to request a password from the user of the database document.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_THOUSANDS_SEPARATOR 87 Enter or select the character that is used as a thousands separator in the text file, for example a comma (1,000), or a period (1.000).
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR 81 Enter or select the character that is used as a decimal separator in the text file, for example, a period (0.5) or a comma (0,5).
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_PB_LOCATIONTEXTFILE 26 Click to open a file selection dialog.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSOTHERFILES 42 Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FIELD_SEPARATOR 4a Enter or select the character that separates data fields in the text file.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_OWNEXTENSION 42 Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_TEXT_SEPARATOR 4c Enter or select the character that identifies a text field in the text file.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSCSVFILES 1a Click to access csv files.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_LOCATIONTEXTFILE fd Enter the path to the text file or files. If you just want one text file, you can use any extension of the file name. If you enter a folder name, the text files in that folder must have the extension *.csv to be recognized as files of the text database.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSTXTFILES 1a Click to access txt files.
1f DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_EDIT 4d Opens a window where you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report.
f .uno%3ADBRename 71 Renames the selected object. Depending on the database, some names, characters, and name length might be invalid.
f .uno%3ADBDelete 33 Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report.
1f .uno%3ADBDatabasePropertiesMenu 10 Opens a submenu.
2b .uno%3ADBNewReportAutoPilotWithPreSelection 40 Starts the Report Wizard for the selected table, query, or view.
16 .uno%3ADBConvertToView cf Converts the selected query to a view. The original query remains in your database file and an additional view is generated on the database server. You must have write permission to add a view to a database.
19 .uno%3ADBDSConnectionType 6a Opens the Connection Type Wizard which helps you to open a database file that is in an unsupported format.
15 .uno%3ADBDSProperties 5e Opens the Database Properties dialog where you can specify settings for the selected database.
29 .uno%3ADBNewFormAutoPilotWithPreSelection 3e Starts the Form Wizard for the selected table, query, or view.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_DELETE 33 Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report.
d .uno%3ADBEdit 4d Opens a window where you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report.
1b .uno%3ADBDSAdvancedSettings 25 Opens the Advanced Properties dialog.
d .uno%3ADBOpen 32 Opens the selected object in the last saved state.
1b .uno%3ADBSendReportToWriter 86 Exports the selected report to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export.
19 .uno%3ADBSendReportAsMail fe Opens the default e-mail application to send a new e-mail. The selected report is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and a mail body. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export.
42 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_UP 31 Click to go up one level in the folder hierarchy.
49 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_NEWFOLDER 36 Click to create a new folder within the database file.
43 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_SAVE 2e Click to save the form into the database file.
40 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3AED_EXPLORERFILE_FILENAME 27 Enter the file name for the saved form.
13 .uno%3ADBNewViewSQL 1d Opens a new view in SQL mode.
11 .uno%3ADBNewTable 1c Opens the table design view.
12 .uno%3ADBNewReport 40 Starts the Report Wizard for the selected table, view, or query.
12 .uno%3ADBNewFolder 44 Opens a dialog where you can save a new folder in the database file.
14 .uno%3ADBNewQuerySql 1e Opens a new query in SQL mode.
11 .uno%3ADBNewQuery 21 Opens a new query in design mode.
10 .uno%3ADBNewForm 27 Opens a new text document in form mode.
10 .uno%3ADBNewView 20 Opens a new view in design mode.
28 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_CREATE_DESIGN 1c Opens the table design view.
12 .uno%3ADBUserAdmin 4b Opens the User Administration dialog if the database supports this feature.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_TABLE_SELECTOR 64 Opens the Table Filter dialog where you can specify which tables of the database to show or to hide.
17 .uno%3ADBRelationDesign 5d Opens the Relation Design view and checks whether the database connection supports relations.
12 .uno%3ADBDirectSQL 38 Opens the SQL dialog where you can enter SQL statements.
14 .uno%3ADBTableFilter 64 Opens the Table Filter dialog where you can specify which tables of the database to show or to hide.
14 .uno%3ADBViewQueries 47 Selects the queries container and shows all queries in the detail view.
10 .uno%3ADBPreview 10 Opens a submenu.
1c .uno%3ADBDatabaseObjectsMenu 10 Opens a submenu.
12 .uno%3ADBViewForms 43 Selects the forms container and shows all forms in the detail view.
17 .uno%3ADBDisablePreview 2c Disables the preview in the database window.
17 .uno%3ADBShowDocPreview 36 The preview displays the document of a form or report.
16 .uno%3ADBRefreshTables 15 Refreshes the tables.
d .uno%3ADBSort 10 Opens a submenu.
1b .uno%3ADBShowDocInfoPreview 49 The preview window displays the document information of a form or report.
14 .uno%3ADBViewReports 47 Selects the reports container and shows all reports in the detail view.
13 .uno%3ADBViewTables 45 Selects the tables container and shows all tables in the detail view.
17 .uno%3ADBMigrateScripts 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
32 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_SUMMARY%3AED_CHANGES 42 The list shows all changes that were applied to the database file.
45 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATP_SAVE_DBDOC_AS%3APB_BROWSE_SAVE_AS_LOCATION c1 Choose a location and file name to save the new database file. By default, the new file gets the same name as the old file, while the old file gets renamed with the string "backup" in the name.
36 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_LOGIN%3ACB_LOGIN_SAVEPASSWORD 99 Select to use the same user name and password without further dialog, when you connect again to the same data source in the current %PRODUCTNAME session.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_PASSWORD 31 Enter the password to connect to the data source.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_USERNAME 32 Enter the user name to connect to the data source.
17 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD 36 The Query Wizard helps you to design a database query.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTTABLES 39 Specifies the table for which the query is to be created.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTSELFIELDS 3b Displays all fields that will be included in the new query.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND3 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND4 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND3 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND1 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT2 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT1 39 Specifies the field by which the created query is sorted.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND2 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND1 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT4 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT3 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND4 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND2 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_3 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_2 24 Select the condition for the filter.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHALL 45 Select to filter the query by all the conditions using a logical AND.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_3 24 Select the condition for the filter.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_2 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_3 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_1 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_1 24 Select the condition for the filter.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHANY 47 Select to filter the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_2 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_1 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEPLUS 1e Appends a new row of controls.
30 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATESUMMARYQUERY 33 Select to show only results of aggregate functions.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEMINUS 21 Removes the last row of controls.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFIELDS_1 1e Select the numeric field name.
2e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFUNCTION_1 1e Select the aggregate function.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATEDETAILQUERY 28 Select to show all records of the query.
2a WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERSELFIELDS 3b Displays all fields that are to be used to group the query.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHALL 44 Select to group the query by all the conditions using a logical AND.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_3 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_1 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_3 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_1 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_2 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_3 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_2 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_2 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHANY 46 Select to group the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_1 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTTITLE_1 23 Enter the alias for the field name.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTSUMMARY 20 Displays a summary of the query.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDISPLAYQUERY 25 Select to save and display the query.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTQUERYTITLE 1c Enter the name of the query.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMODIFYQUERY 31 Select to save the query and open it for editing.
2e REPORTDESIGN_CHECKBOX_RID_DATETIME_DLG_CB_TIME 94 Enable Include Time to insert a time field into the active area of the report. The time field displays the current time when the report is executed.
2e REPORTDESIGN_CHECKBOX_RID_DATETIME_DLG_CB_DATE 94 Enable Include Date to insert a date field into the active area of the report. The date field displays the current date when the report is executed.
1a .uno%3AInsertDateTimeField 5f You can open the Date and Time dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time.
14 .uno%3ASectionShrink 42 Shrinks the selected section to remove top and bottom empty space.
16 .uno%3ASectionAlignTop 62 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the top margin of the area.
19 .uno%3ASectionAlignBottom 65 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the bottom margin of the area.
15 .uno%3ASmallestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest height.
17 .uno%3ASectionAlignLeft 63 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the left margin of the area.
15 .uno%3AGreatestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest height.
18 .uno%3ASectionAlignRight 64 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the right margin of the area.
1a .uno%3ASectionShrinkBottom 3a Shrinks the selected section to remove bottom empty space.
14 .uno%3ASmallestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest width.
11 .uno%3AHFixedLine 2e Inserts a horizontal line to the current area.
17 .uno%3ASectionShrinkTop 37 Shrinks the selected section to remove top empty space.
11 .uno%3AVFixedLine 2c Inserts a vertical line to the current area.
14 .uno%3AGreatestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest width.
16 .uno%3AReportNavigator 7f The Report Navigator reveals the structure of the report. You can use the Report Navigator to insert functions into the report.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DEEPTRAVERSING e8 If Deep traversing is enabled, functions are evaluated considering all lower levels of hierarchy. This would be used for instance for line numbering. If Deep traversing is not enabled, only the first level of hierarchy is evaluated.
12 .uno%3ANewFunction a9 In the context menu of the Report Navigator, you see the same commands as in the Report Builder view, plus additional commands to create new functions or to delete them.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PREEVALUATED 57 If Pre evaluation is enabled, functions are evaluated only when the report is finished.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_INITIALFORMULA 5a Enter the initial value for the evaluation of the formula. Often this is set to 0 or to 1.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_REPORT_NAVIGATOR_TREE 9f Click an entry in the Report Navigator. The corresponding object or area is selected in the Report Builder view. Right-click an entry to open the context menu.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORMULA 44 Enter the formula that defines the function. Use OpenFormula syntax.
3b REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_BOTTOMPAGE 17 Bottom of Page (Footer)
38 REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_TOPPAGE 14 Top of Page (Header)
32 REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_N 6 Page N
32 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_PAGENUMBERS_LST_ALIGNMENT 9 Alignment
37 REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_N_OF_M b Page N of M
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_HEIGHT 2a Defines the height of the selected object.
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEFOOTEROPTION 78 Specifies in which context the page footer will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer
2e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTWHENGROUPCHANGE 17 Print when group change
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELD_SEL c4 The Add Field window is shown automatically when you have selected a table in the Contents box and leave that box. You can also click the Add Field icon on the toolbar, or choose View - Add Field.
34 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_CONDITIONALPRINTEXPRESSION 5b If the Conditional Print Expression evaluates to TRUE, the selected object will be printed.
29 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKTRANSPARENT 51 Specifies whether the background of the selected object is transparent or opaque.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DATAFIELD 43 On the Data tab page, you can change the data contents to be shown.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORCENEWPAGE 66 Force New Page specifies whether the current section and/or the next section is printed on a new page.
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONY 2a Set the Y Position for the selected object
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VERTICAL_ALIGN f Vert. Alignment
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONX 2a Set the X Position for the selected object
13 .uno%3ASelectReport 5a To display the Data or General tab page for the whole report, choose Edit - Select Report.
22 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_FONT 2d Select the font for the selected text object.
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEHEADEROPTION 79 Specifies in which context the page header will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRESERVEIRI f5 For a picture, you can specify to either insert the picture as a link to a file or only as an embedded object in the Base file. The embedded option increases the size of the Base file, while the link option is not as portable to other computers.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_WIDTH 26 Sets the width of the selected object.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_VISIBLE 68 An invisible object is not shown in the executed report. It is still visible in the Report Builder view.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKCOLOR 53 Sets the background color for the selected object, both on screen and for printing.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_KEEPTOGETHER 78 Keep Together specifies to print the current object starting on top of a new page if it doesn't fit on the current page.
2b REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_GROUPKEEPTOGETHER 5c Groups are kept together by page or by column (default). You must enable Keep Together also.
2d REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTREPEATEDVALUES 23 Specifies to print repeated values.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_NEWROWORCOL 93 New Row Or Column specifies, for a multi-column design, whether the current section and/or the next section will be printed on a new row or column.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_DELETE 29 Removes the selected field from the list.
41 reportdesign%3AListBox%3ARID_GROUPS_SORTING%3ALST_KEEPTOGETHERLST 4e Select the level of detail by which a group is kept together on the same page.
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSBRW 9f Lists the fields that will be used for sorting or grouping. The field at the top has the highest priority, the second field has the second priority, and so on.
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELDEXPRESSION 37 Click to open a list from which you can select a field.
40 REPORTDESIGN_NUMERICFIELD_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_ED_GROUPINTERVALLST 3b Enter the group interval value that records are grouped by.
36 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_GROUPONLST 4b Select to create a new group on each changed value, or on other properties.
35 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_FOOTERLST 28 Select to show or hide the Group Footer.
1b .uno%3ADbSortingAndGrouping b2 In the Sorting and Grouping dialog of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group.
35 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_HEADERLST 28 Select to show or hide the Group Header.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_MOVE_UP 28 Moves the selected field up in the list.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_MOVE_DOWN 2a Moves the selected field down in the list.
31 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_ORDER 19 Select the sorting order.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_DIALOG 36 The Table Wizard helps you to create a database table.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTBUSINESS 40 Select the business category to see only business sample tables.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSSELECTED 3b Displays all fields that will be included in the new table.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LBTABLES a2 Select one of the sample tables. Then select fields from that table from the left list box. Repeat this step until you have selected all the fields that you need.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTPRIVATE 3e Select the private category to see only private sample tables.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 70 Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMINUS 2c Remove the selected field from the list box.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_REQUIRED 2c If set to Yes, this field must not be empty.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_COLNAME 54 Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_AUTOINCREMENT 53 If set to Yes, the values for this data field are generated by the database engine.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPLUS 25 Add a new data field to the list box.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_SELFIELDNAMES 36 Select a field in order to edit the field information.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CHK_USEPRIMEKEY cd Select to create a primary key. Add a primary key to every database table to uniquely identify each record. For some database systems within %PRODUCTNAME, a primary key is mandatory for editing the tables.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDS_PK_AVAILABLE 47 Select a field and click > to add it to the list of primary key fields.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE b6 Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_AUTOMATIC 41 Select to automatically add a primary key as an additional field.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVE_PK_SELECTED aa Select a field and click < to remove it from the list of primary key fields. The primary key is created as a concatenation of the fields in this list, from top to bottom.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_PK_FIELDNAME 16 Select the field name.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SEVERAL 4d Select to create a primary key from a combination of several existing fields.
2e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE_AUTOMATIC b6 Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SINGLE 44 Select to use an existing field with unique values as a primary key.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_TXT_NAME 19 Specifies the table name.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_MODIFYTABLE 41 Select to save the table design and open the table to enter data.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_WORKWITHTABLE 29 Select to save and edit the table design.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_CATALOG 54 Select the catalog for the table. (Available only if the database supports catalogs)
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_STARTFORMWIZARD 83 Select to create a form based on this table. The form is created on a text document with the last used settings of the Form Wizard.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_SCHEMA 52 Select the schema for the table. (Available only if the database supports schemas)
12 .uno%3ADBTableEdit 39 Opens the selected table so you can change the structure.
12 .uno%3ADBTableOpen 43 Opens the selected table so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
15 .uno%3ADBReportDelete 1c Deletes the selected report.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryDelete 1b Deletes the selected query.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryRename 1b Renames the selected query.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryOpen 43 Opens the selected query so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
11 .uno%3ADBFormOpen 42 Opens the selected form so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
15 .uno%3ADBReportRename 1c Renames the selected report.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryEdit 39 Opens the selected query so you can change the structure.
13 .uno%3ADBReportEdit 37 Opens the selected report so you can change the layout.
13 .uno%3ADBFormRename 1a Renames the selected form.
13 .uno%3ADBReportOpen 44 Opens the selected report so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
11 .uno%3ADBFormEdit 35 Opens the selected form so you can change the layout.
14 .uno%3ADBTableRename 1b Renames the selected table.
14 .uno%3ADBTableDelete 1b Deletes the selected table.
13 .uno%3ADBFormDelete 1a Deletes the selected form.
20 .uno%3AFontworkSameLetterHeights c8 Ја менува висината на буквите на избраните објекти од ТекстЕфекти од нормална на иста висина за сите објекти.
3c SVX_HID_SVX_CHINESE_TRANSLATION_RB_CONVERSION_TO_TRADITIONAL 9a Кликнете за го примените растојанието на знаци на избраните објекти од ТекстЕфекти.
1f .uno%3AFontworkAlignmentFloater 5a Го отвора прозорецот Порамнување на ТекстЕфекти.
19 .uno%3AFontworkShapeTypes ee Го отвора алатникот Облик на ТекстЕфекти. Кликнете на некој од облиците за да го примените на сите избрани објекти од ТекстЕфекти.
26 .uno%3AFontworkCharacterSpacingFloater 71 Го отвора прозорецот за Растојание на знаците од ТекстЕфекти.
c FontWork1TBO 91 Кликнете за да го примените порамнувањето на избраните објекти од ТекстЕфекти.
c FontWork2TBO 75 Внесете ја вредноста за растојанието на знаците од ТекстЕфекти.
16 SC_HID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS 89 If the same contents are changed by different users, the Resolve Conflicts dialog opens. For each conflict, decide which changes to keep.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_SHAREDOCUMENT%3ACB_SHARE dc Enable to share the current document with other users. Disable to use the document unshared. This will invalidate the not yet saved edits that other users applied in the time since you last opened or saved this document.
37 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPALLMINE 30 Keeps all your changes, voids all other changes.
14 .uno%3AShareDocument 66 Opens the Share Document dialog where you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document.
34 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPMINE 2a Keeps your change, voids the other change.
39 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPALLOTHERS 39 Keeps the changes of all other users, voids your changes.
35 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPOTHER 36 Keeps the change of the other user, voids your change.
18 .uno%3AFormFilterExecute e7 Ако кликнете на Примени филтри базирани на формулари иконата на Филтер за формулари лентата со алатки, ќе се примени филтерот.
15 .uno%3AFormFilterExit c3 Ако кликнете на копчето Затвори на лентата со алатки Филтер на формулари формуларот е прикажан без филтер.
1e .uno%3AConfigureToolboxVisible 39 Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons.
19 SVX_HID_FM_FILTER_IS_NULL de You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null").
18 SVX_HID_FILTER_NAVIGATOR 2bd Условите за филтри кои се поставени се појавуваат во Навигатор за филтри. По поставувањето на филтерот, ќе видите празен запис на крајот од Навигатор за филтри . Можете да го изберете овој запис со кликање на зборот "Или". По избирањето на празниот запис, можете да внесете додатни услови за филтри во формуларот. Овие услови се поврзани со Логичко ИЛИ со претходно дефинираните услови.
f SVX_HID_FM_EDIT de You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null").
16 SVX_HID_FM_IS_NOT_NULL de You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null").
1a .uno%3AFormFilterNavigator de За да поврзете неколку услови за филтрирање со Логичко ИЛИ кликнете на иконата Навигација на филтри на лентата со филтри.
1e SVX_HID_CTL_FONTWORK_FAVORITES bc Select a Fontwork style and click OK to insert the Fontwork into your document. Double-click or Ctrl+double-click the Fontwork in your document to enter text edit mode and change the text.
12 .uno%3ASaveGraphic 99 To export a bitmap in Writer: Right-click the bitmap, choose Save Graphics. You see the Graphics Export dialog. Enter a file name and select a file type.
20 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ADBButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AMathButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
15 FWK_HID_BACKINGWINDOW 36 Click an icon to open a new document or a file dialog.
24 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AWriterButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ADrawButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AOpenButton 35 The Open a Document icon presents a file open dialog.
25 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AImpressButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ACalcButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
26 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ATemplateButton 3c The Templates icon opens the Templates and Documents dialog.
12 .uno%3AShowLicense 34 Displays the Licensing and Legal information dialog.
f .uno%3AHelpMenu ac Менито за помош Ви овозможува да го стартувате и да управувате со системот за помош на $[officename].
c .uno%3AAbout a2 Прикажува општи информации за програмата како што се број на верзијата и авторски права.
12 .uno%3AShowCredits d3 Displays the CREDITS.odt document which lists the names of individuals who have contributed to OpenOffice.org source code (and whose contributions were imported into LibreOffice) or LibreOffice since 2010-09-28.
13 .uno%3AOnlineUpdate ee Enable an Internet connection for %PRODUCTNAME. If you need a Proxy, check the %PRODUCTNAME Proxy settings in Tools - Options - Internet. Then choose Check for Updates to check for the availability of a newer version of your office suite.
13 .uno%3ASendFeedback 4f Opens a feedback form in the web browser, where users can report software bugs.
10 .uno%3AHelpIndex 88 Ја отвора главната страница на помошта за $[officename] за активната апликација.
e RID_ENVTOOLBOX 76 Стандардниот алатник е достапен во секоја апликација од $[officename].
13 .uno%3AExtendedHelp 99 Овозможува проширени совети под покажувачот на глушецот сѐ до следното кликнување.
18 .HelpId%3Atableobjectbar 75 The Table Bar contains functions you need when working with tables. It appears when you move the cursor into a table.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertColumns b0 Ги вметнува сите полиња од означениот запис во тековниот документ на позицијата на покажувачот.
10 .uno%3ANewRecord 1f Креира нов запис.
13 .uno%3ADeleteRecord 5b Брише запис. Треба да биде потврдено пред бришење.
e .uno%3ARecUndo 53 Ви овозможува да отповикате внес на податоци.
e .uno%3ARecSave 91 Зачувува нов запис со податоци. Промената е регистрирана во базата на податоци.
11 .uno%3ANextRecord 2f Ве носи на следниот запис.
11 .uno%3ALastRecord 33 Ве носи на последниот запис.
12 .uno%3AFirstRecord 2b Ве носи на првиот запис.
11 .uno%3APrevRecord 35 Ве носи на претходниот запис.
15 .uno%3AAbsoluteRecord a1 Го прикажува бројот на тековниот запис. Внесете број за да отидете на соодветниот запис.
e .uno%3AGridUse 87 Одредува дека може да поместувате објекти само помеѓу точките од мрежата.
16 .uno%3ABezierSymmetric 7f Оваа икона претвора аголна точка или мазна точка во симетрична точка.
12 HID_BEZIER_TOOLBOX bd Алатникот за уредување точки се појавува кога ќе изберете полигон (објект) и ќе кликнете на Уреди точки.
13 .uno%3ABezierDelete 145 Користете ја иконата Избриши точки за да избришете една или повеќе избрани точки. Ако сакате да изберете повеќе точки, кликнете ги соодветните точки додека го држите копчето Shift.
14 .uno%3ABezierConvert 79 Претвора крива во права линија или претвора права линија во крива.
12 .uno%3ABezierClose 2e Затвора линија или крива.
13 .uno%3ABezierSmooth 6b Претвора аголна точка или симетрична точка во мазна точка.
13 .uno%3ABezierInsert 93 Го активира режимот за вметнување. Овој режим Ви овозможува да вметнувате точки.
11 .uno%3ABezierMove 5c Активира режим во кој можете да поместувате точки.
14 .uno%3ABezierCutLine 108 Иконата Раздели крива ја разделува кривата. Изберете ја точката или точките каде што сакате да ја разделите кривата и потоа кликнете на иконата.
1c .uno%3ABezierEliminatePoints 6d Ја означува тековната точка или избраните точки за бришење.
11 .uno%3ABezierEdge 63 Ја претвора избраната точка или точки во аголни точки.
18 .uno%3AOptionsTreeDialog 93 Оваа наредба отвора дијалог за приспособување на програмата кон вашите потреби.
1a CUI_HID_OFADLG_TREELISTBOX 38 Изберете елемент за уредување.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_SHORTCUT 34 Впишете ги Вашите иницијали.
2b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_TITLE 43 Во ова поле впишете ја Вашата титула.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_CITY 35 Впишете го градот на живеење.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_FIRSTNAME 28 Впишете го Вашето име.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_NAME 30 Впишете го Вашето презиме.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_SHORTNAME 34 Впишете ги Вашите иницијали.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_COUNTRY 2e Впишете ја Вашата држава.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_TELCOMPANY 66 Во ова поле впишете го Вашиот телефонски број на работа.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_FAX 4d Во ова поле впишете го Вашиот број на факс.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_COMP 59 Во ова поле впишете го името на Вашата компанија.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_COUNTRY 2e Впишете ја Вашата држава.
17 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_GENERAL 8c Користете ја оваа страница за да внесете или уредите податоци за корисникот.
2a cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_CITY 35 Впишете го градот на живеење.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_MAIL 44 Впишете ја вашата е-поштенска адреса.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_FAX 4d Во ова поле впишете го Вашиот број на факс.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_PLZ 49 Во ова поле впишете го поштенскиот број.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_FIRSTNAME 28 Впишете го Вашето име.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_COMPANY 59 Во ова поле впишете го името на Вашата компанија.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_TITLE 43 Во ова поле впишете ја Вашата титула.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_FAX 4d Во ова поле впишете го Вашиот број на факс.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_CITY 35 Впишете го градот на живеење.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_STREET 48 Во ова поле впишете го името на улицата.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_MAIL 44 Впишете ја вашата е-поштенска адреса.
2e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_US_STATE 2e Впишете ја Вашата држава.
2a cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_NAME 30 Впишете го Вашето презиме.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_POSITION 63 Во ова поле впишете ја Вашата позиција во компанијата.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_COUNTRY 2e Впишете ја Вашата држава.
2e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_POSITION 63 Во ова поле впишете ја Вашата позиција во компанијата.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_ZIP 49 Во ова поле впишете го поштенскиот број.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_US_ZIPCODE 49 Во ова поле впишете го поштенскиот број.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_TELPRIVAT 63 Во ова поле впишете го Вашиот домашен телефонски број.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_ZIP 49 Во ова поле впишете го поштенскиот број.
2c cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_STREET 48 Во ова поле впишете го името на улицата.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_US_CITY 35 Впишете го градот на живеење.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_STREET 48 Во ова поле впишете го името на улицата.
2b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_EMAIL 44 Впишете ја вашата е-поштенска адреса.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_AUTOSAVE 154 Одредува дека %PRODUCTNAME ја зачувува информацијата потребна за обновување на сите отворени документи во случај на пад на програмата. Може да го зададете временскиот интервал на зачувување.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_RELATIVE_INET 84 Обележете го полето за да имате релативно зачувување на URL-а на Интернет.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_RELATIVE_FSYS 97 Обележете го полето за да имате релативно зачувување на URL-а во датотечниот систем.
29 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ALB_APP ab Го одредува типот на документ за кој сакате да го дефинирате стандардниот формат на датотека.
34 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ACB_LOAD_SETTINGS bd Поставувањата специфични за корисникот што се зачувани во документот, ги вчитува заедно со документот.
14 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_SAVE ef Во делот Општо може да изберете стандардни поставувања за зачувување документи и може да изберете стандардни формати на датотеки.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ALB_ODF_VERSION fc Some companies or organizations may require ODF documents in the ODF 1.0/1.1 format. You can select that format to save in the listbox. This older format cannot store all new features, so the new format ODF 1.2 (Extended) is recommended where possible.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ACB_LOAD_DOCPRINTER 16c If enabled, the printer settings will be loaded with the document. This can cause a document to be printed on a distant printer, if you do not change the printer manually in the Print dialog. If disabled, your standard printer will be used to print this document. The current printer settings will be stored with the document whether or not this option is checked.
38 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_ALIEN_WARNING%3ACB_WARNING_OFF 16f Може да изберете дали да добиете порака за предупредување кога зачувувате документ во формат којшто не е OpenDocument или ако не сте поставиле стандарден формат во Алатки - Опции - Вчитање/зачувување - Општо.
2e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_BACKUP 1ae Ја зачувува претходната верзија на документот како резервна копија секој пат кога ќе го зачувате документот. Секогаш кога %PRODUCTNAME креира резервна копија, претходната резервна копија се заменува. Резервната копија ја има наставката .BAK.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_WARNALIENFORMAT 16f Може да изберете дали да добиете порака за предупредување кога зачувувате документ во формат којшто не е OpenDocument или ако не сте поставиле стандарден формат во Алатки - Опции - Вчитање/зачувување - Општо.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_NOPRETTYPRINTING b9 При зачувување на документот, %PRODUCTNAME ги запишува XML-податоците без вовлекувања и додатни нови редови.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ALB_FILTER 16a Одредува дека документите од типот избран на левата страна секогаш ќе се зачувуваат како датотеки од овој тип. Може да изберете друг тип датотека за тековниот документ во дијалогот Зачувување како.
2f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_DOCINFO be Означува дека дијалогот Својства ќе се појавува секој пат кога ќе ја активирате наредбата Зачувај како.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3AED_AUTOSAVE 8f Го одредува временскиот интервал во минути за опцијата за автоматско враќање.
18 CUI_HID_OPTPATH_CTL_PATH c3 За да измените елемент од листата, изберете го и кликнете на Уреди. Може и двапати да кликнете на елементот.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_PATH%3ABTN_PATH 84 Кликнете за да го прикажете дијалогот Избирање патека или Уреди патеки .
14 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_PATH c4 Овој дел ги содржи стандардните патеки за важни папки во $[officename]. Корисникот може да ги уредува овие патеки.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_PATH%3ABTN_STANDARD bd Копчето Стандардно ги ресетира патеките на претходно дефинираните вредности за сите избрани елементи.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ABTN_ADD_MULTIPATH d6 Го отвора дијалогот Избирање патеки за да изберете друга папка или дијалогот Отворање за да изберете друга датотека.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ALB_MULTIPATH bb Содржи листа на патеки или што веќе биле додадени. Означете ја стандардната патека за новите датотеки.
1b CUI_HID_LNGDLG_NUM_PREBREAK 8b Внесете го минималниот број знаци што треба да стојат пред или по цртичката.
2a cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3AED_WORD e3 Може да напишете нов збор за вклучување во речникот. Во листата подолу ќе ја видите содржината на тековниот сопствен речник.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3ALB_DICTLANG 59 Доделува нов јазик на тековниот сопствен речник.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_MODULES_EDIT 69 За да уредите јазичен модул, изберете го и кликнете Уреди.
18 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_DICT_NEW 100 Го отвора дијалогот Нов речник во кој што може да наведете нов кориснички дефиниран речник или речник на исклучоци и да го наведете јазикот.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXDLG_NEWDICT%3AED_DICTNAME 4d Го задава името на новиот сопствен речник.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_DICS_EDIT_DIC 100 Го отвора дијалогот Уредување сопствен речник во кој, во Вашиот сопствен речник, може да додавате нови и да уредувате веќе постоечки ставки.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_DICS_NEW_DIC 100 Го отвора дијалогот Нов речник во кој што може да наведете нов кориснички дефиниран речник или речник на исклучоци и да го наведете јазикот.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_OPTIONS_EDIT 9a Доколку сакате да измените вредност, изберете ја ставката и потоа кликнете на Уреди.
1d CUI_HID_CLB_EDIT_MODULES_DICS 51 Ги прикажува достапните кориснички речници.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_NEWDICT%3ALB_DICTLANG 9b Со избирање на одреден јазик може да ја ограничите употребата на сопствениот речник.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3APB_NEW_REPLACE 112 Го додава зборот во полето Збор во Вашиот тековен сопствен речник. Зборот во полето Предлог се додава исто така кога работите со речници за исклучоци.
19 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_DICT_EDIT 100 Го отвора дијалогот Уредување сопствен речник во кој, во Вашиот сопствен речник, може да додавате нови и да уредувате веќе постоечки ставки.
19 CUI_HID_CLB_LINGU_OPTIONS 7a Ги дефинира опциите за проверка на правопис и разделување зборови.
12 .uno%3ASpellOnline 8e Автоматски го проверува правописот додека пишувате и ги подвлекува грешките.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3APB_DELETE_REPLACE 64 Го брише означениот збор од тековниот сопствен речник.
41 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_LNG_ED_NUM_PREBREAK%3AED_PREBREAK 8b Внесете го минималниот број знаци што треба да стојат пред или по цртичката.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_LINGU 9a Ги одредува својствата на проверката на правопис, тезаурус и разделувањето зборови.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_DICS_DEL_DIC 98 Го брише избраниот речник по потврдата, доколку истиот не е заштитен од запишување.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3ALB_ALLDICTS 3d Ја одредува книгата за уредување.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_NEWDICT%3ABTN_EXCEPT 88 Одредува дали сакате да избегнувате одредени зборови во Вашите документи.
19 CUI_HID_CLB_LINGU_MODULES 49 Ги содржи инсталираните јазични модули.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3AED_REPLACE ec Ова поле за внес е достапно само ако уредувате речник за исклучоци. Полето дава алтернативен предлог за зборот во полето „Збор“.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_UP 7b Го зголемува за едно ниво приоритетот на модулот избран во листата.
46 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_DOWN 79 Го намалува за едно ниво приоритетот на модулот избран во листата.
20 CUI_HID_CLB_EDIT_MODULES_MODULES dc Ги одредува јазикот и достапните проверка на правопис, разделување зборови и подмодули со тезауруси за избраниот модул.
42 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3ALB_EDIT_MODULES_LANGUAGE 39 Го одредува јазикот на модулот.
46 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_BACK 74 Кликнете тука за да ги отповикате тековните промени во листата.
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_2 c Зелена
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_1 c Црвена
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ALB_COLORMODEL b8 За да го измените, изберете го моделот на бои: црвена-зелена-сина (RGB) или цијан-магента-жолта-црна (CMYK).
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_SAVE ce Го отвора дијалогот Зачувување како кој Ви овозможува да ја зачувате тековната табела со бои под зададеното име.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_ADD 1f Додава нова боја.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3AEDT_NAME cc Го одредува името на избраната боја. Исто така може и да го напишете името во ова поле кога дефинирате нова боја.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLOR bd Ви овозможува да изберете боја од табела со бои, да уредувате постоечка боја или да дефинирате нови бои.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_LOAD 8b Го отвора дијалогот за Отворање кој Ви овозможува да изберете палета со бои.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_MODIFY 2e Ја менува тековната боја.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ALB_COLOR 89 Содржи листа на достапни бои. За да изберете боја, изберете една од листата.
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_3 8 Сина
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_WORK_ON 8b Го отвора дијалогот за Отворање кој Ви овозможува да изберете палета со бои.
32 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_LUMINANCE 55 Ја поставува осветленоста во моделот на бои HSB.
2c svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_HUE 4f Ја поставува нијансата во моделот на бои HSB.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3AMTR_FLD_4 8a Ја поставува вредноста за црната боја или клучот (црна) во моделот на бои CMYK.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_2 8a Ја поставува вредноста за бојата „магента“ (пурпурна) во моделот на бои CMYK.
2b svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_KEY 8a Ја поставува вредноста за црната боја или клучот (црна) во моделот на бои CMYK.
28 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_2 145 Го поставува малиот покажувач за избор во десниот прозорец на бојата што одговара на избраната боја во левиот прозорец и ги ажурира соодветните вредности во нумеричките полиња.
2c svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_CYAN 8b Ја поставува вредноста за бојата „цијан“ (сино-зелена) во моделот на бои CMYK.
28 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_1 146 Кликнете на копчето <-- за да ја замените избраната боја во палетата со бои со бојата избрана од десната страна. Копчето е овозможено кога ќе изберете боја во еден од четирите агли.
2d svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_BLUE 6a Ја поставува вредноста за сината боја во моделот на бои RGB.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_3 6d Ја поставува вредноста за жолтата боја во моделот на бои CMYK.
2e svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_YELLOW 6d Ја поставува вредноста за жолтата боја во моделот на бои CMYK.
2e svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_GREEN 6e Ја поставува вредноста за зелената боја во моделот на бои RGB.
2c svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_RED 6e Ја поставува вредноста за црвената боја во моделот на бои RGB.
2f svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_MAGENTA 8a Ја поставува вредноста за бојата „магента“ (пурпурна) во моделот на бои CMYK.
33 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_SATURATION 55 Го поставува заситувањето во моделот на бои HSB.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_1 8b Ја поставува вредноста за бојата „цијан“ (сино-зелена) во моделот на бои CMYK.
29 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_TOOLTIP 122 Ги прикажува имињата на иконите и повеќе совети во балончиња, како на пример белешки со примери и имиња на поглавјата кога се движите низ документ со поглавја.
33 cui%3APushButton%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3APB_HELPAGENT_RESET e9 Кликнете на Ресетирај го агентот за помош за да ја вратите стандардната листа на случаи за кои ќе се прикажува Агентот за помош.
29 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_EXTHELP c7 Прикажува текст за помош кога ќе застанете со покажувачот над икона, наредба од мени или контрола од дијалог.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_HELPAGENT 16e Одредува дека Агентот за помош ќе биде автоматски прикажуван во одредени ситуации. Кликнете на прозорецот на Агентот за помош за да ја видите страницата за помош со информација за тековниот контекст.
2f cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ANF_YEARVALUE 97 Го дефинира опсегот на датуми, во кој системот ги препознава годините со две цифри.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_DOCSTATUS 6d Одредува дали печатењето на документот се смета за промена.
29 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_FILEDLG 10d Одредува дали се користат дијалозите на $[officename] за отворање и зачувување на документи. Во спротивно се користат дијалозите на оперативниот систем.
39 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ALB_FONTHEIGHT 7a Изберете големина на фонт за приказот на изворни кодови на HTML и Basic.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_USETABLE 83 Ги овозможува поставувањата за замена на фонтови што сте ги дефинирале.
18 CUI_HID_OFA_SUBST_DELETE 35 Ја брише замената на фонтови.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_FONT2 43 Внесете го името на фонтот за замена.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_FONT1 78 Внесете или изберете го името на фонтот што сакате да го замените.
1d CUI_HID_OFA_FONT_SUBSTITUTION 161 Заменува еден фонт со друг фонт по Ваш избор. Замената само менува фонт кога е прикажан на екранот или за време на печатење. Не го менува фонтот што е зададен во форматирањето на Вашиот документ.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_NONPROP a1 Обележете го ова за да ги прикажете само непропорционалните фонтови во листата Фонтови.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ALB_FONTNAME 69 Изберете го фонтот за приказ на изворни кодови на HTML и Basic.
1a CUI_HID_OFA_FONT_SUBST_CLB 1cf Ги прикажува оригиналниот фонт и фонтот што ќе го замени. Изберете Секогаш за да ги замените и екранскиот фонт и фонтот за печатење, дури и ако оригиналниот фонт е инсталиран на Вашиот систем. Изберете Само на екран за да го замените само екранскиот фонт.
17 CUI_HID_OFA_SUBST_APPLY 35 Ја прави замената на фонтови.
27 SVX_CHECKBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_CB_SYSTEM_FONT ed Ја одредува употребата на системските фонтови за прикажување на сите менија и дијалози. Инаку ќе се користи друг инсталиран фонт.
30 svx%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_USE_ANTIALIASE af When supported, you can enable and disable anti-aliasing of graphics. With anti-aliasing enabled, the display of most graphical objects looks smoother and with less artifacts.
2d cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_SYSTEM_FONT ed Ја одредува употребата на системските фонтови за прикажување на сите менија и дијалози. Инаку ќе се користи друг инсталиран фонт.
13 CUI_HID_OFA_TP_VIEW 2e Одредува опции за приказ.
29 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MOUSEPOS 8b Одредува дали и како ќе се позиционира глувчето во новоотворените дијалози.
19 .uno%3ARestoreEditingView 142 Одредува дали да се обнови последниот користен изглед на документот. Многу од својствата за приказ што биле валидни кога документот бил последен пат зачуван ќе бидат обновени.
12 .uno%3ARefreshView 94 Притиснете Shift+Ctrl+R за да го обновите или освежите приказот на тековниот документ.
2e svx%3AMetricField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3AMF_SELECTION 7a Select the transparency level for transparent selections. The default value is 75%. You can select values from 10% to 90%.
29 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_ICONSIZE 59 Ја одредува големината на иконите на алатниците.
2a cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_ICONSTYLE 38 Select the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs.
2e cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONT_HISTORY 114 На почетокот на листата во полето Име на фонт во алатникот Форматирање ги прикажува последните пет фонтови што сте ги користеле во тековниот документ.
23 SVX_LISTBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_LB_ICONSIZE 59 Ја одредува големината на иконите на алатниците.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_SELECTION b0 If enabled, the text selection in Writer and the cell selection in Calc will be shown using a transparent color. If not enabled, the selection will be shown by inverted colors.
24 SVX_LISTBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_LB_ICONSTYLE 38 Select the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs.
2b cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MENU_ICONS 66 Ги прикажува иконите до соодветните ставки од менијата.
2c cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MOUSEMIDDLE 62 Ја дефинира функцијата на средното копче на глувчето.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONT_SHOW db Ги прикажува имињата на фонтовите во соодветниот фонт, на пример, фонтовите во полето „Фонт“ на алатникот Форматирање.
2f cui%3AMetricField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3AMF_WINDOWSIZE 10d Користи процентуална метрика за менување на големината на фонтот во елементите на корисничкиот интерфејс, како што се дијалози и натписи на икони.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_USE_HARDACCELL d1 Пристапува директно на хардверските можности на адаптерот за графички излез за да се подобри приказот на екранот.
44 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEBITMAPS_NORMAL e3 Високиот квалитет на печатење одговара на резолуција од 300dpi. Нормалниот квалитет на печатење одговара на резолуција од 200dpi.
3f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCETRANSPARENCY 135 Доколку го означите ова поле проѕирните објекти ќе бидат испечатени како и нормалните непроѕирни објекти, во зависност од вашиот избор во наредните две полиња за избор.
36 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_PAPERSIZE c5 Обележете ја оваа опција ако има потреба од одредена големина на хартија за печатење на тековниот документ.
47 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCETRANSPARENCY_AUTO ce Одредува дека проѕирноста се печати само ако проѕирната област покрива помалку од четвртина од целата страница.
3f sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_PRINTFILEOUTPUT c7 Одредува дали поставувањата за печатење се однесуваат на директното печатење или на печатењето во датотека.
3a sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCEBITMAPS cb Одредува дека битмапите се печатат со намален квалитет. Резолуцијата може само да се намали, а не да се зголеми.
44 sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ALB_REDUCEBITMAPS_RESOLUTION dd Го одредува максималниот квалитет на печатење во точки по инч (dpi). Резолуцијата може само да се намали, а не да се зголеми.
39 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_TRANSPARENCY c5 Изберете ја оваа опција ако сакате секогаш да бидете предупредени дека документот содржи проѕирни објекти.
45 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEGRADIENTS_COLOR 84 Одредува дека градиентите се печатат само со средна боја меѓу двете бои.
45 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEBITMAPS_OPTIMAL e3 Високиот квалитет на печатење одговара на резолуција од 300dpi. Нормалниот квалитет на печатење одговара на резолуција од 200dpi.
47 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEGRADIENTS_STRIPES 71 Го одредува максималниот број ленти за градиенти за печатење.
47 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCEBITMAPS_TRANSPARENCY fb Ако е обележано ова поле, намалувањето на квалитетот на печатење на битмапите исто така се однесува и на проѕирните области на објектите.
48 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEBITMAPS_RESOLUTION dd Го одредува максималниот квалитет на печатење во точки по инч (dpi). Резолуцијата може само да се намали, а не да се зголеми.
3c sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCEGRADIENTS 7d Ако е обележано ова поле градиентите се печатат со намален квалитет.
3d sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_PRINTEROUTPUT c7 Одредува дали поставувањата за печатење се однесуваат на директното печатење или на печатењето во датотека.
4a sfx2%3ANumericField%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ANF_REDUCEGRADIENTS_STEPCOUNT 71 Го одредува максималниот број ленти за градиенти за печатење.
3d sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_PAPERORIENTATION c4 Обележете ја оваа опција ако е потребна одредена ориентација на хартија за печатење на тековниот документ.
47 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCETRANSPARENCY_NONE 58 Со оваа опција проѕирноста никогаш не се печати.
40 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_CONVERTTOGREYSCALES 69 Одредува дека сите бои се печатат само во нијанси на сиво.
30 cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ANF_OLECACHE 79 Изберете го максималниот број на OLE-објекти што се чуваат во кешот.
3a cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ANF_GRAPHICOBJECTCACHE c5 Одредува дека објектите што се поголеми од избраната големина (во мегабајти) нема да бидат ставени во кешот.
36 cui%3ATimeField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ATF_GRAPHICOBJECTTIME 8b Го одредува времето во часови и минути колку секој објект останува во кешот.
2c cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3AED_UNDO 5b You can specify the number of steps which can be undone by selecting a number from the box.
34 cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ANF_GRAPHICCACHE 65 Ја одредува вкупната големина на кешот за сите графики.
27 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLORCONFIG_NAME_SCHEME 34 Внесете име за шемата за бои.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLORCONFIG%3APB_SAVESCHEME a9 Ги зачувува тековните поставувања како шема на бои која може подоцна да ја вчитате повторно.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLORCONFIG%3ALB_COLORSCHEME 5c Ја избира шемата на бои што сакате да ја користите.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLORCONFIG%3APB_DELETESCHEME af Ја брише шемата на бои што е прикажана во полето Шема. Не може да ја избришете стандардната шема.
29 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLORCONFIG_COLORLIST_WIN 68 Ги избира боите за елементите на корисничкиот интерфејс.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_AUTO_DETECT_HC c4 %PRODUCTNAME се префрла во режим на висок контраст кога бојата на подлогата на оперативниот систем е многу темна.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_TIPHELP 61 Ги крие советите за помош по одредениот број секунди.
47 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_ANIMATED_GRAPHICS 77 Ги прегледува анимираните графики, како што се GIF-слики во %PRODUCTNAME.
41 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ANF_TIPHELP 77 Внесете го бројот на секунди за прикажување на советите за помош.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_TEXTSELECTION 6e Го прикажува покажувачот во документи што се само за читање.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_PAGE_PREVIEWS af Ги применува поставувањата на оперативниот систем за висок контраст на прегледите на страници.
48 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_ACCESSIBILITY_TOOL 1d9 Ви овозможува да користите алатки за помагање, како што се надворешни читачи на екран, Брајови уреди или уреди за препознавање на говор. За да имате поддршка за алатки за помагање, на Вашиот компјутер треба да биде инсталирана Јава-околината за извршување (JRE).
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_AUTOMATIC_FONT_COLOR da Ги прикажува фонтовите во %PRODUCTNAME преку поставувањата на системските бои. Оваа опција влијае само на екранскиот приказ.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_ANIMATED_TEXTS 7a Прегледува анимиран текст како што е трепкање и движење, во %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_FTP_PROXY 4d Напишете го името на прокси-серверот за FTP.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTP_PROXY 4e Напишете го името на прокси-серверот за HTTP.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_SOCKS_PORT 5b Напишете ја портата за соодветниот прокси-сервер.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_FTP_PORT 5b Напишете ја портата за соодветниот прокси-сервер.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_NOPROXYFOR a8 Ги одредува имињата на серверите за кои не се потребни прокси-сервери, разделени со запирки.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_PROXY 4d Го одредува типот на дефиниција на прокси.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTPS_PORT 5b Напишете ја портата за соодветниот прокси-сервер.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTP_PORT 5b Напишете ја портата за соодветниот прокси-сервер.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTPS_PROXY 53 Type the name of the proxy server for HTTPS. Type the port in the right-hand field.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3ALB_PROXYMODE 4d Го одредува типот на дефиниција на прокси.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_MOZPLUGIN%3ACB_MOZPLUGIN_CODE 1ed Го активира приклучокот за Mozilla за да може да се прикажуваат документи на %PRODUCTNAME во прозорец од прелистувач. Изберете, кликнете на „Во ред“ и потоа рестартирајте го Вашиот прелистувач. Потоа во прозорецот од прелистувачот, кликнете на врска во било кој %PRODUCTNAME документ.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_SIGNDOCS 181 Изберете за да видите предупредување кога ќе се обидете да потпишете документ којшто содржи снимени промени, верзии, полиња, референци до други извори (на пример, поврзани делови или поврзани слики) или белешки.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_WEBCONNECTION_INFO%3APB_CHANGE 51 Opens a dialog where you can view and change the password for the selected entry.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_WEBCONNECTION_INFO%3APB_REMOVEALL 22 Removes all entries from the list.
42 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_MASTERPASSWORD_CRT%3AED_MASTERPASSWORD_REPEAT 20 Enter the master password again.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_CTRLHYPERLINK 88 If enabled, you must hold down the Ctrl key while clicking a hyperlink to follow that link. If not enabled, a click opens the hyperlink.
37 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_MASTERPASSWORD%3AED_MASTERPASSWORD 26 Enter the master password to continue.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3ACB_SEC_SAVEPASSWORDS bb If enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will securely store all passwords that you use to access files from web servers. You can retrieve the passwords from the list after you enter the master password.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_RECOMMENDPWD 127 Изберете за опцијата Зачувај со лозинка во дијалогот за зачувување да биде стандардно избрана. Исклучете ја опцијата за да ги зачувувате датотеките без лозинка.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_CONNECTIONS 70 Asks for the master password. If master password is correct, shows the Stored Web Connection Information dialog.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_CREATEPDF 11f Изберете за да видите предупредување кога ќе се обидете да изнесете документ којшто содржи снимени промени во Writer или којшто прикажува белешки, во PDF-формат.
45 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_SECURITYOPTIONS 10a Изберете за да видите предупредување кога ќе се обидете да зачувате или да испратите документ којшто содржи снимени промени, верзии, или белешки.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_PRINTDOCS e0 Изберете за да видите предупредување кога ќе се обидете да испечатите документ којшто содржи снимени промени или белешки.
3e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_MACROSEC 4a Го отвора дијалогот Безбедност на макро.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_WEBCONNECTION_INFO%3APB_REMOVE 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
3f uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_MASTERPASSWORD_CRT%3AED_MASTERPASSWORD_CRT 1a Enter the master password.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_MASTERPASSWORD 27 Opens the Enter Master Password dialog.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_REMOVEINFO 1b5 Изберете корисничките податоци секогаш да се отстрануваат од својствата на документот. Ако оваа опција не е избрана, сепак ќе може да ги отстраните личните информации од тековниот документ со копчето Избриши од Датотека - Својства - Општо.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_SAVESENDDOCS 10a Изберете за да видите предупредување кога ќе се обидете да зачувате или да испратите документ којшто содржи снимени промени, верзии, или белешки.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_STARBASIC_WARNING 11c Доколку ова поле е обележано, при изнесувањето на HTML ќе биде прикажано предупредување кое кажува дека сите постоечки %PRODUCTNAME Basic - макроа ќе бидат избришани.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE2 109 Користете ги копчињата за ротирање од Големина 1 до Големина 7 за да дефинирате соодветни големини на фонтови за ознаките за HTML <font size=1> до <font size=7>.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_UNKNOWN_TAGS c1 Изберете ја оваа опција ако сакате ознаките што не се препознаени од $[officename] да бидат внесени како полиња.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE3 109 Користете ги копчињата за ротирање од Големина 1 до Големина 7 за да дефинирате соодветни големини на фонтови за ознаките за HTML <font size=1> до <font size=7>.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ALB_CHARSET 68 Изберете го соодветното множество знаци за изнесувањето
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE1 109 Користете ги копчињата за ротирање од Големина 1 до Големина 7 за да дефинирате соодветни големини на фонтови за ознаките за HTML <font size=1> до <font size=7>.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE4 109 Користете ги копчињата за ротирање од Големина 1 до Големина 7 за да дефинирате соодветни големини на фонтови за ознаките за HTML <font size=1> до <font size=7>.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_NUMBERS_ENGLISH_US 19b Ако не е избрано, броевите ќе бидат интерпретирани според поставувањето во Алатки - Опции - Поставувања за јазик - Јазик на - Поставување за локал. Ако е обележано, броевите ќе се интерпретираат според локалот „Англиски (САД)“.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_IGNORE_FONTNAMES 11f Изберете ја оваа опција за да ги игнорирате сите поставувања на фонтови при внесување. Ќе се користат фонтовите што биле дефинирани во Стилот за HTML-страница.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_PRINT_EXTENSION 55 If you mark this field, the print layout of the current document is exported as well.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE5 109 Користете ги копчињата за ротирање од Големина 1 до Големина 7 за да дефинирате соодветни големини на фонтови за ознаките за HTML <font size=1> до <font size=7>.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE7 109 Користете ги копчињата за ротирање од Големина 1 до Големина 7 за да дефинирате соодветни големини на фонтови за ознаките за HTML <font size=1> до <font size=7>.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_LOCAL_GRF 1d1 Изберете ја оваа опција за автоматски да ги копирате вградените графики во документот на избраниот Интернет-сервер кога качувате со FTP. Користете го дијалогот Зачувај како за да го зачувате документот и внесете целосно FTP URL како име на Интернет-датотека.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_STARBASIC c0 Изберете ја оваа опција за да ги земете предвид инструкциите на $[officename] Basic при изнесувањето во HTML-формат.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ALB_EXPORT 68 Ги дефинира поставувањата за изнесување на HTML-документи.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE6 109 Користете ги копчињата за ротирање од Големина 1 до Големина 7 за да дефинирате соодветни големини на фонтови за ознаките за HTML <font size=1> до <font size=7>.
14 .uno%3ASwEditOptions 143 Овие поставувања одредуваат на кој начин се ракува со текстуалните документи креирани во $[officename]. Исто така може да се дефинираат поставувања за тековниот текстуален документ.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_GRF 70 Одредува дали да се прикажуваат графики и објекти на екранот.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_VSCROLL 50 Ја прикажува вертикалната лента за движење.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_HRULER a7 Го прикажува хоризонталниот линијар. Изберете по желба мерна единица од соодветната листа.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ALB_VMETRIC a3 Го прикажува вертикалниот линијар. Изберете по желба мерна единица од соодветната листа.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_VRULER a3 Го прикажува вертикалниот линијар. Изберете по желба мерна единица од соодветната листа.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_ANY_RULER b7 Ги вклучува линијарите. Користете ги следните две полиња за да изберете кои линијари да се прикажат.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_HSCROLL 54 Ја прикажува хоризонталната лента за движење.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_TBL 5d Ги прикажува табелите содржани во Вашиот документ.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_FIELD 91 Ги прикажува имињата на полињата во документот наместо содржината на полињата.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ALB_METRIC 46 Ја одредува единицата за HTML-документи.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_CROSS ab Displays snap lines around the frames when frames are moved. You can select the Helplines While Moving option to show the exact position of the object using lineal values.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_POSTIT 138 Ги прикажува белешките и скриптите што ги содржи документот. Белешките ќе бидат прикажани како обоени полиња. Кликнете двапати на некое од нив за да ги читате и уредувате.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_SMOOTH_SCROLL 60 Ја активира функцијата за мазно движење на страници.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_VRULER_RIGHT 61 Го порамнува вертикалниот линијар со десната страна.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_DRWFAST 78 Ги прикажува цртежите и контролите што ги содржи Вашиот документ.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ALB_HMETRIC a7 Го прикажува хоризонталниот линијар. Изберете по желба мерна единица од соодветната листа.
16 .uno%3ATableBoundaries 13c За да ги прикажете границите на табелите, кликнете со десното копче на која било табела и изберете Граници на табелa или во документ од Writer изберете Tабела - Граници на табелa.
24 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_IDX 8a Го одредува фонтот што ќе се користи за индекси, азбучни индекси и содржини.
25 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LIST 7d Ги одредува фонтовите за листи и нумерирања и сите изведени стилови.
2f sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_STANDARD_SIZE 3d Ја одредува големината на фонтот.
2c sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_TITLE_SIZE 3d Ја одредува големината на фонтот.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ACB_DOCONLY 72 Одредува дека поставувањата важат само за тековниот документ.
2c sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LABEL_SIZE 3d Ја одредува големината на фонтот.
f SW_HID_STD_FONT 7d Ги одредува поставувањата за основните фонтови во Вашите документи.
2c sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_INDEX_SIZE 3d Ја одредува големината на фонтот.
29 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_STANDARD 7a Го одредува фонтот што ќе се користи за стилот на пасус Стандарден.
26 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_TITLE 5b Го одредува фонтот што ќе се користи за заглавија.
2b sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LIST_SIZE 3d Ја одредува големината на фонтот.
26 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LABEL 72 Го одредува фонтот што се користи за наслови на слики и табели.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_CTRLFLD 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 2ad Ако е вклучено, се печатат автоматски вметнатите празни страници. Ова е најдобро ако печатите двострано. На пример: Во некоја книга стилот за пасус на поглавје е наместен секогаш да започнува со непарна страница. Ако претходното поглавје завршува со непарна страница. %PRODUCTNAME ќе вметне празна парна страница. Оваа опција определува дали да се печати таа парна страница или не.
34 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PAPERFROMSETUP a9 For printers with multiple trays, the "Paper tray from printer settings" option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_REVERSE 72 Specifies whether to reverse the printing order. The last page of the document will then be the first one printed.
2c sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_PROSPECT_RTL 59 Check to print the pages of the brochure in the correct order for a right-to-left script.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_SINGLEJOBS 62 Specifies that each new print job will begin on a new page even if you are using a duplex printer.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 72 Одредува дека нема да се печатат белешките во Вашиот документ.
36 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintControls%3ACheckBox 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
28 SW%3ALISTBOX%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ALB_FAX 11f Доколку сте инсталирале софтвер за факс на Вашиот компјутер и сакате да испратите факс директно од текстуалниот документ, тука изберете ја машината за факс.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_BLACK_FONT 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
40 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPicturesAndObjects%3ACheckBox 41 Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed.
2b SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ARB_NO 72 Одредува дека нема да се печатат белешките во Вашиот документ.
38 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_RIGHTP 4a Specifies whether to print all right (odd numbered) pages of the document.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_BACKGROUND 10d Одредува дали во испечатениот документ да се вклучат боите и објектите што се вметнати во подлогата на страницата (Форматирај - Страница - Подлога).
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_LEFTP 4a Specifies whether to print all left (even numbered) pages of the document.
2b sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_HIDDEN_TEXT 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
14 SW_HID_OPTPRINT_PAGE 7e Ги одредува поставувањата за печатење во текстуален или HTML-документ.
30 sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_TEXT_PLACEHOLDER 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PGRF 41 Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PROSPECT 45 Select the Brochure option to print your document in brochure format.
3c .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox 10d Одредува дали во испечатениот документ да се вклучат боите и објектите што се вметнати во подлогата на страницата (Форматирај - Страница - Подлога).
2f sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_PRINTEMPTYPAGES 2ad Ако е вклучено, се печатат автоматски вметнатите празни страници. Ова е најдобро ако печатите двострано. На пример: Во некоја книга стилот за пасус на поглавје е наместен секогаш да започнува со непарна страница. Ако претходното поглавје завршува со непарна страница. %PRODUCTNAME ќе вметне празна парна страница. Оваа опција определува дали да се печати таа парна страница или не.
3d .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
14 SW_HID_OPTTABLE_PAGE 72 Ги дефинира атрибутите на табелите во текстуалните документи.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_REPEAT_HEADER a8 Одредува дали заглавието на табелата се пренесува во новата страница по прелом на страница.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ARB_FIX 9d Одредува дека промените на ред или колона влијаат само на соодветната соседна област.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_NUMFMT_FORMATTING 139 Доколку Препознавање формат на броеви не е обележано, ќе се прифаќа внес што е само во форматот што е поставен за ќелијата. Кој било друг внес го ресетира форматот на Текст.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ARB_VAR 8c Одредува дека промените на ред или колона влијаат на големината на табелата.
32 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_NUMALIGNMENT 80 Одредува дека броевите секогаш се порамнуваат долу десно во ќелијата.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_HEADER a7 Одредува дека првиот ред од табелата е форматиран со стилот на пасус „Заглавие на табела“.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_BORDER 66 Одредува дека ќелиите на табелите стандардно имаат раб.
1d .uno%3ATableNumberRecognition a0 Одредува дека броевите во табела со текст се препознаваат и се форматираат како броеви.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_DONT_SPLIT a4 Одредува дека табелите не се разделуваат од каков и да е тип на прекин во текот на текстот.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_NUMFORMATTING a0 Одредува дека броевите во табела со текст се препознаваат и се форматираат како броеви.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_ROWMOVE 70 Ја одредува вредноста што ќе се користи при преместување ред.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ARB_FIXPROP 82 Одредува дека промените на ред или колона имаат ефект на целата табела.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_COLINSERT 67 Ја одредува стандардната вредност за вметнување редови.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_ROWINSERT 67 Ја одредува стандардната вредност за вметнување редови.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_COLMOVE 76 Ја одредува вредноста што ќе се користи при преместување колона.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_PARA fc Одредува дали се прикажуваат разделувачите на пасуси. Разделувачите на пасуси исто така содржат и информација за форматирање на пасусот.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLTAB 7f When the direct cursor is used, as many tabs as necessary are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLINDENT 9d When the direct cursor is used, the left paragraph indent is set at the horizontal position where you click the direct cursor. The paragraph is left aligned.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_CHAR_HIDDEN 66 Displays text that uses the character format "hidden", when View - Non-printing Characters is enabled.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLSPACE 9f When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_FLD_HIDDEN_PARA 6e If you have inserted text using the Hidden Paragraph field, specifies whether to display the hidden paragraph.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLMARGIN 102 Sets the paragraph alignment when the direct cursor is used. Depending on where the mouse is clicked, the paragraph is formatted left aligned, centered or right aligned. The cursor before the mouse-click shows, by means of a triangle, which alignment is set.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_ALLOW_IN_PROT 57 Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes.
12 SW_HID_OPTSHDWCRSR c3 Во текстуалните и HTML-документите $[officename] го дефинира приказот на одредени знаци и на директниот покажувач.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_HSPACE a9 Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as gray boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Ctrl+Spacebar shortcut keys.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_SHYPH 2cb Одредува дали се прикажуваат разделувачите дефинирани од корисникот. Овие се скриени разделувачи што ги внесувате во рамките на збор со притискање на Ctrl+Цртичка(-). Зборовите со разделувачи дефинирани од корисникот се разделуваат само на крајот на редот на местото каде што бил вметнат разделувач дефиниран од корисникот, независно од тоа дали автоматското разделување е активирано или не.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_BREAK 82 Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift+Enter shortcut. These breaks create a new line, but do not start a new paragraph.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_FLD_HIDDEN 47 Displays text that is hidden by Conditional Text or Hidden Text fields.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_SPACE 42 Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_SHDWCRSONOFF 1c Activates the Direct cursor.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_TAB 37 Specifies that tab stops are displayed as small arrows.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_MARKPOS 3e Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_DEL_COL eb It is possible to select a color to identify each type of recorded change. By entering "By author" from the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename] and modified according to the corresponding author of the changes.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_LC_COL 43 Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_DEL_ATTR ca Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_INS_ATTR 4a Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_INS_COL eb It is possible to select a color to identify each type of recorded change. By entering "By author" from the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename] and modified according to the corresponding author of the changes.
12 SW_HID_REDLINE_OPT 32 Defines the appearance of changes in the document.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_CHG_ATTR 88 Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_CHG_COL eb It is possible to select a color to identify each type of recorded change. By entering "By author" from the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename] and modified according to the corresponding author of the changes.
39 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_USE_SQUARE_PAGE_MODE 47 When this setting is enabled, the text grid will look like square page.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ARB_ALWAYS 2e Always updates links while loading a document.
13 SW_HID_OPTLOAD_PAGE 2e Specifies general settings for text documents.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_AUTO_UPDATE_FIELDS c8 The contents of all fields are updated automatically whenever the screen contents are displayed as new. Even with this box unchecked, some fields are updated each time a special condition takes place.
32 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_USE_CHAR_UNIT 99 When this setting is enabled, the measurement units of indents and spacing on Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing tab will be character (ch) and line.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_AUTO_UPDATE_CHARTS 81 Specifies whether to automatically update charts. The Charts option is automatically activated if the Fields box has been marked.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ARB_NEVER 31 Links are never updated while loading a document.
2f sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ARB_REQUEST 37 Updates links only on request while loading a document.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ALB_METRIC 5c Ја одредува единицата за мерка за текст документи.
2f sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ARB_NEVER 31 Links are never updated while loading a document.
2b sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3AMF_TAB 37 Specifies the spacing between the individual tab stops.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ARB_REQUEST 37 Updates links only on request while loading a document.
30 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ARB_ALWAYS 2e Always updates links while loading a document.
38 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_USE_PRINTER_METRICS 6a Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_OPTCOMPATIBILITY_PAGE%3APB_DEFAULT 69 Click to use the current settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME.
1c SW_HID_OPTCOMPATIBILITY_PAGE 8c Specifies compatibility settings for text documents. These options help in fine-tuning %PRODUCTNAME when importing Microsoft Word documents.
30 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ALB_CHARSTYLE 1e Specifies the character style.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ABOX_FORMAT 29 Specifies the type of numbering required.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3AEDT_TEXT 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ALB_LEVEL 4f Specifies the headings or chapter levels where you want the numbering to start.
2d sw%3AEdit%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3AED_SEPARATOR 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
15 SW_HID_OPTCAPTION_CLB 4a Select the object type for which the AutoCaption settings are to be valid.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ABOX_POS 42 Determines the position of the caption with respect to the object.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ACB_APPLYBORDER 41 Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame.
31 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ABOX_CATEGORY 2e Specifies the category of the selected object.
3a svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ANUM_FLD_DIVISION_X 4c Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the X-axis.
15 .uno%3AHelplinesFront 2c Sets the snap lines in front of all objects.
14 SVX_HID_OPTIONS_GRID cc Specifies the settings for the configurable grid on your document pages. This grid helps you determine the exact position of your objects. You can also set this grid in line with the "magnetic" snap grid.
10 .uno%3AGridFront 2e Sets the visible grid in front of all objects.
34 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_GRID_VISIBLE 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
35 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_DRAW_Y 51 Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SYNCHRONIZE 44 Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically.
3a svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ANUM_FLD_DIVISION_Y 4c Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the Y-axis.
34 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_USE_GRIDSNAP 5a Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points.
35 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_DRAW_X 4e Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis.
12 .uno%3AGridVisible 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
13 .uno%3AToolsOptions f4 Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes.
14 .uno%3AScEditOptions f4 Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_OUTLINE 84 If you have defined an outline, the Outline symbols option specifies whether to view the outline symbols at the border of the sheet.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_PAGEBREAKS 46 Specifies whether to view the page breaks within a defined print area.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_RFIND bf Specifies that each reference is highlighted in color in the formula. The cell range is also enclosed by a colored border as soon as the cell containing the reference is selected for editing.
2d sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_OBJGRF 4f Defines if objects and graphics are shown, hidden or replaced by a placeholder.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_NIL 36 Specifies whether to show numbers with the value of 0.
12 .uno%3ANoteVisible 59 To display a note permanently, select the Show note command from the cell's context menu.
34 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_ROWCOLHEADER 34 Specifies whether to display row and column headers.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_FORMULA 43 Specifies whether to show formulas instead of results in the cells.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_GRID db Specifies when grid lines will be displayed. Default is to display grid lines only on cells that do not have a background color. You can choose to also display grid lines on cells with background color, or to hide them.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_ANCHOR 67 Specifies whether the anchor icon is displayed when an inserted object, such as a graphic, is selected.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_ANNOT c9 Specifies that an inserted note is displayed when the mouse is held over the corresponding cell. A small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a note exists and can be displayed.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_CLIP f3 If a cell contains text that is wider than the width of the cell, the text is displayed over empty neighboring cells in the same row. If there is no empty neighboring cell, a small triangle at the cell border indicates that the text continues.
2c sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_COLOR 3d Specifies a color for the grid lines in the current document.
15 SC_HID_SCPAGE_CONTENT 86 Defines which elements of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc main window are displayed. You can also show or hide highlighting of values in tables.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_TBLREG 56 Specifies whether to display the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet document.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_HSCROLL 59 Specifies whether to display a horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the document window.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_SYNCZOOM 74 If checked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not checked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_DRAW 5b Defines if drawing objects in your document are shown, hidden or replaced by a placeholder.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_VALUE d1 Mark the Value highlighting box to highlight all values in the sheet. Text cells are highlighted in black, cells with numbers in blue, and cells containing formulas, logical values, dates, and so on, in green.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_VSCROLL 56 Specifies whether to display a vertical scrollbar at the right of the document window.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_DIAGRAM 52 Defines if charts in your document are shown, hidden or replaced by a placeholder.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_GUIDELINE 5a Specifies whether to view guides when moving drawings, frames, graphics and other objects.
2d sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3AMF_TAB 1f Defines the tab stops distance.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_MARKHDR 56 Specifies whether to highlight column and row headers in the selected columns or rows.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_ALIGN 64 Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_EDITMODE 4e Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_TEXTFMT 6a Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_REPLWARN 6d Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning appears.
13 .uno%3ASetInputMode 4e Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ALB_ALIGN 64 Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_FORMAT 74 Specifies whether to automatically apply the formatting attributes of the selected cell to the empty adjacent cells.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ALB_UNIT 2c Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_EXPREF f9 Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_NEW 37 Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box.
36 sc%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3AED_ENTRIES 50 Displays the content of the currently selected list. This content can be edited.
17 SC_HID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS 9c All user-defined lists are displayed in the Sort Lists dialog. You can also define and edit your own lists. Only text can be used as sort lists, no numbers.
31 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_COPY 10d Copies the contents of the cells in the Copy list from box. If you select a reference to related rows and columns, the Copy List dialog appears after clicking the button. You can use this dialog to define if the reference is converted to sort lists by row or by column.
2e sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3AED_COPYFROM 99 Defines the spreadsheet and the cells to copy, in order to include them in the Lists box. The currently selected range in the spreadsheet is the default.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_ADD 23 Adds a new list into the Lists box.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ALB_LISTS 4a Displays all the available lists. These lists can be selected for editing.
25 sc%3AModalDialog%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW 2f Allows you to copy marked cells to a sort list.
36 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW%3ABTN_GROUP_COLS 56 Select the Columns option to summarize the contents of the selected columns in a list.
36 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW%3ABTN_GROUP_ROWS 50 Select the Rows option to summarize the contents of the selected rows in a list.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_ITERATE b1 Specifies whether formulas with iterative references (formulas that are continuously repeated until the problem is solved) are calculated after a specific number of repetitions.
2a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_CALC 57 Specifies whether to make calculations using the rounded values displayed in the sheet.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_MATCH 6d Specifies that the search criteria you set for the Calc database functions must match the whole cell exactly.
2d sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3AED_PREC 5b Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the Standard number format.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_LOOKUP 7d Specifies that you can use the text in any cell as a label for the column below the text or the row to the right of the text.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_REGEX 68 Specifies that regular expressions are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons.
30 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_DATESTD 1c Sets 12/30/1899 as day zero.
2a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_CASE 64 Specifies whether to distinguish between upper and lower case in texts when comparing cell contents.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_DATESC10 62 Sets 1/1/1900 as day zero. Use this setting for StarCalc 1.0 spreadsheets containing date entries.
12 SC_HID_SCPAGE_CALC 32 Defines the calculation settings for spreadsheets.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_DATE1904 63 Sets 1/1/1904 as day zero. Use this setting for spreadsheets that are imported in a foreign format.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_GENERAL_PREC dd You can specify the maximum number of decimal places that are shown by default for cells with General number format. If not enabled, cells with General number format show as many decimal places as the column width allows.
2e sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3AED_STEPS 2b Sets the maximum number of iteration steps.
24 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3AED_EPS a1 Specifies the difference between two iteration step results. If the result of the iteration is lower than the minimum change value, then the iteration will stop.
17 SC_HID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE 5c The Changes dialog specifies various options for highlighting recorded changes in documents.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_REMOVE 39 Specifies the color to highlight deletions in a document.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_MOVE 35 Specifies the color to highlight moved cell contents.
31 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_CONTENT 31 Specifies the color for changes of cell contents.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_INSERT 3a Specifies the color to highlight insertions in a document.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_PRINT%3ABTN_SKIPEMPTYPAGES 56 Specifies that empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_PRINT%3ABTN_SELECTEDSHEETS 75 Specifies that only selected sheets are printed, even if you choose the print range "All" in the File - Print dialog.
1b SC_HID_SCPAGE_COMPATIBILITY 34 Defines compatibility options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
15 SC_HID_SCPAGE_FORMULA 35 Defines formula syntax options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
16 SC_HID_SCPAGE_DEFAULTS 37 Defines default settings for new spreadsheet documents.
14 .uno%3ASdEditOptions db Defines various settings for newly created presentation documents, such as the contents to be displayed, the measurement unit used, if and how grid alignment is carried out, and if notes and handouts are always printed.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_RULER 54 Specifies whether to display the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area.
36 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_MOVE_OUTLINE 59 %PRODUCTNAME displays the contour line of each individual object when moving this object.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_VIEW 32 Specifies the available alternative display modes.
38 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_HANDLES_BEZIER ec Displays the control points of all Bézier points if you have previously selected a Bézier curve. If the All control points in Bézier editor option is not marked, only the control points of the selected Bézier points will be visible.
14 .uno%3AHelplinesMove 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
33 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_HELPLINES 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
1a SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_CONTENTS 32 Specifies the available alternative display modes.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_BORDER 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
30 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_BIGORTHO 16b Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter.
34 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 7d Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating spin box.
13 .uno%3AHelplinesUse 57 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse.
11 .uno%3ASnapBorder 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
38 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_SNAP_AREA cd Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range spin box.
2e svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_ROTATE 7d Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating spin box.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_POINTS 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
38 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_BEZ_ANGLE 26 Defines the angle for point reduction.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_FRAME 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_HELPLINES 57 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse.
10 .uno%3ASnapFrame 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
11 .uno%3ASnapPoints 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
2d svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_ORTHO 79 Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_SNAP 3a Defines the grid settings for creating and moving objects.
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_COLOR 34 Specifies that you want to print in original colors.
2c sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_FRONT 2e Select Front to print the front of a brochure.
33 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_GRAYSCALE 35 Specifies that you want to print colors as grayscale.
33 SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_HIDDEN_PAGES 55 Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation.
2f SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_PAGENAME 37 Specifies whether to print the page name of a document.
17 SD_HID_SD_PRINT_OPTIONS 43 Specifies print settings within a drawing or presentation document.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_PAGETILE a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_DEFAULT 44 Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_BOOKLET 44 Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format.
2b SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_DATE 2c Specifies whether to print the current date.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_PAGESIZE 89 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer.
2b SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_TIME 2b Specifies wither to print the current time.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_PAPERBIN 52 Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_BLACKWHITE 41 Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white.
2b sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_BACK 2c Select Back to print the back of a brochure.
34 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_MERGE_PARA_DIST 68 Specifies that $[officename] Impress calculates the paragraph spacing exactly like Microsoft PowerPoint.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_QUICKEDIT 6e If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text.
39 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_CROOK_NO_CONTORTION 70 Maintains relative alignment of Bézier points and 2D drawing objects to each other when you distort the object.
36 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_MASTERPAGE_CACHE 4d Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master page.
34 sd%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3AMTR_FLD_TABSTOP 26 Defines the spacing between tab stops.
39 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_START_WITH_TEMPLATE 64 Specifies whether to activate the Wizard when opening a presentation with File - New - Presentation.
31 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_PICKTHROUGH 3e Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text.
10 .uno%3AQuickEdit 6e If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text.
12 .uno%3APickThrough 3e Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text.
3c sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_START_WITH_ACTUAL_PAGE 4e Specifies that you always want a presentation to start with the current slide.
3d sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_MARKED_HIT_MOVES_ALWAYS a6 Specifies that you want to move an object with the Rotate tool enabled. If Object always moveable is not marked, the Rotate tool can only be used to rotate an object.
2a sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_COPY 69 If enabled, a copy is created when you move an object while holding down the Ctrl key (Mac: Command key).
2a sd%3AComboBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_SCALE 2b Determines the drawing scale on the rulers.
2a sd%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ALB_METRIC 35 Determines the Unit of measurement for presentations.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_MISC 42 Defines the general options for drawing or presentation documents.
17 .uno%3ASdGraphicOptions ae Defines the global settings for drawing documents, including the contents to be displayed, the scale to be used, the grid alignment and the contents to be printed by default.
14 .uno%3ASmEditOptions 97 Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math.
3d starmath%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ACB_IGNORE_SPACING 56 Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line.
16 SFX2_HID_PRINT_OPTIONS 3e Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents.
36 starmath%3AMetricField%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3AMF_ZOOM 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
31 STARMATH_CHECKBOX_RID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE_CB_TITLEROW 53 Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout.
28 starmath%3ATabPage%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE 3e Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents.
d tobeannounced 49 Saves only those symbols with each formula that are used in that formula.
36 starmath%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ARB_ZOOM 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
3f starmath%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ARB_ORIGINAL_SIZE 3b Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size.
3c starmath%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ACB_EQUATION_TEXT 5f Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout.
2e STARMATH_CHECKBOX_RID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE_CB_FRAME 3a Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.
3d starmath%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ARB_FIT_TO_PAGE 3c Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OPTPAGE_CHART_DEFCOLORS%3ALB_CHART_COLOR_LIST 36 Displays all the colors available for the data series.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OPTPAGE_CHART_DEFCOLORS%3APB_RESET_TO_DEFAULT 4d Restores the color settings that were defined when the program was installed.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_PBAS_STG 11a Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with it in an unchanged form.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_WBAS_CODE d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_WBAS_STG 11a Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with it in an unchanged form.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_PBAS_CODE d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
3a svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_EBAS_EXECTBL bf The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_EBAS_STG 11a Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with it in an unchanged form.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_EBAS_CODE d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
1b CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_MSFLTR2_CLB ad The List Box field displays the entries for the pair of OLE objects that can be converted when loading into $[officename] (L) and/or when saving into a Microsoft format (S).
32 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_COMPLEX_LANG 3e Specifies the language for the complex text layout spellcheck.
33 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_LOCALESETTING 34 Specifies the locale setting of the country setting.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_DECIMALSEPARATOR 7a Specifies to use the decimal separator key that is set in your system when you press the respective key on the number pad.
2f cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_WEST_LANG 4d Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in western alphabets.
33 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_USERINTERFACE 58 Select the language used for the user interface, for example menus, dialogs, help files.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_CURRENT_DOC 5a Specifies that the settings for default languages are valid only for the current document.
2f cui%3AEdit%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3AED_DATEPATTERNS cd Specifies the date acceptance patterns for the current locale. Calc spreadsheet and Writer table cell input needs to match locale dependent date acceptance patterns before it is recognized as a valid date.
30 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_ASIAN_LANG 4b Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in Asian alphabets.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_ASIANSUPPORT 70 Activates Asian languages support. You can now modify the corresponding Asian language settings in %PRODUCTNAME.
31 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_CTLSUPPORT 7c Activates complex text layout support. You can now modify the settings corresponding to complex text layout in %PRODUCTNAME.
2e cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_CURRENCY 5c Specifies the default currency that is used for the currency format and the currency fields.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ALB_LANGUAGE 4e Specifies the language for which you want to define first and last characters.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_NO_COMP 30 Specifies that no compression at all will occur.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_CHAR_PUNCT 4d Specifies that kerning is applied to both western text and Asian punctuation.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ACB_STANDARD 75 When you mark Default, the following two text boxes are filled with the default characters for the selected language:
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_PUNCT_KANA_COMP 3c Specifies that punctuation and Japanese Kana are compressed.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3AED_START 51 Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the beginning of a line.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_PUNCT_COMP 32 Specifies that only the punctuation is compressed.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_CHAR_KERNING 37 Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text.
2e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3AED_END 4b Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the end of a line.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_IGNORE_WHITESPACES 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_IGNORE_MIDDLE_DOT 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_IAIYA 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
47 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_FULL_HALF_WIDTH 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
47 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_TSITHICHI_DHIZI 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_DIZI_DUZU 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
45 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_HYUFYU_BYUVYU 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_VARIANT_FORM_KANJI 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_IGNORE_PUNCTUATION 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
4b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_PROLONGED_SOUNDMARK 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
46 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_OLD_KANA_FORMS 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
49 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_HIRAGANA_KATAKANA 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_KIKU 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_BAVA_HAFA 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_CONTRACTIONS 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
42 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_SESHE_ZEJE 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
49 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_REPEAT_CHAR_MARKS 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
48 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_MINUS_DASH_CHOON 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_CASE 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ACB_SEQUENCECHECKING 36 Enables sequence input checking for languages as Thai.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ARB_MOVEMENT_VISUAL 54 The text cursor moves to the right with Arrow Right and to the left with Arrow Left.
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ARB_MOVEMENT_LOGICAL 5d The text cursor moves to the text end with Arrow Right and to the text begin with Arrow Left.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ALB_NUMERALS ac Selects the type of numerals used within text, text in objects, fields, and controls, in all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Only cell contents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc are not affected.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_CONNPOOLOPTIONS%3ACB_DRIVERPOOLING 73 Select a driver from the list and mark the Enable pooling for this driver checkbox in order to pool its connection.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_CONNPOOLOPTIONS%3ACB_POOL_CONNS 34 Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSBROWSER_DISCONNECTING 34 Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_CONNPOOLOPTIONS%3ANF_TIMEOUT 45 Defines the time in seconds after which a pooled connection is freed.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_DBREGISTER%3ABTN_EDIT 3a Opens the Database Link dialog to edit the selected entry.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_DBREGISTER%3ABTN_DELETE 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_DBREGISTER%3ABTN_NEW 35 Opens the Database Link dialog to create a new entry.
17 CUI_HID_DBPATH_CTL_PATH 67 Lists the registered name and database file of all registered databases. Double-click an entry to edit.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCUMENTLINK%3APB_BROWSEFILE 3b Opens a file dialog where you can select the database file.
27 cui%3AEdit%3ADLG_DOCUMENTLINK%3AET_NAME 52 Enter a name for the database. %PRODUCTNAME uses this name to access the database.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3APB_PARAMETER 27 Opens the Java Start Parameters dialog.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3APB_ADD 38 Add a path to the root folder of a JRE on your computer.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3APB_CLASSPATH 1c Opens the Class Path dialog.
19 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_JAVA_LIST 24 Select the JRE that you want to use.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3ACB_JAVA_ENABLE 40 Allows you to run Java applications and applets in %PRODUCTNAME.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3APB_ADDPATH 35 Select a folder and add the folder to the class path.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3ALB_PATH 3f Specifies the location of Java classes or Java class libraries.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3APB_REMOVE_PATH 64 Select an archive or a folder in the list and click Remove to remove the object from the class path.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3APB_ADDARCHIVE 4f Select an archive file in jar or zip format and add the file to the class path.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3APB_REMOVE 29 Deletes the selected JRE start parameter.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3APB_ASSIGN 31 Adds the current JRE start parameter to the list.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3AED_PARAMETER 8e Enter a start parameter for a JRE as you would on a command line. Click Assign to add the parameter to the list of available start parameters.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3ALB_ASSIGNED 72 Lists the assigned JRE start parameters. To remove a start parameter, select the parameter, and then click Remove.
3a xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_LOW c5 A macro can be set to auto-start, and it can perform potentially damaging actions, as for example delete or rename files. This setting is not recommended when you open documents from other authors.
3d xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_MEDIUM e6 Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. All other macros require your confirmation.
3f xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_VERYHIGH 7c Trusted file locations can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
3b xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_HIGH bf Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Only signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
4a xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3APB_REMOVE_TRUSTCERT 47 Removes the selected certificate from the list of trusted certificates.
48 xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3APB_VIEW_TRUSTCERT 3f Opens the View Certificate dialog for the selected certificate.
4d xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3AFL_REMOVE_TRUSTFILELOC 44 Removes the selected folder from the list of trusted file locations.
43 xmlsecurity%3AListBox%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3ALB_TRUSTFILELOC c4 Trusted file locations are used only if the security level is set to "very high". With this setting, document macros are only executed if they have been opened from one of the following locations.
4a xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3AFL_ADD_TRUSTFILELOC 5e Opens a folder selection dialog. Select a folder from which all macros are allowed to execute.
28 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_TRUSTSOURCES 1f Lists the trusted certificates.
2b sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3ANF_PORT 14 Enter the SMTP port.
33 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3APB_AUTHENTICATION 72 Opens the Server Authentication dialog where you can specify the server authentication settings for secure e-mail.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3ACB_REPLYTO 64 Uses the e-mail address that you enter in the Reply address text box as the reply-to e-mail address.
23 SW_CHECKBOX_TP_MAILCONFIG_CB_SECURE 39 When available, uses a secure connection to send e-mails.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3APB_TEST 44 Opens the Test Account Settings dialog to test the current settings.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_ADDRESS 26 Enter your e-mail address for replies.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_DISPLAYNAME 10 Enter your name.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_SERVER 1b Enter the SMTP server name.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_REPLYTO 2c Enter the address to use for e-mail replies.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ARB_EVERYMONTH 4a Проверката ќе се изведува еднаш месечно.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ACB_AUTOCHECK 82 Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3APB_CHECKNOW 35 Проверката ќе се изведе сега.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ARB_EVERYDAY 48 Проверката ќе се изведува еднаш дневно.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ARB_EVERYWEEK 81 Проверката ќе се изведува еднаш неделно. Ова е стандардно поставување.
33 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_SERVER 38 Enter the server name of your POP 3 or IMAP mail server.
46 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_SEP_AUTHENTICATION 3d Select if your SMTP server requires a user name and password.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_IMAP 32 Specifies that the incoming mail server uses IMAP.
39 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ANF_PORT 2a Enter the port on the POP3 or IMAP server.
3f sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ACB_AUTHENTICATION 43 Enables the authentication that is required to send e-mail by SMTP.
35 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_USERNAME 28 Enter the user name for the SMTP server.
38 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_OUTPASSWORD 25 Enter the password for the user name.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_POP3 33 Specifies that the incoming mail server uses POP 3.
37 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_INUSERNAME 28 Enter the user name for the IMAP server.
37 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_INPASSWORD 13 Enter the password.
40 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_SMPTAFTERPOP 50 Select if you are required to first read your e-mail before you can send e-mail.
3a sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_MM_TESTACCOUNTSETTINGS%3AED_ERROR 68 In the Errors list box you can read an explanation of any errors encountered while testing the settings.
21 SW_HID_MM_TESTACCOUNTSETTINGS_TLB 41 In the top list box you will see the results of the test session.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_TESTACCOUNTSETTINGS%3APB_STOP 36 Click the Stop button to stop a test session manually.
2a XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_VIEWSIGNATURES 71 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate.
22 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_CERTPATH 71 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate.
43 xmlsecurity%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_XMLSECTP_CERTPATH%3AML_CERTSTATUS 71 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate.
3f xmlsecurity%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_XMLSECTP_DETAILS%3AML_ELEMENT 45 Use the value list box to view values and copy them to the clipboard.
21 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_DETAILS 64 The Details page of the View Certificate dialog displays detailed information about the certificate.
24 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_ELEMENTS 64 The Details page of the View Certificate dialog displays detailed information about the certificate.
21 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_GENERAL 61 The General page of the View Certificate dialog displays basic information about the certificate.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_ROW 40 Вметнува нов ред под тековниот ред.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_SWAP_COL 3b Switches the current column with its neighbor at the right.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_TEXT_COL 56 Inserts a new text column after the current column for hierarchical axes descriptions.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_DELETE_COL 8a Ја брише тековната колона. Не е возможно да се избрише колоната со заглавие.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATA_SERIES_LABEL 43 Вметнува имиња на податочните серии.
12 .uno%3ADiagramData b7 Го отвара дијалогот за податочната табела каде што можете да ги уредувате податоците на графиконот.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_SWAP_ROW 5a Го преместува тековниот ред со соседниот подолу..
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_DELETE_ROW 82 Го брише тековниот ред. Не е возможно да се избрише редот со заглавјето.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_COL 52 Вметнува нова колона после тековната колона.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisTitle d6 Кликнете на Наслов на оски Вклучи/Исклучи во лентата за форматирање за да се прикажат или скријат ознаките на оските.
12 .uno%3AToggleTitle c8 Клинете на Наслов Вклучи/Исклучи во лентата за форматирање за да се прикаже или скрие насловот и поднасловот.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuTitles 84 Отвара дијалог за внесување или променување на насловите во графиконот.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_LEFT 51 Ја сместува легендата на лево од графиконот.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuLegend 119 Го отвара дијалогот за Легенди, кој ви овозможува да ја променувате позицијата на легендите во графиконот и да одредите дали легендата ќе биде прикажана.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_TOP 53 Ја сместува легендата на врвот од графиконот.
34 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_LEGEND_POS%3ALB_LEGEND_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
13 .uno%3AToggleLegend bc За да ја прикажете или скриете легендата, кликнете на Легенда Вклучи/Исклучи во лентата заФорматирање.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_BOTTOM 53 Ја сместува легендата на дното од графиконот.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_RIGHT 53 Ја сместува легендата на десно од графиконот.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_PLACEMENT 3d Selects the placement of data labels relative to the objects.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_PERCENT 6a Прикажува проценти од податочните точки во секоја колона.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_ROTATION_KNOB 42 Click in the dial to set the text orientation for the data labels.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_NUMBER 72 Ги прикажува апсолутните вредности на секоја податочна точка.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_VALUE 72 Ги прикажува апсолутните вредности на секоја податочна точка.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_ROTATION_EDIT 3e Enter the counterclockwise rotation angle for the data labels.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_SYMBOL 85 Прикажува икони за легенда веднаш до секоја ознака на податочната точка.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_PB_NUMBERFORMAT 2b Opens a dialog to select the number format.
1c CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_PB_PERCENT_NUMBERFORMAT 2f Opens a dialog to select the percentage format.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuDataLabels 94 Го отвара Data labels дијалогот, кој ви овозможува да ги поставите податочните ознаки.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_TEXT 65 Ги прикажува текстуланите ознаки на податочните точки.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_SEPARATOR 48 Selects the separator between multiple text strings for the same object.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_XAXIS 42 Ја прикажува Х оската со потподелби.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_YAXIS 57 Ја прикажува Y оската како линија со потподелби.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_ZAXIS 57 Ја прикажува Z оската како линија со потподелби.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_XAXIS 57 Ја прикажува секундарната Х оска во графиконот.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_YAXIS 56 Ја прикажува секундарната Y оска во графиконот.
15 .uno%3AInsertMenuAxes 6a Ги одредува оските кои треба да се прикажат во графиконот.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_FUNCTION 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SIGMA 84 Го прикажува стандардното отстапување (квадратен корен од варијнатата).
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_CT_INDICATE 3f Го одредува индикаторот за грешки.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_VALUE 51 Enter the value to subtract from the displayed value as the negative error value.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_VARIANT 99 Ја прикажува варијантата помеѓу бројот на податочни точки и соодветните вредности.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PERCENT 81 Прикажува проценти. Приказот одговара на соодветната податочна точка.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_NEGATIVE 1f Shows only negative error bars.
23 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_CONSTERROR 5a Ја прикажува константната вредност во процентот.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_BOTH 27 Shows positive and negative error bars.
23 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PLUS_VALUE 5a Ја прикажува константната вредност во процентот.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_POSITIVE 1f Shows only positive error bars.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_RANGE 7c Enter the address range from where to get the negative error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_RANGE 6d Click Cell Range and then specify a cell range from which to take the positive and negative error bar values.
2f CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_RANGE_CHOOSER 9f Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_RANGE 7c Enter the address range from where to get the positive error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_VALUE 4a Enter the value to add to the displayed value as the positive error value.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_BIGERROR_VALUE 105 Ја прикажува највисоката маргина на грешки во % според највисоката вредност од податочната група. Поставете го процентот во копчето за вртење.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NO_ERROR 72 Одредува дека не сакате било каква функција да биде прикажана.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PERCENT_VALUE 81 Прикажува проценти. Приказот одговара на соодветната податочна точка.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SAME_FOR_BOTH be Enable to use the positive error values also as negative error values. You can only change the value of the "Positve (+)" box. That value gets copied to the "Negative (-)" box automatically.
24 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_FUNCTION_LB 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
2f CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_RANGE_CHOOSER 9f Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_BIGERROR 105 Ја прикажува највисоката маргина на грешки во % според највисоката вредност од податочната група. Поставете го процентот во копчето за вртење.
24 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_MINUS_VALUE 5a Ја прикажува константната вредност во процентот.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuYErrorBars 15c Користете го дијалогот за Статистика за да одредите дали сакате да прикажувате статистички функции кога работите со 2Д објекти, како што е средна вредност, категории за грешки или регресија.
1e .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquation 91 To show the trend line equation, select the trend line in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line Equation.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_LOGARITHMIC 22 A logarithmic trend line is shown.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_NONE 17 No trend line is shown.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_LINEAR 1d A linear trend line is shown.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_SHOW_EQUATION 35 Shows the trend line equation next to the trend line.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuTrendlines 4f Trend lines can be added to all 2D chart types except for Pie and Stock charts.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_SHOW_R_SQUARED 3e Shows the coefficient of determination next to the trend line.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_POWER 1c A power trend line is shown.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_EXPONENTIAL 23 An exponential trend line is shown.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuMeanValues 8c Mean Value Lines are special trend lines that show the mean value. Use Insert - Mean Value Lines to insert mean value lines for data series.
31 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARB_DONT_PAINT 67 For a missing value, no data will be shown. This is the default for chart types Column, Bar, Line, Net.
32 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARBT_OPT_AXIS_2 11e Го променува исцртувањето во размер на Y оската. Оваа оска е видлива само кога барем една податочна серија е доделена кон неа и прегледот на оската е активен.
2a chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTIONS%3AMT_GAP 63 Го одредува растојанието помеѓу колоните во проценти.
2e chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTIONS%3AMT_OVERLAP 86 Ги одредува неопходните поставувања за преклопувачките податочни серии.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_STARTING_ANGLE_DIAL 151 Drag the small dot along the circle or click any position on the circle to set the starting angle of a pie or donut chart. The starting angle is the mathematical angle position where the first piece is drawn. The value of 90 degrees draws the first piece at the 12 o'clock position. A value of 0 degrees starts at the 3 o'clock position.
35 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ACB_BARS_SIDE_BY_SIDE 58 The bars from different data series are shown as if they were attached only to one axis.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARB_CONTINUE_LINE 75 For a missing value, the interpolation from the neighbor values will be shown. This is the default for chart type XY.
32 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_POLAROPTIONS%3ACB_CLOCKWISE ab The default direction in which the pieces of a pie chart are ordered is counterclockwise. Enable the Clockwise direction checkbox to draw the pieces in opposite direction.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ACB_CONNECTOR 143 За графиконите со "напластени" и "процентуални" колони (вертикални ленти), означи го ова поле за штиклирање за да ги поврзеш слоевите на колоната кој припаѓа заедно со овие линии.
32 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARB_ASSUME_ZERO 60 For a missing value, the y-value will be shown as zero. This is the default for chart type Area.
32 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARBT_OPT_AXIS_1 ac Оваа опција е преддефинирано активна. Сите податочни серии се подредени кон примарната Y оска.
38 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ACB_INCLUDE_HIDDEN_CELLS 51 Check to also show values of currently hidden cells within the source cell range.
3b chart2%3ANumericField%3ATP_POLAROPTIONS%3ANF_STARTING_ANGLE 70 Enter the starting angle between 0 and 359 degrees. You can also click the arrows to change the displayed value.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_ZGRID 74 Додава мрежни линии кои ја поделуваат Z оската на помали секции.
1b .uno%3AToggleGridHorizontal 1ad Иконата заВклучување/Исклучување на хоризонталната мрежа на лентата за Форматирање ја префрла видливоста на приказот на Х оската. Забелешка: Ова работи само ако полињата за штиклирање за Малата мрежаво Вметни - Мрежи се нештиклирани.
19 .uno%3AToggleGridVertical 18e Вертикалната Мрежа Вклучено/Исклучено икона на лентата за Форматирање ја префрла видливоста на приказот на мрежата за Y оската. Забелешка: Ова работи само ако на Х оската Малата мрежа не е селектирана во Вметни - Мрежи.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_YGRID 3f Adds gridlines that subdivide the Y axis into smaller sections.
16 .uno%3AInsertMenuGrids 142 Можете да ги поделите оските во секции со доделување мрежни линии кон нив. Ова ви овозможува да добиете подобар преглед на графиконот, посебно ако работите со големи графикони.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_XGRID 74 Додава мрежни линии кои ја поделуваат X оската на помали секции.
16 .uno%3AFormatSelection 58 Доделува одредени својства на избраниот објект.
16 .uno%3ASecondaryYTitle 52 Ги променува својствата на избраниот наслов.
d .uno%3AZTitle 52 Ги променува својствата на избраниот наслов.
d .uno%3AXTitle 52 Ги променува својствата на избраниот наслов.
16 .uno%3ASecondaryXTitle 52 Ги променува својствата на избраниот наслов.
f .uno%3ASubTitle 52 Ги променува својствата на избраниот наслов.
10 .uno%3AMainTitle 52 Ги променува својствата на избраниот наслов.
d .uno%3AYTitle 98 Ги променува својствата на избраниот наслов или својствата заедно на сите наслови.
10 .uno%3AAllTitles 98 Ги променува својствата на избраниот наслов или својствата заедно на сите наслови.
25 CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION_EQUATION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION_TITLE 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
3d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ACB_AXIS_LABEL_TEXTOVERLAP 79 Одредува дека текстот во ќелиите може да ги прекрие другите ќелии.
3b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ACB_AXIS_LABEL_TEXTBREAK 30 Дозволува прелом на текст.
3b chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_DOWNUP 83 Ги распоредува броевите на оската, непарните броеви пониско од парните.
3e chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_AUTOORDER 54 Автоматски ги распоредува броевите на оската.
32 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ALB_AXIS_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_ALIGNMENT_STACKED 81 Доделува вертикална ориентација на текстот за содржината на ќелијата.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisDescr f0 Наслов на оските Вклучено/Исклучено е икона на лентата Форматирање го префрла означувањето на сите оски на вклучено или исклучено.
3b chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_UPDOWN 83 Ги распоредува броевите на оската, парните броеви пониско од непарните.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_ALIGNMENT_DEGREES 6b Ви овозможува рачно да го внесете аголот на ориентацијата.
2c CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_LABEL_LB_AXIS_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
3d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ACB_AXIS_LABEL_SCHOW_DESCR 6a Одредува дали да ги прикаже или сокрие ознаките на оските.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_ALIGNMENT_CTR_DIAL 9e Со кликнување било каде на тркалото се одредува варијабилната ориентација на текстот.
3f chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_SIDEBYSIDE 52 Ги подредува броевите на оската еден до друг.
d .uno%3ALegend 7a Ја одредува границата, областа и знаковните атрибути за легендата.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisB 119 Отвара дијалог каде што можете да ги уредувате својствата на секундарната Y оска. За да вметнете секундарна Y оска, изберете Вметни - Оски и изберете Y оска.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisA 11b Отвара дијалог каде што можете да ги уредувате својствата на секундарната Х оска. За да вметнете секундарна Х оска, изберете Вметни - Оски и изберете X оска.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisZ 87 Отвара дијаог, каде што можете да ги уредите својствата на избраната оска.
15 .uno%3ADiagramAxisAll 87 Отвара дијаог, каде што можете да ги уредите својствата на избраната оска.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisX 87 Отвара дијаог, каде што можете да ги уредите својствата на избраната оска.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisY 72 Отвара дијалог за Y оската за промена на својствата на Y оската.
38 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_REVERSE_MayBeDateAxis 81 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_REVERSE%3AValueAxis 81 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction.
24 CHART2_SPINFIELD_TP_SCALE_EDT_ORIGIN 74 Одредува на која позиција да ги прикаже вредностите по y оската.
2d chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_STEP_MAIN 62 Го одредува интервалот за главната поделба на оските.
35 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_REVERSE%3ACategory 81 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction.
37 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_TIME_RESOLUTION ac Морате прво да ја деселектирате опцијата Автоматски за да можете да ги промените вредностите.
2d chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_SCALE%3AMT_STEPHELP 58 Го одредува интервалот за под-поделба на оските.
2f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_HELP_TIME_UNIT 4d Minor interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years.
27 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_MIN 66 Ја одредува минималната вредност за почеток на Y оската.
31 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_STEP_HELP ac Морате прво да ја деселектирате опцијата Автоматски за да можете да ги промените вредностите.
2a chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_ORIGIN 74 Одредува на која позиција да ги прикаже вредностите по y оската.
27 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_MAX 66 Ја одредува максималната вредност за крајот на Y оската.
2f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_MAIN_TIME_UNIT 4d Major interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years.
31 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_STEP_MAIN ac Морате прво да ја деселектирате опцијата Автоматски за да можете да ги промените вредностите.
2b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_MIN ac Морате прво да ја деселектирате опцијата Автоматски за да можете да ги промените вредностите.
30 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_TIME_RESOLUTION 47 Resolution can be set to show days, months, or years as interval steps.
2b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_MAX ac Морате прво да ја деселектирате опцијата Автоматски за да можете да ги промените вредностите.
2c chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_LOGARITHM 76 Одредува дека сакате у оската да биде логаритамски под-поделена.
28 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_SCALE_CBX_AUTO_ORIGIN ac Морате прво да ја деселектирате опцијата Автоматски за да можете да ги промените вредностите.
2e chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_ORIGIN ac Морате прво да ја деселектирате опцијата Автоматски за да можете да ги промените вредностите.
33 chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_SCALE%3AMT_MAIN_DATE_STEP 4d Major interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years.
2a chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_AXIS_TYPE 6e For some types of axes, you can select to format an axis as text or date, or to detect the type automatically.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_TICKS_INNER 7c Одредува дека ознаките се сместени од внатрешната страна на оската.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_TICKS_INNER 7c Одредува дека ознаките се сместени од внатрешната страна на оската.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_MINOR_INNER a7 Одредува дека ознаките за споредниот интервал се сместени од внатрешната страна на оската.
35 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_PLACE_TICKS 4b Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_TICKS_OUTER 7e Одредува дека ознаките се сместени од надворешната страна на оската.
39 CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_TICKS_OUTER 7e Одредува дека ознаките се сместени од надворешната страна на оската.
42 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3AEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 40 Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis.
36 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_PLACE_LABELS 63 Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end.
2f CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_PLACE_TICKS 4b Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels.
30 CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_PLACE_LABELS 63 Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end.
3c CHART2_SPINFIELD_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_EDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 40 Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis.
44 CHART2_COMBOBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_EDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT_CATEGORY 44 Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis.
4a chart2%3AComboBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3AEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT_CATEGORY 44 Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_MINOR_INNER a7 Одредува дека ознаките за споредниот интервал се сместени од внатрешната страна на оската.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_MINOR_OUTER a9 Одредува дека ознаките на споредниот интервал се сместени од надворешната страна на оската.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_MINOR_OUTER a9 Одредува дека ознаките на споредниот интервал се сместени од надворешната страна на оската.
3f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridYHelp 74 Отвара дијалог за Мрежа за одредување на својствата на мрежата.
15 .uno%3ADiagramGridAll 74 Отвара дијалог за Мрежа за одредување на својствата на мрежата.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridZHelp 74 Отвара дијалог за Мрежа за одредување на својствата на мрежата.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridYMain 74 Отвара дијалог за Мрежа за одредување на својствата на мрежата.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridXHelp 74 Отвара дијалог за Мрежа за одредување на својствата на мрежата.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridXMain 74 Отвара дијалог за Мрежа за одредување на својствата на мрежата.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridZMain 74 Отвара дијалог за Мрежа за одредување на својствата на мрежата.
12 .uno%3ADiagramWall 14f Отвара дијалог за Ѕид на графиконот, каде можете да ги промените својствата на ѕидот на графиконот. Ѕидот на графиконот е "вертикална" заднина позади податочната област на графиконот.
13 .uno%3ADiagramFloor 177 Го отвара дијалогот за Подот на графиконот, каде можете да ги промените својствата на подот на графиконот. Под на графиконот е долната област во 3Д графиконите. Оваа функција е достапна само за 3Д графикони.
12 .uno%3ADiagramArea 146 Го отвара дијалогот за Област на графиконот, каде што можете да ги смените својствата за областа на графиконот. Област на графиконот е заднина позади сите елементи на графиконот.
3b chart2%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3ARB_SPLINES_B 2e Применува В-сплајн модел.
3e chart2%3AMetricField%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3AMF_SPLINE_ORDER 22 Set the degree of the polynomials.
43 chart2%3AMetricField%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3AMF_SPLINE_RESOLUTION 31 Поставување на резолуција.
3f chart2%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3ARB_SPLINES_CUBIC 3a Применува кубичен сплајн модел.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_4 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_Y_ROTATION 57 Sets the rotation of the chart on the y axis. The preview responds to the new settings.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_2 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_8 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3a chart2%3ACheckbox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_ROUNDEDEDGE 18 Edges are rounded by 5%.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_X_ROTATION 57 Sets the rotation of the chart on the x axis. The preview responds to the new settings.
42 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_AMBIENT_COLOR 26 Select a color using the color dialog.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_3 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_1 45 Click to enable or disable the specular light source with highlights.
3a chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_OBJECTLINES 42 Shows borders around the areas by setting the line style to Solid.
40 chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
3c chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ALB_AMBIENTLIGHT 25 Select a color for the ambient light.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_SHADING 3f Applies Gouraud shading if marked, or flat shading if unmarked.
d .uno%3AView3D 9f Opens a dialog to edit the properties of a three dimensional view for Column, Bar, Pie, and Area charts. For Line and XY (Scatter) charts you can see 3D lines.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_Z_ROTATION 57 Sets the rotation of the chart on the z axis. The preview responds to the new settings.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_5 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_6 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_7 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
39 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3ACBX_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
34 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ALB_SCHEME 49 Select a scheme from the list box, or click any of the check boxes below.
3f chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3ACBX_RIGHT_ANGLED_AXES 101 If Right-angled axes is enabled, you can rotate the chart contents only in X and Y direction, that is, parallel to the chart borders. Right-angled axes is enabled by default for newly created 3D charts. Pie and Donut charts do not support right-angled axes.
46 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHTSOURCE_COLOR 26 Select a color using the color dialog.
3b chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ALB_LIGHTSOURCE 2d Select a color for the selected light source.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_SHOW 20 Displays a legend in your chart.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_TOP 2d Positions the legend to the top of the chart.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SECONDARY_Y 71 Enter a label for the secondary y-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary y-axis.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_ZGRID 75 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_Z 59 Enter a label for the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_LEFT 2e Positions the legend to the left of the chart.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_YGRID 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_XGRID 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_BOTTOM 30 Positions the legend to the bottom of the chart.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SECONDARY_X 71 Enter a label for the secondary x-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary x-axis.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_Y 48 Внесува ознака за у оската (вертикално).
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_RIGHT 2f Positions the legend to the right of the chart.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_X 4c Внесува ознака за х оската (хоризонтално).
19 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_MAIN 3f Внесува наслов на вашиот графикон.
18 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SUB 45 Внесува поднаслов на вашиот графикон.
12 .uno%3ADiagramType 3e Отвара дијалог за тип на графикон.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_WIZARD_ROADMAP 25 Click to go to the named wizard page.
2e chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ALB_3D_SCHEME 1b Select the type of 3D look.
38 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ARB_STACK_Y_PERCENT 27 Stack series display values as percent.
34 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_XVALUE_SORTING 6a Connects points by ascending X values, even if the order of values is different, in an XY scatter diagram.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_SPLINES 3b Линиите се прикажани како криви.
1b CHART2_HID_SCH_NUM_OF_LINES 3b Set the number of lines for the Column and Line chart type.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CTL_TYPE 1a Select a basic chart type.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LB_BAR_GEOMETRY 2c Избира облик од листата.
30 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ARB_STACK_Y 31 Stack series display values on top of each other.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_STACKED 28 Displays stacked series for Line charts.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_CTL_VARIANT 2a Select a sub type of the basic chart type.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_3D_LOOK 26 Enables a 3D look for the data values.
35 chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3APB_SPLINE_DIALOG 2b Opens a dialog to set the curve properties.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ARB_DATACOLS dc Data series get their data from consecutive columns in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data column will contain x-values for all series. All other data columns are used as y-values, one for each series.
2a chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3AED_RANGE a1 Enter the data range that you want to include in your chart. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ARB_DATAROWS d8 Data series get their data from consecutive rows in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data series will contain x-values for all series. All other data series are used as y-values, one for each series.
3b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ACB_FIRST_ROW_ASLABELS 10d For data series in columns: The first row in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first row in the range is used as categories. The remaining rows comprise the data series. If this check box is not selected, all rows are data series.
3e chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ACB_FIRST_COLUMN_ASLABELS 11b For data series in columns: The first column in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first column in the range is used as categories. The remaining columns comprise the data columns. If this check box is not selected, all columns are data columns.
31 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3AIB_RANGE a1 Enter the data range that you want to include in your chart. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
11 .uno%3ADataRanges 4b Opens the Data Ranges dialog where you can edit Data Range and Data Series.
35 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AIMB_RANGE_CAT 144 Shows the source range address of the categories (the texts you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an XY-chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2f chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AEDT_CATEGORIES 144 Shows the source range address of the categories (the texts you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an XY-chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2a chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AEDT_RANGE ff Shows the source range address from the second column of the Data Range list box. You can change the range in the text box or by dragging in the document. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2e chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_ADD 88 Adds a new entry below the current entry in the Data Series list. If an entry is selected, the new data series gets the same chart type.
2f chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_DOWN 36 Moves down the selected entry in the Data Series list.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATA_RANGES_LIST a1 Shows all the data ranges used by the data series that is selected in the Data Series list box. Each data range shows the role name and the source range address.
31 chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_REMOVE 35 Removes the selected entry from the Data Series list.
36 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AIMB_RANGE_MAIN ff Shows the source range address from the second column of the Data Range list box. You can change the range in the text box or by dragging in the document. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2d chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_UP 34 Moves up the selected entry in the Data Series list.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_SERIES_LIST a8 Shows a list of all data series in the chart. Click an entry to view and edit that data series. Click Add to insert a new series into the list after the selected entry.
11 .uno%3ADataInRows 67 Го променува подредувањето на податоците на графиконот.
14 .uno%3ADataInColumns 63 Го променува подредувањето на податоците во колоните.
10 .uno%3AScaleText c1 Повторно ја променува големината на текстот во графиконот кога ќе ја промените големината на графиконот.
15 .uno%3ANewArrangement 16a Ги преместува сите објекти на графиконот на нивната стандардна позиција во тековниот графикон. Оваа функција не го променува типот на графиконот ниту други атрибути, освен позицијата на објектите.
12 .uno%3AContextType 58 Го прикажува името на тековниот тип на графикон.
19 .uno%3AResetAllDataPoints 29 Resets all data points to default format.
11 .uno%3ADeleteAxis 1a Deletes the selected axis.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataSeries 18 Formats the data series.
17 .uno%3AFormatYErrorBars 19 Formats the Y error bars.
11 .uno%3AFormatAxis 1a Formats the selected axis.
12 .uno%3AFormatTitle 1b Formats the selected title.
16 .uno%3AInsertMinorGrid 15 Inserts a minor grid.
1e .uno%3AFormatTrendlineEquation 1f Formats the trendline equation.
10 .uno%3ADrawChart 110 Креира графикон во тековниот документ. За да искористите опсег на ќелии како извор на податоци, изберете ги ќелиите и потоа изберете ја оваа наредба.
11 .uno%3AInsertAxis 21 Opens a dialog to insert an axis.
12 .uno%3AFormatFloor 18 Formats the chart floor.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockLoss 22 Formats the stock loss indicators.
13 SW_HID_INSERT_CHART 110 Креира графикон во тековниот документ. За да искористите опсег на ќелии како извор на податоци, изберете ги ќелиите и потоа изберете ја оваа наредба.
16 .uno%3AStarChartDialog 110 Креира графикон во тековниот документ. За да искористите опсег на ќелии како извор на податоци, изберете ги ќелиите и потоа изберете ја оваа наредба.
16 .uno%3AFormatTrendline 16 Formats the trendline.
16 .uno%3AFormatMeanValue 1c Formats the mean value line.
14 .uno%3AInsertR2Value 33 Inserts the coefficient of determination R² value.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataPoint 20 Formats the selected data point.
16 .uno%3AFormatMinorGrid 17 Formats the minor grid.
15 .uno%3AResetDataPoint 31 Resets the selected data point to default format.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMeanValue 1c Deletes the mean value line.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMajorGrid 17 Deletes the major grid.
13 .uno%3AFormatLegend 19 Formats the chart legend.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMinorGrid 17 Deletes the minor grid.
16 .uno%3AInsertAxisTitle 27 Opens a dialog to insert an axis title.
16 .uno%3AFormatChartArea 17 Formats the chart area.
18 .uno%3AInsertObjectChart 110 Креира графикон во тековниот документ. За да искористите опсег на ќелии како извор на податоци, изберете ги ќелиите и потоа изберете ја оваа наредба.
16 .uno%3AInsertMajorGrid 15 Inserts a major grid.
17 .uno%3AInsertRemoveAxes 28 Opens a dialog to insert or delete axes.
17 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabels 18 Deletes all data labels.
13 .uno%3ADeleteLegend 19 Deletes the chart legend.
17 .uno%3AInsertDataLabels 14 Inserts data labels.
13 .uno%3AInsertTitles 26 Opens a dialog to insert chart titles.
11 .uno%3AFormatWall 17 Formats the chart wall.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockGain 22 Formats the stock gain indicators.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataLabel 20 Formats the selected data label.
16 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabel 20 Deletes the selected data label.
1e .uno%3ADeleteTrendlineEquation 1f Deletes the trendline equation.
14 .uno%3ADeleteR2Value 16 Deletes the R² value.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataLabels 18 Formats the data labels.
17 .uno%3ADeleteYErrorBars 19 Deletes the Y error bars.
16 .uno%3AInsertDataLabel 1c Inserts a single data label.
23 .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquationAndR2 48 Inserts the trendline equation and the coefficient of determination R².
16 .uno%3AFormatMajorGrid 17 Formats the major grid.
1b .uno%3AChartElementSelector b9 Select the element from the chart that you want to format. The element gets selected in the chart preview. Click Format Selection to open the properties dialog for the selected element.
